3GPP FDD incl. enchanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+

3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS
tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Digital Standard for
R&S®Signal Generators
Operating Manual
(;ÕÂC<)
Operating Manual
Test & Measurement
1171.5219.12 ─ 11
This document describes the following software options:
●
R&S®AMU-K42/-K43/-K45/-K59
1402.6206.02, 1402.6306.02, 1402.8909.02, 1403.0053.02
●
R&S®SMATE-K42/-K43/-K45/-K59
1404.5207.02, 1404.5307.02, 1404.7300.02, 1415.1320.02
●
R&S®SMBV-K42/-K43/-K45/-K59
1415.8048.02, 1415.8054.02, 1415.8077.02, 1415.8219.02
●
R&S®SMJ-K42/-K43/-K45/-K59
1404.0405.02, 1404.0505.02, 1404.1816.02, 1415.1508.02
●
R&S®SMU-K42/-K43/-K45/-K59
1160.7909.02, 1160.9660.02, 1161.0666.02, 1415.0001.02
●
R&S®AFQ-K242/-K243/-K245/-K259
1401.6354.02, 1401.6402.02 , 1401.6504.02, 1401.5658.02
●
R&S®AMU-K242/-K243/-K245/-K259
1402.7702.02, 1402.6306.02, 1402.8909.02, 1403.0153.02
●
R&S®SMBV-K242/-K243/-K245/-K259
1415.8248.02, 1415.8254.02, 1415.8277.02, 1415.8377.02
●
R&S®SMJ-K242/-K243/-K245/-K259
1409.0610.02, 1409.0710.02, 1409.0910.02, 1415.1608.02
●
R&S®SMU-K242/-K243/-K245/-K259
1408.5618.02, 1408.5718.02, 1408.5918.02, 1415.0101.02
●
R&S®CMW-KW401/-KW402
1203.1058.02, 1203.1106.02
© 2010 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com
Printed in Germany – Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®AMU is abbreviated as R&S AMU, R&S®SMATE is abbreviated as
R&S SMATE, R&S®SMBV is abbreviated as R&S SMBV, R&S®SMJ is abbreviated as R&S SMJ, R&S®SMU is abbreviated as
R&S SMU, R&S®WinIQSIM2 is abbreviated as R&S WinIQSIM2, R&S®AFQ is abbreviated as R&S AFQ.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the attached EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a
condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation,
you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer
them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that only
skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the
product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be indicated at
the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and the product
documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories.
Symbols and safety labels
Notice, general
danger location
Observe product
documentation
ON/OFF supply
voltage
Caution
when
handling
heavy
equipment
Standby
indication
1171.0000.42-05.00
Danger of
electric
shock
Direct current
(DC)
Warning!
Hot surface
PE terminal
Alternating current
(AC)
Ground
Direct/alternating
current (DC/AC)
Ground
terminal
Be careful when
handling
electrostatic
sensitive
devices
Device fully protected by
double (reinforced) insulation
Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Tags and their meaning
The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
indicates the possibility of incorrect operation which can result in damage to
the product.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic
Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or
military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used
only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of tags in
connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury
or material damage.
Operating states and operating positions
The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, pollution
severity 2, overvoltage category 2, use only indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level,
max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal
voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
death.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with an earthing contact and protective earth connection.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is
not permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension
cords or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that
they are safe to use.
4. If the product does not have a power switch for disconnection from the AC supply network, the plug of
the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device. In such cases, always ensure that the
power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (corresponding to the length of connecting
cable, approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from
the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems, a
disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cable on a regular basis to
ensure that it is in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully
laying the power cable, you can ensure that the cable will not be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 16 A (higher fuse
only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be taken to
avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the PE terminal on site and the
product's PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made. The product may be
installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that anyone who has access to the product, as
well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1. Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal", item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no
other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation. The objective is to
prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulation
resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure the
continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Keep cells and batteries out of the hands of children. If a cell or a battery has been swallowed, seek
medical aid immediately.
5. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
6. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
7. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
8. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 5
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
Waste disposal
1. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
2. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
adjunto de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de
seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario
deberá atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a
estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 6
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Aviso: punto de
peligro general
Observar la
documentación
del producto
Tensión de
alimentación de
PUESTA EN
MARCHA /
PARADA
Atención en
el manejo de
dispositivos
de peso
elevado
Indicación de
estado de
espera
(Standby)
1171.0000.42-05.00
Peligro de
choque
eléctrico
Advertencia:
superficie
caliente
Corriente
continua (DC)
Conexión a
conductor de
protección
Corriente alterna
(AC)
Conexión
a tierra
Conexión
a masa
Corriente
continua /
Corriente alterna
(DC/AC)
Aviso: Cuidado
en el manejo de
dispositivos
sensibles a la
electrostática
(ESD)
El aparato está protegido
en su totalidad por un
aislamiento doble
(reforzado)
Page 7
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Palabras de señal y su significado
En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que
provocará muerte o lesiones graves si no se evita.
ADVERTENCIA identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de
provocar muerte o lesiones (graves) si no se evita.
ATENCIÓN identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar
lesiones leves o moderadas si no se evita.
AVISO indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y, como
consecuencia, dañarlo.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, grado de suciedad 2, categoría de sobrecarga eléctrica 2, uso
solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta
4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de ±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de
±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, pueden
causarse lesiones o incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 8
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se deberá considerar
el enchufe del cable de conexión como interruptor. En estos casos se deberá asegurar que el enchufe
siempre sea de fácil acceso (de acuerdo con la longitud del cable de conexión, aproximadamente
2 m). Los interruptores de función o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si los
productos sin interruptor están integrados en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el
interruptor en el nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión Ueff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 9
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados, los llamados alérgenos
(p. ej. el níquel). Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen reacciones
alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o
dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las causas y
evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación", punto 1.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 10
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Mantener baterías y celdas fuera del alcance de los niños. En caso de ingestión de una celda o
batería, avisar inmediatamente a un médico.
5. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 11
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
6. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
7. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
8. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación
1. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
2. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 12
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
Contents
1 Preface..................................................................................................11
1.1
Documentation Overview...........................................................................................11
1.2
Conventions Used in the Documentation.................................................................12
2 Introduction..........................................................................................13
3 Modulation System 3GPP FDD...........................................................16
3.1
Scrambling Code Generator......................................................................................16
3.1.1
Downlink Scrambling Code Generator..........................................................................16
3.1.2
Uplink Scrambling Code Generator..............................................................................17
3.2
Scrambling Unit...........................................................................................................19
3.3
Channelization Code Generator................................................................................19
3.4
Data Source.................................................................................................................20
3.5
Slot and Frame Builder...............................................................................................20
3.6
Timing Offset...............................................................................................................21
3.7
Demultiplexer..............................................................................................................22
3.8
Power Control..............................................................................................................22
3.9
Summation and Filtering............................................................................................23
3.10
Multicode.....................................................................................................................23
3.11
HARQ Feedback..........................................................................................................24
3.11.1
Limitations.....................................................................................................................24
3.11.2
Setup.............................................................................................................................24
3.11.3
Timing...........................................................................................................................25
3.12
HS-SCCH less operation............................................................................................26
3.12.1
HS-SCCH Type 2..........................................................................................................27
3.12.2
HS-SCCH Type 2 Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 7..................................................28
3.13
Higher Order Modulation............................................................................................28
3.13.1
64QAM in downlink.......................................................................................................28
3.13.2
64QAM Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 8..................................................................28
3.13.3
16QAM in uplink............................................................................................................29
3.13.4
16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8....................................................................29
3.14
MIMO in HSPA+...........................................................................................................29
3.14.1
D-TxAA Feedback signaling: PCI and CQI...................................................................30
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
3
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
3.14.2
MIMO downlink control channel support.......................................................................31
3.14.3
Redundancy Version.....................................................................................................32
3.14.4
HARQ Processes..........................................................................................................32
3.14.5
MIMO uplink control channel support............................................................................32
3.14.6
CQI Reports: Type A and Type B.................................................................................34
3.14.7
PCI reports....................................................................................................................34
3.14.8
MIMO Fixed Reference Channels: H-Set 9 and H-Set 11............................................35
3.15
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)...................................................................................35
3.15.1
DC-HSDPA Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO mode)..............................................36
3.15.1.1
CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2.........................................................................................37
3.15.2
DC-HSDPA + MIMO......................................................................................................38
3.15.3
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 12..........................38
3.16
UE Capabilities............................................................................................................38
3.16.1
MIMO and 64QAM UE Capabilities...............................................................................39
3.16.2
UL 16QAM UE Capabilities...........................................................................................39
3.16.3
MIMO and DC-HSDPA Operation UE Capabilities.......................................................39
4 User Interface.......................................................................................40
4.1
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals...................................................................41
4.2
Configure Base Station or UE....................................................................................46
4.3
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings...............................................................................52
4.3.1
Filter..............................................................................................................................52
4.3.2
Clipping.........................................................................................................................54
4.3.3
ARB Settings.................................................................................................................56
4.4
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings...................................................................................57
4.4.1
Trigger In.......................................................................................................................58
4.4.2
Marker Mode.................................................................................................................62
4.4.3
Marker Delay.................................................................................................................63
4.4.4
Clock Settings...............................................................................................................63
4.4.5
Global Settings..............................................................................................................65
4.5
Test Setups/Models....................................................................................................65
4.6
Predefined Settings - Downlink.................................................................................69
4.7
Additional User Equipment - Uplink..........................................................................70
4.8
Base Station Configuration........................................................................................72
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
4
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
4.8.1
Common Settings..........................................................................................................72
4.8.2
Channel Table...............................................................................................................76
4.9
Compressed Mode - BS..............................................................................................83
4.9.1
General Settings...........................................................................................................84
4.9.2
Compressed Mode Configuration Graph......................................................................86
4.9.3
Transmission Gaps.......................................................................................................87
4.9.4
Compressed Ranges....................................................................................................88
4.9.5
Non-compressed ranges...............................................................................................89
4.10
Code Domain Graph - BS...........................................................................................89
4.11
Channel Graph - BS....................................................................................................92
4.12
HSDPA Settings - BS..................................................................................................93
4.12.1
Enhanced HSDPA Mode Settings.................................................................................94
4.12.2
MIMO Configuration......................................................................................................95
4.13
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS.............................................................................96
4.13.1
HSDPA H-Set General Setting......................................................................................98
4.13.2
H-Set Configuration Common Settings.........................................................................98
4.13.3
MIMO Settings............................................................................................................102
4.13.4
Global Settings............................................................................................................103
4.13.5
Coding Configuration..................................................................................................104
4.13.6
Signal Structure...........................................................................................................106
4.13.7
HARQ Simulation........................................................................................................108
4.13.8
Error Insertion.............................................................................................................109
4.14
Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1....................................................................110
4.15
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1..................................................................110
4.15.1
Channel Number and State.........................................................................................111
4.15.2
Channel Coding - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1..............................................................111
4.16
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1.......................................................................113
4.16.1
Channel Number and State.........................................................................................114
4.16.2
Channel Coding - Enhanced DPCHs BS1..................................................................115
4.16.3
Transport Channel - Enhanced DPCHs BS1..............................................................119
4.16.4
Error Insertion - Enhanced DPCHs BS1.....................................................................122
4.16.5
Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1......................................................123
4.17
S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table...................................................................128
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
5
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
4.18
Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table.............................................................129
4.19
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table......................................................................130
4.19.1
Slot Structure (DPCCH) - BS......................................................................................130
4.19.2
DPCCH Power Offset section.....................................................................................134
4.20
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table........................................................................134
4.21
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table...........................................................136
4.22
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table........................................................................138
4.23
Multi Channel Assistant - BS...................................................................................141
4.24
User Equipment Configuration (UE)........................................................................144
4.24.1
Common Settings - UE...............................................................................................147
4.25
Code Domain Graph - UE.........................................................................................150
4.26
Compressed Mode - UE............................................................................................151
4.26.1
Compressed Mode General Settings..........................................................................151
4.26.2
Compressed Mode Configuration Graph....................................................................152
4.26.3
Transmission Gaps.....................................................................................................153
4.26.4
Compressed Ranges..................................................................................................154
4.26.5
Non-compressed ranges.............................................................................................154
4.27
UL-DTX - UE...............................................................................................................155
4.28
PRACH Settings - UE................................................................................................157
4.28.1
Graphical Display........................................................................................................160
4.28.2
Preamble Settings.......................................................................................................162
4.28.3
Message Part..............................................................................................................163
4.28.4
Channel Coding State.................................................................................................164
4.29
PCPCH Settings - UE................................................................................................166
4.29.1
Graphical Display........................................................................................................169
4.29.2
Preamble Settings.......................................................................................................171
4.29.3
Message Part..............................................................................................................172
4.29.4
Channel Coding..........................................................................................................174
4.30
DPCCH Settings - UE................................................................................................176
4.31
E-DPCCH Settings - UE............................................................................................182
4.32
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE..........................................................................................184
4.32.1
HS-DPCCH Common Settings....................................................................................186
4.32.2
Uplink Feedback Signaling Table (Release 8 and Later)............................................188
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
6
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
4.32.3
HS-DPCCH Setings for Normal Operation (Up to Release 7)....................................192
4.32.4
MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to Release 7)...........................................................194
4.33
DPDCH Settings - UE................................................................................................197
4.33.1
DPCCH Settings.........................................................................................................198
4.33.2
Structure of the DPDCH Channel Table.....................................................................200
4.33.3
Channel Table.............................................................................................................201
4.34
E-DPDCH Settings - UE............................................................................................203
4.34.1
E-DPDCH Settings......................................................................................................204
4.34.2
Structure of the E-DPDCH Channel Table..................................................................205
4.34.3
Channel Table.............................................................................................................207
4.35
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE........................................................................................209
4.35.1
FRC General Settings.................................................................................................211
4.35.2
Coding And Physical Channels...................................................................................212
4.35.3
DTX Mode...................................................................................................................215
4.35.4
HARQ Simulation........................................................................................................215
4.35.5
Bit and Block Error Insertion.......................................................................................217
4.36
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1..............................................................218
4.36.1
Enhanced Channels State..........................................................................................219
4.36.2
Channel Coding - DPDCH Enhanced UE 1................................................................220
4.36.3
Transport Channel - Enhanced DPDCH UE1.............................................................223
4.36.4
Error Insertion - Enhanced DPDCH UE1....................................................................226
4.36.5
Dynamic Power Control - DPDCH Enhanced User Equipment..................................227
5 Tests Case Wizard.............................................................................230
5.1
Introduction...............................................................................................................230
5.1.1
General Considerations..............................................................................................232
5.1.2
General Settings.........................................................................................................234
5.1.3
Basestation Configuration...........................................................................................239
5.1.4
Apply...........................................................................................................................240
5.2
Receiver Tests...........................................................................................................240
5.2.1
Overview.....................................................................................................................240
5.2.1.1
Basic Configuration.....................................................................................................240
5.2.1.2
Test Setups - Receiver Tests......................................................................................240
5.2.1.2.1
Standard Test Setup - One Path.................................................................................241
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
7
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
5.2.1.2.2
Standard Test Setup - Two Paths...............................................................................242
5.2.1.2.3
Standard Test Setup - Diversity Measurements.........................................................243
5.2.1.3
Carrying Out a Receiver Test Measurement...............................................................245
5.2.1.4
General Wanted Signal Parameters...........................................................................246
5.2.2
Receiver Characteristics.............................................................................................247
5.2.2.1
Test Case 7.2 - Reference Sensitivity Level...............................................................247
5.2.2.1.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.2........................................................247
5.2.2.2
Test Case 7.3 - Dynamic Range.................................................................................248
5.2.2.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.3........................................................248
5.2.2.3
Test Case 7.4 - Adjacent Channel Selectivity.............................................................250
5.2.2.3.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.4........................................................250
5.2.2.4
Test Case 7.5 - Blocking Characteristics....................................................................252
5.2.2.4.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.5........................................................252
5.2.2.4.2
Interferer Signal...........................................................................................................254
5.2.2.4.3
Blocking performance requirements...........................................................................255
5.2.2.5
Test Case 7.6 - Intermodulation Characteristics.........................................................260
5.2.2.5.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.6........................................................261
5.2.2.6
Test Case 7.8 - Verification of Internal BER...............................................................264
5.2.2.6.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.8........................................................264
5.2.3
Performance Requirements........................................................................................265
5.2.3.1
Test Case 8.2.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Static Propagation Conditions................265
5.2.3.1.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.2.1.....................................................266
5.2.3.2
Test Case 8.3.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 1 Conditions.......268
5.2.3.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.3.1.....................................................269
5.2.3.3
Test Case 8.3.2 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 2 Conditions.......271
5.2.3.4
Test Case 8.3.3 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 3 Conditions.......271
5.2.3.5
Test Case 8.3.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 4 Conditions.......272
5.2.3.6
Test Case 8.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Moving Propagation Conditions.................273
5.2.3.7
Test Case 8.5 - Demodulation of DCH in Birth/Death Propagation Conditions..........274
5.2.3.8
Test Case 8.6 - Verification of Internal BLER.............................................................274
5.2.3.8.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.6........................................................275
5.2.3.9
Test Case 8.8.1 - RACH Preamble Detection in Static Propagation Conditions.........277
5.2.3.9.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.1.....................................................277
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
8
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
5.2.3.10
Test Case 8.8.2 - RACH Preamble Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3.................279
5.2.3.10.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.2.....................................................280
5.2.3.11
Test Case 8.8.3 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Static Propagation Conditions.............................................................................................................................281
5.2.3.11.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.3.....................................................282
5.2.3.12
Test Case 8.8.4 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Multipath Fading Case 3
....................................................................................................................................284
5.2.3.12.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.4.....................................................285
5.2.3.13
Test Case 8.9.1 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection
in Static Propagation Conditions.................................................................................286
5.2.3.14
Test Case 8.9.2 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection
in Multipath Fading Case 3.........................................................................................287
5.2.3.15
Test Case 8.9.3 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Static Propagation Conditions
....................................................................................................................................287
5.2.3.16
Test Case 8.9.4 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Multipath Fading Case 3.......287
5.3
Transmitter Tests......................................................................................................288
5.3.1
Basic Configuration.....................................................................................................288
5.3.2
Test Case 6.4.2 - Power Control Steps.......................................................................288
5.3.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.4.2.....................................................289
5.3.2.2
Carrying Out the Test Case 6.4.2 Measurement........................................................293
5.3.3
Test Case 6.6 - Transmit Intermodulation...................................................................294
5.3.3.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.6........................................................295
5.3.3.2
Carrying Out a Test Case 6.6 Measurement..............................................................297
6 Remote-Control Commands.............................................................299
6.1
General Commands..................................................................................................300
6.2
Filter/Clipping Settings.............................................................................................305
6.3
Trigger Settings.........................................................................................................311
6.4
Marker Settings.........................................................................................................316
6.5
Clock Settings...........................................................................................................320
6.6
Test Models and Predefined Settings.....................................................................323
6.7
Setting Base Stations...............................................................................................329
6.8
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1....................................................................373
6.9
User Equipment Settings.........................................................................................394
6.9.1
General Settings.........................................................................................................395
6.9.2
Compressed Mode Settings........................................................................................399
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
9
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Contents
6.9.3
DPCCH Settings.........................................................................................................402
6.9.4
DPDCH Settings.........................................................................................................423
6.9.5
PCPCH Settings..........................................................................................................426
6.9.6
PRACH Settings..........................................................................................................436
6.9.7
HSUPA Settings..........................................................................................................443
6.9.8
UL-DTX Settings.........................................................................................................461
6.10
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment..........................................................463
6.11
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem.............................................................478
List of Commands..............................................................................508
Index....................................................................................................519
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
10
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Preface
Documentation Overview
1 Preface
1.1 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S Signal Generator consists of the following parts:
●
Online Help system on the instrument,
●
"Quick Start Guide" printed manual,
●
Documentation CD-ROM with:
– Online help system (*.chm) as a standalone help,
–
Operating Manuals for base unit and options,
–
Service Manual,
–
Data sheet and specifications,
–
Links to useful sites on the R&S internet.
Online Help
The Online Help is embedded in the instrument's firmware. It offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming. The
online help contains help on operating the R&S Signal Generator and all available
options.
Quick Start Guide
This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the
Documentation CD-ROM. It provides the information needed to set up and start working
with the instrument. Basic operations and an example of setup are described. The manual
includes also general information, e.g., Safety Instructions.
Operating Manuals
The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide. Operating Manuals
are provided for the base unit and each additional (software) option.
These manuals are available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation
CD-ROM delivered with the instrument. In the Operating Manual for the base unit, all
instrument functions are described in detail. Furthermore, it provides an introduction to
remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples. Information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages is also given.
In the individual option manuals, the specific instrument functions of the option are
described in detail. For additional information on default settings and parameters, refer
to the data sheets. Basic information on operating the R&S Signal Generator is not included in the option manuals.
These manuals can also be orderd in printed form (see ordering information in the data
sheet).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
11
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Preface
Conventions Used in the Documentation
Service Manual
This Service Manual is available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation
CD-ROM delivered with the instrument. It describes how to check compliance with rated
specifications, on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It
contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement of modules.
This manual can also be orderd in printed form (see ordering information in the data
sheet).
Release Notes
The release notes describe new and modified functions, eliminated problems, and last
minute changes to the documentation. The corresponding firmware version is indicated
on the title page of the release notes. The current release notes are provided in the
Internet.
1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation
The following conventions are used throughout this documentation:
Typographical conventions
Convention
Description
"Graphical user interface elements"
All names of graphical user interface elements on the
screen, such as dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks.
KEYS
Key names are written in capital letters.
File names, commands, program code
File names, commands, coding samples and screen
output are distinguished by their font.
Input
Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links
Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References"
References to other parts of the documentation are
enclosed by quotation marks.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
12
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Introduction
2 Introduction
The R&S Signal Generator provides you with the ability to generate signals in accordance
with the WCDMA standard 3GPP FDD.
Option K43 3GPP FDD enhanced MS/BS tests incl. HSDPA extends the 3GPP FDD
signal generation with simulation of high speed channels in the downlink (HS-SCCH, HSPDSCH) and the uplink (HS-DPCCH) and with dynamic power control in real time.
HSDPA (high speed downlink packet access) mode enhances the 3GPP FDD standard
by data channels with high data rates especially for multi media applications.
Option K45 3GPP FDD enhanced BS/MS test including HSUPA extends the 3GPP FDD
signal generation with full HSUPA (high speed uplink packet access) support. Option K59
HSPA+ extends the HSDPA and/or HSUPA signal generation with HSPA+ features in
the downlink and uplink.
WCDMA (Wideband CDMA) describes a group of mobile radio communication technologies, the details of which differ greatly. The R&S Signal Generator supports the 3GPP
FDD standard developed by the 3GPP ("3rd Generation Partnership Project") standardization committee. The standard is implemented in accordance with Release 8, dated
December 2007. The signals can also be set to be compatible with previous releases, by
not using the new functions of later releases (e.g. no HSDPA channels). Details can be
found in the relevant releases of the standard.
The R&S Signal Generator generates the 3GPP FDD signals in a combination of realtime
mode (enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode. Channel coding and simulation of bit and block errors can be activated for the enhanced channels of Release 99
and for H-Sets 1-5 generated in realtime. Channel coding can also be activated for
HSDPA/HSPA+ H-Sets and all HSUPA/HSPA+ FRC channels which are generated in
arbitrary wave mode. Data lists can also be used for the data and TPC fields. The
enhanced state of realtime channels can be switched off to generate specific test scenarios. In arbitrary waveform mode, the signal is first calculated and then output.
The R&S Signal Generator simulates 3GPP FDD at the physical channel level and also
at the transport layer level for all channels for which channel coding can be activated.
The following list gives an overview of the functions provided by the R&S Signal
Generator for generating a 3GPP FDD signal (Option K42):
●
Configuration of up to 4 base stations and 4 user equipment.
●
Combination of realtime mode (enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode
●
All special channels and up to 512 channels on the downlink, except HSDPA, HSUPA
and HSPA+
●
Various test models and pre-defined settings for the uplink and the downlink
●
Modulation 16QAM and 64QAM (downlink) for configuring high-speed channels in
continuous mode (test model 5&6, HSDPA)
●
Clipping for reducing the crest factor
●
Misuse TPC" parameter for varying the original normal transmit power over time
●
Simulation of up to 128 additional user equipment
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
13
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Introduction
The following functions are provided specifically for the receiver test:
●
Realtime generation of up to 4 code channels with the option of using data lists for
the data and TPC fields
●
Channel coding of the reference measurement channels, AMR and BCH in realtime
●
Feeding through of bit errors (to test a BER tester) and block errors (to test a BLER
tester)
●
Simulation of orthogonal channel noise (OCNS in accordance with TS 25.101)
●
External control of channel performance in realtime
●
Presettings in accordance with 3GPP specifications
●
HSDPA Downlink in continuous mode (test model 5&6 for TX tests)
The following functions are provided by extension K43 Enhanced BS/MS Tests
Including HSDPA:
●
HSDPA uplink
●
HSDPA downlink (packet mode and H-Set mode without CPC, 64QAM and MIMO)
●
Dynamic Power Control
●
Predefined and user-definable H-Sets
●
Assistance in the setting of the appropriate sequence length for arbitrary waveform
mode
The following functions are provided by extension K45 Enhanced BS/MS test
including HSUPA:
●
HSUPA Downlink (RX measurements on 3GPP FDD UEs with correct timing )
●
HSUPA Uplink (RX measurements on 3GPP FDD Node BS supporting HSUPA)
●
HSUPA HARQ Feedback support
The following functions are provided by extension K59 HSPA+:
●
Downlink 64QAM with channel coding
●
Uplink 16QAM (4PAM)
●
Downlink MIMO
●
Uplink ACK/PCI/CQI feedback for downlink MIMO and/or Dual Cell HSDPA
●
CPC in downlink (HS-SCCH less operation, Enhanced F-DPCH) and uplink (DL-DTX,
Uplink DPCCH slot format 4)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
14
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Parameter
Value
Chip rate
3.84 Mcps
Channel types
Downlink:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Introduction
Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)
Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)
Primary Sync Channel (P-SCH)
Secondary Sync Channel (S-SCH)
Primary Common Control Phys. Channel (P-CCPCH)
Secondary Common Control Phys. Channel (S-CCPCH)
Page Indication Channel (PICH)
Acquisition Indication Channel (AICH)
Access Preamble Acquisition Indication Channel (AP-AICH)
Collision Detection Acquisition Indication Channel (CD-AICH)
Phys. Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DL-DPCCH)
Dedicated Phys. Channel (DPCH)
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)
High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH), Modulation
QPSK, 16 QAM or 64QAM
HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, E-HICH, F-DPCH)
Uplink:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Symbol rates
Phys. Random Access Channel (PRACH)
Phys. Common Packet Channel (PCPCH)
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH)
Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH)
High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH)
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)
E-DCH dedicated physical data channel (E-DPDCH)
7.5ksps, 15ksps, 30ksps to 960ksps depending on the channel type (downlink)
15ksps, 30ksps, 60ksps to 6 x 960ksps overall symbol rate on uplink
Channel count
In downlink 4 base stations each with up to 128 DPCHs and 11 special channels.
In uplink 4 user equipment either with PRACH or PCPCH or DPDCH and up to 6
DPDCHs.
Frame structure
Timeslot: 0.667ms,
Radio frame: 15 timeslots = 10ms
The frame structure of symbols depends on the symbol rate.
Scrambling code
Downlink: 18 bit M sequence
Uplink: 25 bit M sequence in long mode and 8 bit M sequence in short mode
Channelization code for
DPCH, DPDCH and
DPCCH
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
"Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor Code (OVSF)" square matrix of dimension
chip rate/symbol rate
15
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Scrambling Code Generator
3 Modulation System 3GPP FDD
The following block diagram shows the components of the 3GPP FDD transmission system.
Fig. 3-1: Components of the 3GPP FDD transmission system
3.1 Scrambling Code Generator
The scrambling code generator (previously called long code generator) is used to scramble the chip sequence as a function of the transmitter.
Depending on the link direction and mode (long or short), the structure and initialization
regulation of the generator are different.
3.1.1 Downlink Scrambling Code Generator
This generator consists of a pair of shift registers from which the binary sequences for
inphase and orthogonal component of the scrambling code are determined. The figure 3-2 shows that the I component is produced as EXOR operation of the LSB outputs,
whereas the register contents are first masked and read out for the Q component and
then EXORed.
Table 3-1: Generator polynomials of the downlink scrambling code generators
Shift register 1
x18+x7+1
Shift register 2
x18+x10+x7+x5+1
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
16
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Scrambling Code Generator
Fig. 3-2: Structure of downlink scrambling code generator
The shift registers are initialized by loading shift register 1 with "0...01" and shift register
2 completely with "1". In addition, shift register 1 is wound forward by n cycles, n being
the scrambling code number or Scrambling Code (SC) for short.
After a cycle time of one radio frame the generators are reset, i.e. the above initialization
is carried out again.
3.1.2 Uplink Scrambling Code Generator
In the uplink, a differentiation is made between two SC modes. The long SC, on the one
hand, can be used for all types of channel. The short SC, on the other hand, can be used
as an alternative to the long SC for all channels except PRACH and PCPCH.
Uplink long scrambling code
Principally, the code generator of the long SC in the uplink is of the same structure as
the SC in the downlink. However, the generator polynomials of the shift registers and the
type of initialization are different.
Table 3-2: Generator polynomials of the uplink long scrambling code generator
Shift register 1
x25+x3+1
Shift register 2
x25+x3+x2+x+1
The shift registers are initialized by allocating 1 to shift register 1 bit number 24 and the
binary form of the scrambling code number n to bits 23 to 0. Shift register 2 is completely
loaded with "1".
The read-out positions for the Q component are defined such that they correspond to an
IQ offset of 16.777.232 cycles.
After a cycle time of one radio frame the generators are reset, i.e. the above initialization
is carried out again.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
17
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Scrambling Code Generator
Uplink short scrambling code
The code generator of the short SC in the uplink consists of a total of 3 coupled shift
registers.
Fig. 3-3: Structure of uplink short scrambling code generator
Table 3-3: Generator polynomials of uplink short scrambling code generator
Shift register 1 (binary)
x8+x7+x5+x4+1
Shift register 2 (binary)
x8+x7+x5+x+1
Shift register 3 (quaternary)
x8+x5+3x3+x2+2x+1
The output sequences of the two binary shift registers are weighted with factor 2 and
added to the output sequence of the quaternary shift register (Modulo 4 addition). The
resulting quaternary output sequence is mapped into the binary complex level by the
mapper block.
For initialization of the three 8-bit shift registers (in a modified way) the binary form of the
24-bit short SC number n is used, for details see 3GPP TS 25 213, Spreading and Modulation.
Table 3-4: Mapping of the quaternary output sequence into the binary IQ level
zv(n)
Sv(n)
0
+1 + j1
1
-1 + j1
2
-1 - j1
3
+1 - j1
Preamble scrambling code generator
When generating the preambles of the PRACH and PCPCH a special SC is used. It is
based on the Long SC described under a), however only the I component is taken and
subsequently a pointer (ej(PI/4 + PI/4 * k) , k=0 to 4095) modulated upon it.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
18
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Scrambling Unit
Modification of the long and short scrambling code output sequence
The scrambling code sequence of the Q component is modified as standard to reduce
the crest factor of the signal. Zero-crossings can thus be avoided for every second cycle.
(This method is often called "HPSK").
For details see 3GPP TS 25 213, Spreading and Modulation. R&S Signal Generator
makes use of a decimation factor of 2.
3.2 Scrambling Unit
In the scrambling unit, the output of the scrambling code generator is linked with spread
symbols. If the input signal and the scrambling code signal are interpreted as complex
signal (Ci , Cq , SCi , SCq' ∈ { -1, +1 }), the output signal is a complex multiplication of the
two signals:
Si + j Sq = (Ci + j Cq) * (SCi + j SCq')
and the following equations apply
Si = CiSCi – CqSCq'
Sq = CiSCq' + CqSCi
The signal thus obtained can be interpreted as a QPSK signal with the following constellation diagram:
Fig. 3-4: Constellation diagram of a channel with 0 dB power
There are auxiliary conditions for some types of channels that may result in different
constellation diagrams. If, for instance, symbols of the SCH are coded, a BPSK constellation is obtained without the scrambling unit.
3.3 Channelization Code Generator
The channelization code generator cyclically outputs a channel-specific bit pattern. The
length of the cycle corresponds to the period of the source symbol to be spread, i.e. the
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
19
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Data Source
number of bits corresponds to the spread factor. The spreading sequence for the I and
Q branch is identical (real value). Spreading is a simple EXOR operation.
Two different channelization code generators are used depending on the type of channel:
Channelization code generator for all channels except SCH
Due to this channelization code the channel separation takes place in the sum signal.
The channelization code number is the line of an orthogonal spreading matrix which is
generated according to an iterative scheme ("OVSF").
Channelization code generator SCH
This generator replaces the one described above if the synchronization code symbol of
the SCH channels is spread.
The spreading matrix is replaced by a method that forms the spreading sequence from
a Hadamard sequence and a statistical sequence. For details see 3GPP TS 25 213.
3.4 Data Source
The data and TPC fields of the enhanced channels (realtime channels) can be filled from
data lists containing data defined by the user. This allows user information from higher
levels such as the transport or physical layers to be introduced into the signal generation
process.
The choice of data sources is crucially important for the signal characteristics. The constellation diagram and the crest factor in particular are modeled to a great extent by a
suitable choice of data.
3.5 Slot and Frame Builder
The bits from the data source are first entered into a frame structure. The frames are
made up of two hierarchical levels:
Table 3-5: Hierarchical structure of 3GPP FDD frames
Hierarchy
Length in ms
Timeslot
0,667
Radio frame
10
Remarks
After a radio frame, pilot symbols
are repeated. One radio frame consists of 15 timeslots.
A frame is also the length of a
scrambling code cycle. Frames are
the basic unit in R&S Signal Generator.
The sequence length is stated in
radio frames.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
20
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Timing Offset
The configuration of the timeslots depends on the channel type and symbol rate. The
following components are distinguished:
●
Pilot sequence
The pilot sequence characterizes the timeslot position within the radio frame and also
depends on the symbol rate, transmit diversity and the pilot length parameter.Channel types DPCH, S-CCPCH, DL-DPCCH, DPCCH, PRACH and PCPCH have a pilot
sequence.
The pilot sequence cannot be changed by the user.
●
Synchronization code symbol
The synchronization code symbol is the only symbol of the SCH. It is fixed to "11".
●
TPC symbol
This symbol is used to control the transmit power. It is used in DPCH, DL-DPCCH
and DPCCH.
A bit pattern for the sequence of TPC symbols can be indicated as a channel-specific
pattern.
●
Data symbols
These symbols carry the user information and are fed from the data source. They are
used in DPCH, P-CCPCH, S-CCPCH, PDSCH, DL-DPCCH, DPDCH, PRACH and
PCPCH.
●
Signature
The signature is used in PRACH and PCPCH. 16 fixed bit patterns are defined of
which the user may select one.
●
TFCI
The "Transport Format Combination Indicator" is used in DPCH/DPCCH if the state
is set to On. In this case, a code sequence with the length of 30 is defined using this
value and distributed among 15 subsequent timeslots. In PRACH and PCPCH, the
TFCI field is provided as standard.
●
FBI
Feedback indication bits are only used in DPCCH and PCPCH.
3.6 Timing Offset
The symbol stream can be shifted in time relative to the other channels. For this purpose
a timing offset can be entered into the channel table, stating the range of shifting in multiples of 256 chips. Since the generator does not generate infinite symbol streams like a
real-time system, this offset is implemented as a rotation.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
21
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Demultiplexer
Example:
DPCH 30 ksps, 1 timeslot, timing offset = 2;
2 x 256 chips = 512 chip offset;
4 data symbols shifting at a symbol rate of 30 ksps (1 symbol corresponds to 3.84 Mcps /
30 ksps = 128 chips).
previously:
11
11
11
11
00
01
10
11
00
10
01
11
11
01
00
01
10
11
01
00
00
11
11
11
11
00
01
10
11
00
10
01
11
11
01
00
01
afterwards:
10
11
01
The use of the timing offset usually causes a reduction of the crest factor of the total
signal, since it is not always the same spreading chips (channelization chips) CH and
scramble chips SCi/SCq' that are applied to the pilot sequences of the channels.
3.7 Demultiplexer
In the downlink, the symbol stream is divided into two bit streams Di and Dq prior to
processing in the spreading unit. The symbol stream is divided by allocating bits 1, 3, 5,
to 2n-1 to the in-phase bit stream Di, and bits 2, 4, 6, 2n to the quadrature bit stream Dq.
For the above example with timing offset:
Di = 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
Dq = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
(left-hand bit is always the first one in the time sequence)
In the uplink, independent data are used for the two paths.
PRACH/PCPCH:
Preamble : signature parallel to I and Q
Message part : data to I, pilot, TPC and TFCI to Q
DPCCH:
all bits to I, Q always unused
DPDCH:
all bits are always to I or Q (dependent on channel number), the other path is unused.
3.8 Power Control
After spreading and scrambling, a channel-specific power factor p is applied to the signal.
A value of -6 dB therefore results in half the level (or ¼ power) and the following diagram
(DPCH):
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
22
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Summation and Filtering
Fig. 3-5: Constellation diagram of a channel with –6 dB power
3.9 Summation and Filtering
After application of the channel power, the components of the individual channels are
summed up.
The constellation diagram of the sum signal is obtained by superposition of the diagrams
of the individual channels. If the signal consists of two channels with a power of -6 dB
and -12 dB and each channel contains independent source data (DPCH), the following
constellation diagram is obtained:
Fig. 3-6: Constellation diagram of a 3GPP W-CDMA signal with two DPCH channels
3.10 Multicode
3GPP FDD supports multicode transmission for downlink-dedicated physical channels
(DPCH).
This form of transmission is used for channels intended for the same receiver, i.e. those
receivers that belong to a radio link. The first channel of this group is used as a master
channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
23
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
HARQ Feedback
Shared parts (pilot, TPC and TCFI) are spread for all channels using the spreading code
of the master channel.
Instead of changing the spreading code within a slot several times, the master code rather
than the shared parts can be sent at higher power. The other channels then have to be
blanked out correspondingly.
3.11 HARQ Feedback
R&S SMBV instruments do not support HARQ Feedback.
The HARQ Feedback functionality extends the R&S Signal Generator option 3GPP FDD
in order to meet the requirements defined in 3GPP TS 25.141, chapter 8.12 and 8.13.
This allows the user to dynamically control the transmission of the HSUPA fixed reference
channels (FRC 1-7), the HSPA+ fixed reference channel (FPC 8) and the user defined
fixed reference channels. An ACK from the base station leads to the transmission of a
new packet while a NACK forces the R&S Signal Generator to retransmit the packet with
a new channel coding configuration (i.e. new redundancy version RV) of the concerned
HARQ process.
3.11.1 Limitations
Although an arbitrary data source can be selected, the same user data is used for all
HARQ processes and for all retransmissions.
Example:
If FRC4 is configured and the data source is set to PN9, then the first 5076 bits of the
PN9 are used as input for all four HARQ processes, regardless of which retransmission
is performed. Note that the bitstream after channel coding of course is different for different retransmissions due to different redundancy versions.
Furthermore, "DTX-Mode" and "Bit-Error-Insertion/Block-Error-Insertion" are not available in this mode.
3.11.2 Setup
If an instrument with fading simulation is available, no more test equipment is needed in
order to fulfill the test setup described in 3GPP TS 25.141, Annex B.3.4.
As the instrument has no RF input available, the HARQ feedback from the base station
needs to be a TTL signal. Therefore, it is connected to the LEVATT connector on the
external AUX I/O BNC adapter board R&S SMx-Z5 of the R&S Signal Generator. A high
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
24
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
HARQ Feedback
level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK, while a low level corresponds to a NACK. Note that
in the user interface this can also be defined the other way around.
3.11.3 Timing
In general, the ACK/NACK feedback from the base station should be available at the
instruments LEVATT connector with the same timing the E-HICH is transmitted. The
instrument will read out this port at time t_smu after the start of the HARQ process the
feedback is related to (see figure below). The user is able to adjust this time via the
Additional User Delay parameter. The signal should be constant on this instrument's input
for 0.5 ms before and after the defined point in time.
As it probably takes some time for the base station to be synchronized to the signal
transmitted from the instrument, the ACK/NACK feedback should be NACK during this
period, in order to force the instrument to retransmit the packets, until the first packet is
read out correctly from the base station.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
25
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
HS-SCCH less operation
Fig. 3-7: Timing diagram for TTI 10ms, tau_dpch = 0, tau_E-HICH = -7slots
3.12 HS-SCCH less operation
HS-SCCH less operation is a special HSDPA mode of operation which reduces the HSSCCH overhead and reduces UE battery consumption. It changes the conventional
structure of HSDPA data reception. In HSDPA as defined from 3GPP release 5 onwards,
UE is supposed to read continuously HS-SCCH where data allocations are being signaled. The UE is being addressed via a UE specific identity (16 bit H-RNTI / HSDPA
Radio Network Temporary Identifier) on HS-SCCH. As soon as the UE detects relevant
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
26
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
HS-SCCH less operation
control information on HS-SCCH it switches to the associated HS-PDSCH resources and
receives the data packet.
This scheme is fundamentally changed in HS-SCCH less operation and HS-SCCH less
operation is optimized for services with relatively small packets, e.g. VoIP.
In HS-SCCH less operation mode, the base station can decide for each packet again
whether to apply HS-SCCH less operation or not, i.e. conventional operation is always
possible.
The first transmission of a data packet on HS-DSCH is done without an associated HSSCCH. The first transmission always uses QPSK and redundancy version Xrv = 0. Only
four pre-defined transport formats can be used so the UE can blindly detect the correct
format. The four possible transport formats are configured by higher layers. Only predefined channelization codes can be used for this operation mode and are configured per
UE by higher layers: the parameter HS-PDSCH code index provides the index of the first
HS-PDSCH code to use. For each of the transport formats, it is configured whether one
or two channelization codes are required.
In order to allow detection of the packets on HS-DSCH, the HS-DSCH CRC (Cyclic
Redundancy Check) becomes UE specific based on the 16 bit HRNTI. This is called CRC
attachment method 2 (CRC attachment method 1 is conventional as of 3GPP release 5).
In case of successful reception of the packet, the UE will send an ACK on HS-DPCCH.
If the packet was not received correctly, the UE will send nothing.
If the packet is not received in the initial transmission, the base station may retransmit it.
The number of retransmissions is limited to two in HS-SCCH less operation.
In contrast to the initial transmission, the retransmissions are using HS-SCCH signaling.
However, the coding of the HS-SCCH deviates from release 5, since the bits on HSSCCH are re-interpreted. This is called HS-SCCH type 2. The conventional HS-SCCH
as of 3GPP release 5 is called HS-SCCH type 1.
3.12.1 HS-SCCH Type 2
The table below gives a comparison of the HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and HSSCCH Type 2 (Less Operation) formats.
Table 3-6: Comparison of HS-SCCH Type 1 and Type 2
HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation)
HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Transport block size information ( 6 bits)
Special Information type (6 bits)
HARQ process information (3 bits)
Special Information (7 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version (3 bits)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
New data indicator (1 bit)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
27
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Higher Order Modulation
The Special Information type on HS-SCCH type 2 must be set to 111110 to indicate HSSCCH less operation. The 7 bits Special information then contains:
●
2 bit transport block size information (one of the four possible transport block sizes
as configured by higher layers)
●
3 bit pointer to the previous transmission of the same transport block (to allow soft
combining with the initial transmission)
●
1 bit indicator for the second or third transmission
●
1 bit reserved.
QPSK is also used for the retransmissions. The redundancy version Xrv for the second
and third transmissions shall be equal to 3 and 4, respectively.
For the retransmissions, also HS-DSCH CRC attachment method 2 is used.
ACK or NACK are reported by the UE for the retransmitted packets.
3.12.2 HS-SCCH Type 2 Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 7
In order to support HS-SCCH Type 2 (Less Operation) testing, a fixed reference channel
has been introduced. H-Set 7 is specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test
cases.
The H-Set 7 consists of one HS-PDSCH and its parameterization and coding chain is
based on 1 code with QPSK modulation and one HARQ process.
3.13 Higher Order Modulation
3.13.1 64QAM in downlink
With the possibility to use 64QAM in downlink, HSPA+ can achieve downlink data rates
of 21 Mbps. This theoretical peak data rate (physical channel bit rate) with 64QAM is
calculated as follow:
Peak data rate (64QAM) = 15 [codes] * 2880 bits/ 2 ms [subframe] = 21.6 MBps
3.13.2 64QAM Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 8
In order to support 64QAM testing, a fixed reference channel has been introduced. H-Set
8 is specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test cases.
The H-Set 8 parameterization and coding chain is based on 15 codes with 64QAM modulation. Six Hybrid ARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
28
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
3.13.3 16QAM in uplink
With the possibility to use 16QAM on E-DCH (Enhanced Dedicated Channel) in uplink,
HSPA+ can achieve uplink peak data rates of 11.5 Mbps. A new uplink UE category 7
has been introduced which supports 16QAM in addition to BSPK.
Uplink transmission in HSPA+ is based on IQ multiplexing of E-DPDCH (Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel) physical channels as in HSUPA of 3GPP release 6. In fact,
the 16QAM constellation is made up of two orthogonal 4PAM (pulse amplitude modulation) constellations. In case of 4PAM modulation, a set of two consecutive binary symbols
nk, nk+1 is converted to a real valued sequence following the mapping described in the
table below.
Table 3-7: Mapping of E-DPDCH with 4PAM modulation
nk, nk+1
00
01
10
11
Mapped real value
0.4472
1.3416
-0.4477
-1.3416
This results in the following symbol mapping:
An E-DPDCH may use BPSK or 4PAM modulation symbols.
3.13.4 16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8
To support 16QAM (4PAM) testing in the uplink, a E-DPDCH fixed reference channel
(FRC 8) has been introduced.
The FRC 8 parameterization and channel coding is based on four Physical Channel
Codes (2xSF2 and 2xSF4) with overall symbol rate of 2x960 + 2x1920 ksps, 4PAM modulation and E-DCH TTI of 2 ms. Eight Hybrid ARQ processes are used.
3.14 MIMO in HSPA+
HSPA+ uses full MIMO approach including spatial multiplexing. The approach is called
D-TxAA (Double Transmit Antenna Array). It is only applicable for the High Speed Downlink Shared Channel, the HS-DSCH.
The figure below shows the basic principle of the 2x2 approach. The figure is taken from
3GPP TS 25.214.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
29
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
Fig. 3-8: MIMO for HSPA+
With D-TxAA, two independent data streams (transport blocks) can be transmitted simultaneously over the radio channel over the same WCDMA channelization codes. Each
transport block is processed and channel coded separately. After spreading and scrambling, precoding based on weight factors is applied to optimize the signal for transmission over the mobile radio channel.
Four precoding weights w1- w4 are available. The first stream is multiplied with w1 and
w2, the second stream is multiplied with w3 and w4. The weights can take the following
values:
Precoding weight w1 is always fixed, and only w2 can be selected by the base station.
Weights w3 and w4 are automatically derived from w1 and w2, because they have to be
orthogonal.
3.14.1 D-TxAA Feedback signaling: PCI and CQI
D-TxAA requires a feedback signaling from the UE to assist the base station in taking
the right decision in terms of modulation and coding scheme and precoding weight selection. The UE has to determine the preferred primary precoding vector for transport block
1 consisting of w1 and w2. Since w1 is fixed, the feedback message only consists of a
proposed value for w2. This feedback is called precoding control information (PCI).
The UE also recommends whether one or two streams can be supported in the current
channel situation. In case dual stream transmission is possible, the secondary precoding
vector consisting of weights w3 and w4 is inferred in the base station, because it has to
be orthogonal to the first precoding vector with w1 and w2. Thus, the UE does not have
to report it explicitly. The UE also indicates the optimum modulation and coding scheme
for each stream. This report is called channel quality indicator (CQI).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
30
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
Based on the composite PCI/CQI reports, the base station scheduler decides whether to
schedule one or two data streams to the UE and what packet sizes (transport block sizes)
and modulation schemes to use for each stream.
3.14.2 MIMO downlink control channel support
In order to support MIMO operation, changes to the HSDPA downlink control channel
have become necessary, i.e. the HS-SCCH.
There is a new HS-SCCH Type 3 for MIMO operation defined. The table below gives a
comparison of the HS-SCCH Type 1 and Type 3 formats.
HS-SCCH Type 1
HS-SCCH Type 3
MIMO
(normal operation)
One transport block
Two transports blocks
Channelization code set
information (7 bits)
Channelization code set
information (7 bits)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Modulation scheme and
number of transport blocks
Transport block size informa- information (3 bits)
tion (6 bits)
Precoding weight information
HARQ process information (3 (2 bits)
bits)
Redundancy and constellation version(3 bits)
New data indicator (1 bit)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
Modulation scheme and number of transport
blocks information (3 bits)
Precoding weight information for primary
transport block (2 bits)
Transport block size information for primary
transport block (6 bits)
Transport block size informa- Transport block size information for secontion(6 bits)
dary transport block (6 bits)
HARQ process information (4 HARQ process information (4 bits)
bits)
Redundancy and constellation version for priRedundancy and constellamary transport block (2 bits)
tion version (2 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version for
UE identity ( 16 bits)
secondary transport block (2 bits)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
The "Precoding weight info for the primary transport block" contains the information on
weight factor w2 as described above. Weight factors w1, w3, and w4 are derived accordingly. The number of transport blocks transmitted and the modulation scheme information
are jointly coded as shown in table 3-8.
Table 3-8: Interpretation of "Modulation scheme and number of transport blocks info" sent on HS-SCCH
Modulation scheme +
number of transport
blocks info (3 bits)
Modulation for primary
transport block
Modulation for secondary transport block
Number of transport
blocks
111
16QAM
16QAM
2
110
16QAM
QPSK
2
101
64QAM
n/a
1
64QAM
QPSK
2
100
16QAM
n.a.
1
011
QPSK
QPSK
2
010
64QAM
64QAM
2
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
31
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
Modulation scheme +
number of transport
blocks info (3 bits)
Modulation for primary
transport block
Modulation for secondary transport block
Number of transport
blocks
001
64QAM
16QAM
2
000
QPSK
n.a.
1
3.14.3 Redundancy Version
Redundancy versions for the primary transport block and for the secondary transport
block are signaled. Four redundancy version values are possible (unlike HSDPA in 3GPP
release 5 where eight values for the redundancy version could be signaled).
3.14.4 HARQ Processes
Also the signaling of the HARQ processes differs from HSDPA in 3GPP release 5. In
3GPP release 5, up to eight HARQ processes can be signaled. A minimum of six HARQ
processes needs to be configured to achieve continuous data transmission. Similarly, in
MIMO with dual stream transmission, a minimum of twelve HARQ processes would be
needed to achieve continuous data transmission.
Each HARQ process has independent acknowledgements and retransmissions. In
theory, HARQ processes on both streams could run completely independently from one
another. This would however increase the signaling overhead quite significantly (to 8
bits), since each possible combination of HARQ processes would need to be addressed.
To save signaling overhead, a restriction is introduced: HARQ processes are only signaled for the primary transport block within 4 bits, the HARQ process for the secondary
transport block is derived from that according to a fixed rule; according to
3GPP TS 25.212. Thus, there is a one-to-one mapping between the HARQ process used
for the primary transport block and the HARQ process used for the secondary transport
block. The relation is shown in the table below for the example of 12 HARQ processes
configured.
Table 3-9: Combinations of HARQ process numbers for dual stream transmission (12 HARQ processes
configured)
HARQ process number on primary stream
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HARQ process number on secondary stream
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
Only an even number of HARQ processes is allowed to be configured with MIMO operation.
3.14.5 MIMO uplink control channel support
Also the uplink control channel for HSDPA operation is affected by MIMO, i.e. the HSDPCCH (High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel). In addition to CQI reporting
as already defined from 3GPP release 5 onwards, PCI reporting for precoding feedback
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
32
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
is introduced. Channel coding is done separately for the composite precoding control
indication (PCI) / channel quality indication (CQI) and for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement
or negative acknowledgement information). The figure below shows the principle.
Fig. 3-9: Channel coding for HS-DPCCH (MIMO mode)
The 10 bits of the HARQ-ACK messages are interpreted according to 3GPP TS 25.212
(see table below). ACK/NACK information is provided for the primary and for the secondary transport block.
Table 3-10: Interpretation of HARQ-ACK in MIMO operation (non DC-HSDPA case)
HARQ-ACK message to be transmitted
w0
w1
w2
w3
w4
w5
w6
w7
w8
w9
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block
ACK
1
NACK
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HARQ-ACK in response to two scheduled transport blocks
Response to primary
transport block
Response to secondary
transport block
ACK
ACK
ACK
NACK
NACK
NACK
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
ACK
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
NACK
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
PRE/POST indication
PRE
POST
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0
0
33
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
MIMO in HSPA+
3.14.6 CQI Reports: Type A and Type B
In MIMO case, two types of CQI reports shall be supported:
●
Type A CQI reports can indicate the supported transport format(s) for the number
of transport block(s) that the UE prefers. Single and dual stream transmissions are
supported.
●
Type B CQI reports are used for single stream transmission according to what has
been defined from 3GPP release 5 onwards.
For type A CQI reports, the UE selects the appropriate CQI1 and CQI2 values for each
transport block in dual stream transmission, or the appropriate CQIS value in single
stream transmission, and then creates the CQI value to report on HS-DPCCH as follows:
For dual stream transmission, new CQI tables are specified in 3GPP TS25.214 for correct
interpretation of transport formats based on CQI1 and CQI2.
3.14.7 PCI reports
The PCI value to report in the uplink is created in the UE according to the preferred
precoding weight w2 according to the table below.
Table 3-11: Mapping of preferred precoding weight to PCI values
PCI value
0
1
2
3
The PCI value shall be transmitted together with the CQI value as a composite PCI/CQI
value. The figure below shows how the composite PCI/CQI report is created.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
34
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)
Fig. 3-10: Composite PCI/CQI information (MIMO mode)
3.14.8 MIMO Fixed Reference Channels: H-Set 9 and H-Set 11
In order to support MIMO testing, two fixed reference channels have been introduced. HSet 9 and H-Set 11 are specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test cases.
The H-Set 9 parameterization and coding chain is based on 15 codes with two different
modulations, 16QAM and QPSK, for the primary and secondary transport blocks respectively. Six HARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
The H-Set 11 parameterization and coding chain is also based on 15 codes and uses
two different modulations, six HARQ processes and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted. The modulation schemes specified for the H-Set 11 are however 64QAM and
16QAM for the primary and secondary transport blocks respectively.
3.15 Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)
Within 3GPP Release 7 the peak user throughout was significantly enhanced (MIMO,
Higher Order Modulation). In order to fulfill the desire for even better and more consistent
user experience across the cell the deployment of a second HSDPA carrier creates an
opportunity for network resource pooling as a way to enhance the user experience, in
particular when the radio conditions are such that existing techniques (e.g. MIMO) can
not be used.
In DC-HSDPA operation the UE is configured with secondary serving HS-DSCH cell. With
one HS-SCCH in each of the two cells scheduling flexibility to have different transport
formats depending on CQI feedback on each carrier is maintained.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
35
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)
Fig. 3-11: Dual Cell HSDPA Operation
The following restrictions apply in case of DC-HSDPA operation:
●
The dual cell transmission only applies to HSDPA physical channels
●
The two cells belong to the same Node-B
●
In Release 8 it is required that the two cells are on adjacent carriers; from Release 9
onwards the paired cells can operate on two different frequency bands.
●
The two cells may use MIMO to serve UEs configured for dual cell operation
3.15.1 DC-HSDPA Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO mode)
When the UE is configured to work in DC-HSDPA non MIMO mode, the coding of the
HS-DPCCH is performed according to the general coding flow, i.e. parallel coding of the
HARQ-ACK and the CQI is performed. The figure below shows the principle.
Fig. 3-12: Channel coding for HS-DPCCH (non MIMO mode)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
36
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)
The 10 bits of the HARQ-ACK messages are interpreted according to 3GPP TS 25.212
(see the table below). ACK/NACK information is provided for the transport block of the
serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
Table 3-12: Interpretation of HARQ-ACK in DC-HSDPA non MIMO operation
HARQ-ACK message to be transmitted
w0
w1
w2
w3
w4
w5
w6
w7
w8
w9
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on the serving HS-DSCH cell
ACK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NACK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell
ACK
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
NACK
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on each of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells
Response to transport block from setving HS-DSCH cell
Response to transport block from secondary serving HSDSCH cell
ACK
ACK
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
ACK
NACK
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
NACK
ACK
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
NACK
NACK
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
PRE/POST indication
3.15.1.1
PRE
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
POST
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2
Two individual CQI reports CQI1 and CQI2 are concatenated to form the composite
channel quality information. CQI1 corresponds to the serving HS-DSCH cell and CQI2
to the secondary serving cell respectively. The figure below show how the CQI report is
constructed.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
37
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
UE Capabilities
Fig. 3-13: Composite CQI information (DC-HSDPA operation, non MIMO mode)
3.15.2 DC-HSDPA + MIMO
Channel coding is done separately for the composite PCI/CQI and for HARQ-ACK information.
The principle is shown on figure figure 3-9.
The composite PCI/CQI report is created as illustrated on figure figure 3-10.
The HARQ-ACK message is coded to 10 bits according to 3GPP TS 25.212. The standard defines the HARQ-ACK coding for the feedback of the serving and secondary serving
HS-DSCH cells for normal and dual stream transmission.
3.15.3 Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 12
In order to support DC-HSDPA testing, a fixed reference channel has been introduced.
H-Set 12 is specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test cases.
The H-Set 12 parameterization and coding chain is based on 1 code with QPSK modulation. Six Hybrid ARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
3.16 UE Capabilities
MIMO, 64QAM and DC-HSDPA operation in downlink as well as 16QAM in uplink are
UE capability, i.e. not all UEs will have to support them.
Several UE categories have been introduced to provide:
●
DL MIMO support and support of 64QAM in addition to 16QAM and QPSK in dowlink
●
16QAM support in uplink
●
Support of dual cell operation and MIMO
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
38
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
UE Capabilities
R&S Signal Generator supports all UE categories.
3.16.1 MIMO and 64QAM UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V8.4.0, the following release 8 UE categories with MIMO
and 64QAM support are defined:
●
Categories 13 and 14:
Support of 64QAM
No support of MIMO
Maximum data rate of category 14 is 21 Mbps
●
Categories 15 and 16:
Support of MIMO with modulation schemes QPSK and 16QAM
No support of 64QAM
Maximum data rate of category 16 is 27.6 Mbps
●
Categories 17 and 18:
Support of MIMO with modulation schemes QPSK and 16QAM
Support of 64QAM and MIMO, but not simultaneously
Maximum data rate of category 18 is 27.6 Mbps when MIMO is used and 21 Mbps
when 64QAM is used
●
Categories 19 and 20:
Simultaneous support of MIMO and all modulation schemes (QPSK, 16QAM and
64QAM)
Maximum data rate of category 20 is 42.1 Mbps
3.16.2 UL 16QAM UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V8.2.0, the following release 8 UE categories with 16QAM
uplink support are defined:
●
Category 7:
Support of 16QAM in addition to BPSK
3.16.3 MIMO and DC-HSDPA Operation UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V9.0.0, the following release 9 UE categories with MIMO
and dual cell operation support are defined:
●
Categories 21, 22, 23 and 24:
Support of QPSK, 16QAM and for categories 23 and 24 also 64QAM
Support of dual cell operation, but without MIMO
●
Categories 25, 26, 27 and 28:
Support of QPSK, 16QAM and for categories 27 and 28 also 64QAM
Simultaneous support of MIMO and dual cell operation
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
39
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
4 User Interface
The menu for setting the 3GPP FDD digital standard is either called from the baseband
block or from the menu tree under "Baseband".
The menu is split into several sections for configuring the standard. The choice of transmission direction determines which displays and parameters are made available in the
lower section.
The upper section of the menu is where the 3GPP FDD digital standard is enabled, the
default settings are called and the transmission direction selected. Button "Test Case
Wizard" opens a configuration menu with a selection of predefined settings according to
Test Cases in TS 25.141. The valid 3GPP version and the chip rate in use are displayed.
Many of the buttons lead to submenus for loading and saving the 3GPP FDD configuration and for setting the filter, trigger and clock parameters.
The lower menu section is where either the base station signal or the user equipment
signal is configured, depending on the transmission direction selected.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
40
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
The menu is extremely comprehensive, so a small list of contents is added here just for
the 3GPP FDD to make orientation easier.
The headings are always given a short form of the "menu path" and the header also
shows you your current location in the menu.
4.1 General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
The upper menu section is where the 3GPP FDD digital standard is enabled and reset
and where all the settings valid for the signal in both transmission directions are made.
State
Enables/disables the 3GPP FDD standard.
Enabling this standard disables all the other digital standards and digital modulation
modes.
In case of two-path instruments, this affects the same path.
The 3GPP FDD signal is generated by a combination of realtime mode (enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode (all the other channels).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
41
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
On the downlink, P-CCPCH and up to three DPCHs of base station 1 are generated in
realtime. All the other channels are generated in arbitrary waveform mode and added.
In the uplink, all the channels of user equipment 1 are generated in realtime (PRACH,
PCPCH or DPCCH and up to 6 DPDCHs), the other user equipment are generated in
arbitrary waveform mode and added to the realtime signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe on page 304
Set to default
Calls the default settings. Test Model 1 (64 channels) is preset.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PRESet on page 303
Save/Recall
Calls the "Save/Recall" menu.
From the "Save/Recall" menu the "File Select" windows for saving and recalling 3GPP
FDD configurations and the "File Manager" can be called.
3GPP FDD configurations are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.3g. The
file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable.
The complete settings in the "3GPP FDD" dialog are saved and recalled.
"Recall 3GPP
FDD setting"
Opens the "File Select "window for loading a saved 3GPP FDD configuration.
The configuration of the selected (highlighted) file is loaded by pressing
the "Select" button.
"Save 3GPP
FDD setting"
Opens the "File Select" window for saving the current 3GPP FDD signal
configuration.
The name of the file is specified in the "File name" entry field, the directory
selected in the "save into" field. The file is saved by pressing the
"Save" button.
"File Manager" Calls the "File Manager".
The "File Manager" is used to copy, delete and rename files and to create
new directories.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​CATalog on page 303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​LOAD on page 303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​STORe on page 304
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​DELete on page 303
Data List Management
Calls the "Data List Management" menu. This menu is used to create and edit a data list.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
42
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
All data lists are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.dm_iqd. The file name
and the directory they are stored in are user-definable.
The data lists must be selected as a data source from the submenus under the individual
function, e.g. in the channel table of the base stations.
Note: All data lists are generated and edited by means of the SOURce:​BB:​DM subsystem
commands. Files containing data lists usually end with *.dm_iqd. The data lists are
selected as a data source for a specific function in the individual subsystems of the digital
standard.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
43
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
Example: Creating and editing the data list
SOUR:​BB:​DM:​DLIS:​SEL "3gpp"
SOUR:​BB:​DM:​DLIS:​DATA 1,​1,​0,​1,​0,​1,​0,​1,​1,​1,​1,​0,​0,​0
SOUR:​BB:​DM:​DLIS:​DATA:​APP 1,​1,​0,​1,​0,​1,​0,​1,​1,​1,​1,​0,​0
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA on page 332
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 333
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA
on page 336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​
DSELect on page 337
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA on page 386
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​DSELect on page 387
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA
on page 424
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​
DSELect on page 424
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA
on page 475
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
DATA:​DSELect on page 475
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA on page 420
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 420
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA on page 428
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​DSELect on page 428
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA on page 434
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 434
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA on page 437
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​DSELect on page 437
Generate Waveform File
Opens the submenu for storing the current 3GPP signal as ARB signal in a waveform
file. This file can be loaded in the ARB menu and processed as multi carrier or multi
segment signal.
The file name is entered in the submenu. The file is stored with the predefined file extension *.wv. The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​WAVeform:​CREate on page 305
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
44
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
Test Case Wizard
R&S SMU and R&S SMATE instruments only
Opens a configuration menu with a selection of predefined settings according to Test
Cases in TS 25.141.
The test cases are described in chapter 5.1, "Introduction", on page 230.
SCPI command:
n.a.
3GPP Version
Displays the current version of the 3GPP FDD standard.
The default settings and parameters provided are oriented towards the specifications of
the version displayed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​GPP3:​VERSion on page 305
Chip Rate
Displays the system chip rate. This is fixed at 3.84 Mcps.
The output chip rate can be varied in the Filter menu, Clipping, ARB Settings (see
"Filtering/Clipping/ARB Settings" on page 45).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CRATe on page 307
Link Direction
Selects the transmission direction.
The settings of the base station or the user equipment are provided in the following menu
section in accordance with the selection.
"Downlink/For- The transmission direction selected is base station to user equipment.
The signal corresponds to that of a base station.
ward Link"
The transmission direction selected is user equipment to base station.
"Uplink/
Reverse Link" The signal corresponds to that of user equipment.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK on page 302
Filtering/Clipping/ARB Settings
Calls the menu for setting baseband filtering, clipping and the sequence length of the
arbitrary waveform component. The current setting is displayed next to the button.
The menu is described in section chapter 4.3, "Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings",
on page 52.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Trigger/Marker
(Trigger for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
45
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
Calls the menu for selecting the trigger source, for configuring the marker signals and for
setting the time delay of an external trigger signal (see chapter 4.4, "Trigger/Marker/Clock
Settings", on page 57.
The currently selected trigger source is displayed to the right of the button.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Execute Trigger
(R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Executes trigger manually.
A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode
other than "Auto" have been selected.
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR INT
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SEQ RETR
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​EXEC
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​EXECute on page 311
Clock
(R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Calls the menu for selecting the clock source and for setting a delay (see chapter 4.4.4,
"Clock Settings", on page 63).
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.2 Configure Base Station or UE
Depending on the transmission direction selection, the central section of the menu provides either the "Configure Base Station" section (selection "Downlink/Forward Link") or
the "Configure User Equipment" section (selection "Uplink/Reverse Link").
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
46
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
OCNS Add
Activates OCNS channels, as defined in the standard, in base station 1.
With Orthogonal Channel Noise, a practical downlink signal is generated to test the maximum input levels of user equipment in accordance with standard specifications. This
simulates the useful and control signals of the other orthogonal channels in the downlink.
3GPP TS 25.101 contains a precise definition of the required appearance of the OCNS
signal (see "OCNS Mode" on page 47).
Three different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one standard scenario and
two scenarios for testing HSDPA channels. You can choose the scenario you want with
OCNS Mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​OCNS:​STATe on page 330
OCNS Mode
Chooses the scenario for activating OCNS channels.
Three different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one "standard" scenario and
two scenarios for testing "HSDPA" channels.
The scenarios have different channel counts and different presetting. The presetting is
listed in the three tables below. It applies to all three modes that the OCNS channels are
all normal DPCHs. The symbol rate is set at 30 kps and the pilot length to 8 bits.
When activating OCNS and depending on the selected OCNS mode, different channel
groups are assigned as in the following tables. These channels cannot be edited in the
channel table.
The powers of the OCNS channel outputs are relative. In the R&S Signal Generator, the
power of the OCNS component is automatically set so that OCNS channels supplement
the remaining channels in base station 1 to make a total power of 0 dB (linear 1).
It is not possible to adapt the OCNS power; as the linear power of the remaining channels
is >1, this will produce an error message. The OCNS channels are then given the maximum power (all -80 dB).
The "Total Power" display is updated after automatic calculation of the output; it is not
possible to use "Adjust Total Power" to make the setting.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
47
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
Table 4-1: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in Standard mode
Chan. code
Timing offset
(x256Tchip)
Level setting
(dB)
Channel type
Symbol rate
Pilot length
2
86
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
11
134
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
17
52
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
23
45
-5
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
31
143
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
38
112
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
47
59
-8
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
55
23
-7
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
62
1
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
69
88
-6
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
78
30
-5
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
85
18
-9
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
94
30
-10
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
125
61
-8
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
113
128
-6
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
119
143
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
Table 4-2: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in HSDPA mode
Channelization
code at SF=128
Relative Level set- Channel type
ting (dB)
Symbol rate
Pilot length
122
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
123
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
124
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
125
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
126
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
127
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
Table 4-3: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in HSDP2 mode
Channelization
code at SF=128
Relative Level set- Channel type
ting (dB)
Symbol rate
Pilot length
4
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
5
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
48
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
Channelization
code at SF=128
Relative Level set- Channel type
ting (dB)
Symbol rate
Pilot length
6
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
7
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​OCNS:​MODE on page 329
Reset all Base Stations
Resets all base stations to the predefined settings. The following table gives an overview
of the settings. The preset value for each parameter is specified in the description of the
remote-control commands.
Parameter
Value
State
Off
State (all channels)
Off
Scrambling Code
0
Slot Format DPCH
8
Symbol Rate DPCH
30 ksps
Channelization Code (all channels)
0
Data Source (all channels)
PN9
Timing Offset (all channels)
0
Multi Code State (all channels)
Off
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​PRESet on page 300
Reset User Equipment
Resets all user equipment to the predefined settings. The following table gives an overview of the settings. The preset value for each parameter is specified in the description
of the remote-control commands.
Parameter
Value
State
Off
Mode
DPCCH + DPDCH
Scrambling Code (hex)
0
DPCCH Settings
Power
0 dB
DPDCH Settings
All DPDCH Active
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
On
49
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
Parameter
Value
Channel Power
0 dB
Overall Symbol Rate
60 ksps
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​PRESet on page 397
Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment...
Copies the settings of a base or user equipment to a second base or user equipment. A
window opens for creating the destination station.
Window for the Downlink / Forward transmission direction:
Window for the Uplink / Reverse transmission direction:
"Copy from
Source"
Selects the base station or user equipment whose settings are to be
copied.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​SOURce on page 301
"To Destination"Selects the base station or user equipment whose settings are to be
overwritten.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​DESTination on page 301
"Channelization Enters the offset to be applied when copying the base station to the
channelization codes of the destination base station. The minimum value
Code Offset
(Base Station is 0 (channelization codes are identical), the maximum value is 511.
only)"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​COFFset on page 300
"Accept"
Starts the copy process.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​EXECute on page 301
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
50
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Configure Base Station or UE
Test Setups/Models
Calls menu for selecting one of the test models defined in the 3GPP standard and the
self-defined test setups.
The menu is described in section chapter 4.5, "Test Setups/Models", on page 65.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Predefined Settings Downlink
Calls menu for setting predefined configurations.
The menu is described in section chapter 4.6, "Predefined Settings - Downlink",
on page 69.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Additional UE
(Configure User Equipment only)
Calls menu for simulating up to 128 additional user equipments.
The menu is described in section chapter 4.7, "Additional User Equipment - Uplink",
on page 70.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Adjust Total Power to 0dB
(only for State = ON)
Sets the power of the enabled channels so that the total power of all the active channels
is 0 dB. This will not change the power ratio among the individual channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer:​ADJust on page 302
Total Power
Displays the total power of the active channels.
The total power is calculated from the power ratio of the powered up code channels with
modulation on. If the value is not equal to 0 dB, the individual code channels (whilst still
retaining the power ratios) are internally adapted so that the "Total Power" for achieving
the set output level is 0 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer[:​TOTal] on page 302
Select Basestation/Configure User Equipment...
Selects the base station or user equipment by pressing the accompanying button. This
opens a menu for editing the selected basestation or user equipment.
The menus are described in sections chapter 4.8, "Base Station Configuration",
on page 72 and chapter 4.24, "User Equipment Configuration (UE)", on page 144.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
51
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
(the base station or user equipment is selected by the keyword index
BSTation<[1]|2|3|4> or MSTation<i>)
SCPI command:
n.a.
Base Station/UE On
Activates or deactivates the base or user equipment.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​STATe on page 372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​STATe on page 399
4.3 Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
The "Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings" menu is reached via the 3GPP FDD main menu.
The filter parameters ("Filter" section), clipping ("Clipping" section) and the sequence
length of the arbitrary waveform component ("ARB Settings" section) are defined in this
menu.
4.3.1 Filter
In the "Filter" section, the settings are made for the baseband filter.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
52
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Filter
Selects baseband filter.
This opens a selection window containing all the filters available to the instrument.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​TYPe on page 310
Roll Off Factor or BxT
Enters the filter parameters.
The filter parameter offered (Roll Off factor or BxT) depends on the currently selected
filter type. This parameter is always set to the default for each of the predefined filters.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​APCO25 on page 308
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​COSine on page 309
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​GAUSs on page 309
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​RCOSine on page 310
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​SPHase on page 310
Cut Off Frequency Factor
(This feature is available for filter parameter "Lowpass" only.)
Sets the value for the cut off frequency factor. The cut off frequency of the lowpass filter
(ACP and EVM optimization) can be adjusted to reach spectrum mask requirements.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​LPASs on page 309
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​LPASSEVM on page 309
Chip Rate Variation
Enters the chip rate. The default settings for the chip rate is 3.84 Mcps.
The chip rate entry changes the output clock and the modulation bandwidth, as well as
the synchronization signals that are output. It does not affect the calculated chip
sequence.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CRATe:​VARiation on page 307
Impulse Length
(For WinIQSIM2 only)
Displays the number of filter tabs. If the check box is activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If the check box
is deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​ILENgth:​AUTO on page 308
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​ILENgth on page 307
Oversampling
(For WinIQSIM2 only)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
53
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Determines the upsampling factor. If the check box is activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If the check box
is deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​OSAMpling:​AUTO on page 308
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​OSAMpling on page 308
4.3.2 Clipping
The settings for clipping are collected in the "Clipping" section.
Clipping State
Switches baseband clipping on and off.
Baseband clipping is a very simple and effective way of reducing the crest factor of the
WCDMA signal.
WCDMA signals may have very high crest factors particularly with many channels and
unfavorable timing offsets.
WCDMA signals may have very high crest factors particularly with many channels and
unfavorable timing offsets. High crest factors entail two basic problems:
● The nonlinearity of the power amplifier (compression) causes intermodulation which
expands the spectrum (spectral regrowth).
● Since the level in the D/A converter is relative to the maximum value, the average
value is converted with a relatively low resolution. This results in a high quantization
noise.
Both effects increase the adjacent-channel power.
With baseband clipping, all the levels are limited to a settable value ("Clipping Level").
This level is specified as a percentage of the highest peak value. Since clipping is done
prior to filtering, the procedure does not influence the spectrum. The EVM however
increases.
Since clipping the signal not only changes the peak value but also the average value, the
effect on the crest factor is unpredictable. The following table shows the effect of the
"Clipping" on the crest factor for typical scenarios.
Table 4-4: Changing the crest factor by clipping (vector mode |i+q|) for signal configurations with different output crest factors. 100% clipping levels mean that clipping does not take place.
Clipping level
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Minimum
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Worst
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Average
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 128
DPCHs "Average
Crest" 30 ksps
100%
9.89 dB
14.7 dB
10.9 dB
21.7 dB
80%
8.86 dB
12.9 dB
9.39 dB
20.2 dB
50%
7.50 dB
10.1 dB
8.29 dB
16.9 dB
20%
5.50 dB
6.47 dB
6.23 dB
12.5 dB
10%
5.34 dB
6.06 dB
5.80 dB
9.57 dB
5%
5.34 dB
6.06 dB
5.80 dB
8.17 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
54
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
The following pictures demonstrate the affect of clipping with vector mode (|i+q|), using
a signal configuration with 4 DPCH as an example.
The arrows and the circle in the upper illustration show how the levels are mapped during
subsequent clipping in vector mode (|i+q|).
Fig. 4-1: Constellation diagram of the signal without clipping, shows the level mapping for vector mode
Fig. 4-2: Constellation diagram with clipping level 50 %, vector mode (|i+q|)
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​STATe on page 306
Clipping Level
Sets the limit for clipping.
This value indicates at what point the signal is clipped. It is specified as a percentage,
relative to the highest level. 100% indicates that clipping does not take place.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​LEVel on page 306
Clipping Mode
Selects the clipping method. A graphic illustration of the way in which these two methods
work is given in the menu.
"Vector | i + q |" The limit is related to the amplitude | i + q |. The I and Q components are
mapped together, the angle is retained (see Clipping State.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
55
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
"Scalar | i | + | q The limit is related to the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values | i
|+|q|.
|"
The I and Q components are mapped separately, the angle changes.
Example:
In the figure below, the square and the arrows show how the levels are
mapped for clipping level 50% in scalar mode (|i| + |q|).
Fig. 4-3: Constellation diagram of the signal with 4 DPCH without clipping, shows
the level mapping in scalar mode
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​MODE on page 306
4.3.3 ARB Settings
The ARB Settings section is where the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component is defined.
Sequence Length ARB
Changes the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component of the 3GPP signal
in the number of frames. This component is calculated in advance and output in the
arbitrary waveform generator. It is added to the realtime signal components (enhanced
channels).
The maximum number of frames is calculated as follows:
Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform memory size/(3.84 Mcps x 10 ms).
In pure amplifier tests with several channels and no enhanced channels, it is possible to
improve the statistical properties of the signal by increasing the sequence length.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SLENgth on page 304
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
56
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
4.4 Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
The trigger, clock, and marker delay functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU
instruments only.
To access this dialog, select "Main Menu > Trigger/Marker".
The "Trigger In" section is where the trigger for the signal is set. Various parameters will
be provided for the settings, depending on which trigger source - internal or external - is
selected. The current status of signal generation ("Running" or "Stopped") is indicated
for all trigger modes.
The "Marker Mode" section is where the marker signals at the MARKER output connectors are configured.
The "Marker Delay" section is where a marker signal delay can be defined, either without
restriction or restricted to the dynamic section, i.e., the section in which it is possible to
make settings without restarting signal and marker generation.
The "Clock Settings" section is where the clock source is selected and - in the case of an
external source - the clock type.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
57
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping
settings.
4.4.1 Trigger In
The trigger functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
The "Trigger In" section is where the trigger for the signal is set. Various parameters will
be provided for the settings, depending on which trigger source - internal or external - is
selected. The current status of signal generation ("Running" or "Stopped") is indicated
for all trigger modes.
Trigger Mode
Selects trigger mode.
The trigger mode determines the effect of a trigger on the signal generation.
"Auto"
The signal is generated continuously.
"Retrigger"
The signal is generated continuously. A trigger event (internal or external) causes a restart.
"Armed_Auto" The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal
is generated continuously.
Button "Arm" stops signal generation. A subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or external) causes a restart.
"Armed_Retrig- The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal
is generated continuously. Every subsequent trigger event causes a
ger"
restart.
Button "Arm" stops signal generation. A subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or external) causes a restart.
"Single"
The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal
is generated once to the length specified at "Signal Duration".
Every subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or external) causes a restart.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp[:​TRIGger]:​SEQuence on page 316
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
58
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
Signal Duration Unit
Defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence to be output in the
"Single" trigger mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SLUNit on page 314
Signal Duration
Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the "Single" trigger mode.
It is possible to output deliberately just part of the signal, an exact sequence of the signal,
or a defined number of repetitions of the signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SLENgth on page 314
Running/Stopped
Displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes. This display appears only
when signal generation is enabled ("State" On).
"Running"
The modulation signal is generated; a trigger was (internally or externally) initiated in triggered mode.
If "Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" have been selected, generation
of signals can be stopped with the "Arm" button. A new trigger (internally
with "Execute Trigger" or externally) causes a restart.
"Stopped"
The signal is not generated, and the instrument waits for a trigger event
(internal or external).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​RMODe on page 313
Arm
Stops signal generation. This button appears only with "Running" signal generation in the
"Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" trigger modes.
Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger (internally with "Execute Trigger" or
externally).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​ARM:​EXECute on page 311
Execute Trigger
Executes trigger manually. A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode other than "Auto" have been selected.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SOURce on page 314
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp[:​TRIGger]:​SEQuence on page 316
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​EXECute on page 311
Trigger Source
Selects trigger source. This setting is effective only when a trigger mode other than
"Auto" has been selected.
"Internal"
The trigger event is executed by "Execute Trigger".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
59
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
"Internal (Base- (two-path instruments only)
The trigger event is executed by the trigger signal from the second path
band A/B)"
The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external
"External
(TRIGGER 1 / trigger signal.
The trigger signal is supplied via the TRIGGER connector.
2)"
The polarity, the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the TRIGGER input can be set in the "Global Trigger/Clock Settings" dialog.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SOURce on page 314
Sync. Output to External Trigger
(enabled for Trigger Source External)
Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event.
For R&S SMBV instruments:
For or two or more R&S SMBVs configured to work in a master-slave mode for synchronous signal generation, configure this parameter depending on the provided system trigger event and the properties of the output signal. See the table below for an overview of
the required settings.
Table 4-5: Typical Applications
System Trigger
Application
"Sync. Output to External Trigger"
Common External Trigger event for All instruments are synchronous to ON
the master and the slave instruthe external trigger event
ments
All instruments are synchronous
OFF
among themselves but starting the
signal from first symbol is more
important than synchronicity with
external trigger event
Internal trigger signal of the master All instruments are synchronous
R&S SMBV for the slave instruamong themselves
ments
"On"
OFF
Corresponds to the default state of this parameter.
The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger
event but because of the instrument’s processing time the first samples
are cut off and no signal is outputted. After elapsing of the internal processing time, the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
60
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
"Off"
The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts
with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted.
This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with
signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​SYNChronize:​OUTPut
on page 312
Trigger Delay
Sets the trigger signal delay in samples on external triggering or on internal triggering via
the second path.
Sets the trigger signal delay in samples on external triggering.
This enables the R&S Signal Generator to be synchronized with the device under test or
other external devices.
For two-path instruments, the delay can be set separately for each of the two paths.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​DELay on page 315
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OBASeband:​DELay on page 312
Trigger Inhibit
Sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event subsequent to triggering. The input is
to be expressed in samples.
In the "Retrigger" mode, every trigger signal causes signal generation to restart. This
restart is inhibited for the specified number of samples.
This parameter is only available on external triggering or on internal triggering via the
second path.
For two-path instruments, the trigger inhibit can be set separately for each of the two
paths.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​INHibit on page 315
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OBASeband:​INHibit on page 313
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
61
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
4.4.2 Marker Mode
The marker output signal for synchronizing external instruments is configured in the
marker settings section "Marker Mode".
The R&S SMBV supports only two markers.
Marker Mode
Selects a marker signal for the associated MARKER output.
"Slot"
A marker signal is generated at the start of each slot (every 2560 chips
or 0.667 ms).
"Radio Frame" A marker signal is generated at the start of each frame (every 38400
chips or 10 ms).
A marker signal is generated at the start of every arbitrary waveform
"Chip
sequence (depending on the setting for the arbitrary waveform sequence
Sequence
Period (ARB)" length). If the signal does not contain an arbitrary waveform component,
a radio frame trigger is generated.
"System Frame A marker signal is generated at the start of every SFN period (every 4096
Number (SFN) frames).
Restart"
"ON/OFF Ratio"A regular marker signal that is defined by an ON/OFF ratio is generated.
A period lasts one ON and OFF cycle.
The ON time and OFF time are each expressed as a number of chips
and are set in an input field which opens when ON/OFF ratio is selected.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​ONTime on page 319
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​OFFTime on page 319
"User Period"
A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every user-defined
period. The period is defined in Period.
This can be used, for instance, to generate a pulse at the start of each
transport block (e.g. TTI 20 ms or 40 ms).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​PERiod on page 320
the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV
"Dynamic
Power Control" This marker is used internally. Marker 4 is set automatically to this value
if Dynamic Power Control is enabled.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
62
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
"HARQ Feed- the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV
This marker is used internally. Marker 4 is set automatically to this value
back"
if HARQ Feedback is enabled.
Remote-control command: n.a.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​MODE on page 318
4.4.3 Marker Delay
The delay of the signals on the MARKER outputs is set in the"Marker Delay" section.
The marker delay functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
The R&S SMBV supports only two markers.
Marker x Delay
Enters the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs and the start of the
frame or slot.
The input is expressed as a number of symbols/samples. If the setting "Fix marker delay
to dynamic range" is enabled, the setting range is restricted to the dynamic range. In this
range the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay on page 317
Current Range without Recalculation
Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
The delay can be defined by moving the setting mark.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay:​MAXimum
on page 318
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay:​MINimum
on page 318
Fix marker delay to current range
Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range the delay
can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut:​DELay:​FIXed on page 317
4.4.4 Clock Settings
The Clock Settings is used to set the clock source and a delay if required.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
63
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings
The clock functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
Sync. Mode
(for R&S SMBV only)
Selects the synchronization mode.
This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of several
connected R&S SMBVs.
Note: If several instruments are connected, the connecting cables from the master
instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must
have the same length and type.
Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points.
"None"
The instrument is working in stand-alone mode.
"Sync. Master" The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchronisation (including the trigger signal) and reference clock signal.
"Sync. Slave"
The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock signal
from another instrument working in a master mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SYNChronization:​MODE on page 322
Set Synchronization Settings
(for R&S SMBV only)
Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument's settings required for the synchronization mode, selected with the parameter Sync. Mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SYNChronization:​EXECute on page 322
Clock Source
Selects the clock source.
"Internal"
The internal clock reference is used to generate the chip clock.
"External"
The external clock reference is fed in as the chip clock or multiple thereof
via the CLOCK connector.
The chip rate must be correctly set to an accuracy of ( 2 % (see data
sheet).
The polarity of the clock input can be changed with the aid of "Global
Trigger/Clock Settings".
In the case of two-path instruments, this selection applies to path A
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SOURce on page 321
Clock Mode
Enters the type of externally supplied clock.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
64
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Test Setups/Models
"Chip"
A chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector.
"Multiple Chip" A multiple of the chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector; the chip
clock is derived internally from this.
The Multiplier window provided allows the multiplication factor to be
entered.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​MODE on page 320
Chip Clock Multiplier
Enters the multiplication factor for clock type Multiple.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​MULTiplier on page 321
Measured External Clock
Indicates the measured frequency of the external clock signal. This enables the user to
permanently monitor the frequency of the externally introduced clock.
This information is displayed only if the external clock source has been selected.
SCPI command:
CLOC:​INP:​FREQ?
4.4.5 Global Settings
The buttons in this section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping settings.
This settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
Global Trigger/Clock Settings
Calls the "Global Trigger/Clock/Input Settings" dialog.
This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold, the input impedance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs.
In the case of two-path instruments, these settings are valid for both paths.
The parameters in this menu affect all digital modulations and standards, and are described in chapter "Global Trigger/Clock/Input Settings" in the Operating Manual.
User Marker / AUX I/O Settings
Calls the "User Marker AUX I/O Settings" menu, used used to map the connector on the
rear of the instruments.
4.5 Test Setups/Models
The "Test Setups/Models" dialog can be reached via the "3GPP FFD" main menu.
The menu offers various test models, depending on which transmission direction is set.
The presetting is defined in the 3GPP standard TS 25.141.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
65
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Test Setups/Models
Test Models Downlink
Opens a window in which to select a test model in accordance with the 3GPP standard
TS 25.141.
Selecting a test model for an active base station immediately generates the selected
signal configuration.
The following test models are available for selection:
"Test Model 1 Test models for Home BS
(4/8 channels)" ● Spectrum emission mask
●
ACLR
●
Spurious emissions
●
Transmit intermodulation
●
Modulation accuracy
●
Peak code domain error
"Test Model 1 ●
(16/32/64 chan- ●
nels)"
●
Spectrum emission mask
●
Transmit intermodulation
●
Modulation accuracy
●
Peak code domain error
ACLR
Spurious emissions
"Test Model 2" Output power dynamics
"Test Model 3 Peak code domain error test models for Home BS
(4/8 channels)"
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
66
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Test Setups/Models
"Test Model 3 Peak code domain error
(16/32 channels)"
"Test Model 4" Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is not active
"Test Model
4_CPICH"
Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is active.
"Test Model 5 (4Error Vector Magnitude test models for Home BS
HS-PDSCH + 4 at base stations that support high speed physical downlink shared channels with 16 QAM
DPCH)"
"Test Model 5 (8Error Vector Magnitude
HS-PDSCH + at base stations that support high speed physical downlink shared chan30 DPCH) / Testnels with 16 QAM
Model 5 (4 HSPDSCH + 14
DPCH) / Test
Model 5 (2 HSPDSCH + 6
DPCH)"
"Test Model
6_04_4channels"
Relative Code Domain Error test models for Home BS
only applicable for 64QAM modulated codes.
"Test Model
6_30_8channels"
Relative Code Domain Error
only applicable for 64QAM modulated codes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation:​CATalog on page 328
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation on page 326
Test Models Uplink
Opens a window in which to select pre-defined test signals.
3GPP has not defined any test models for the Uplink transmission direction. But the R&S
Signal Generator also makes pre-defined test signals available for the Uplink, so that
useful test signals can be generated at the press of a button.
The Uplink test models are generated in the enhanced state of user equipment 1. An
exception are the test models for the E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH, this channels are calculated in realtime. The sequence length is 1 frame.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
67
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Test Setups/Models
The following configurations are available for selection:
"DPCCH +
DPDCH 60
ksps"
User equipment 1 is activated in DPCCH + DPDCH mode. 60 ksps is
selected as the overall symbol rate. All the other settings correspond to
the preset setting.
"DPCCH +
DPDCH 960
ksps"
User equipment 1 is activated in DPCCH + DPDCH mode. 960 ksps is
selected as the overall symbol rate. All the other settings correspond to
the preset setting.
"TS34121_R6_ Uplink test model according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 6, Table C.
Table_C_10_1 10.1.4.
_4_Subset1 ..
6"
"TS34121_R8_ Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HS-DPCCH
Table_C_10_1 according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table C.10.1.4.
_4_Subset1 ..
4"
"TS34121_R8_ Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HS-DPCCH
Table_C_11_1 and E-DCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table C.11.1.3.
_3_Subset1 ..
5"
"TS34121_R8_ Uplink test model for transmitter characteristics tests with HS-DPCCH
Table_C_11_1 and E-DCH with 16QAM according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table
_4_Subset1" C.11.1.4.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​MSTation:​CATalog on page 328
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​MSTation on page 328
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
68
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Predefined Settings - Downlink
4.6 Predefined Settings - Downlink
The "Predefined Settings" can be reached via the "3GPP FFD" main menu. It is only
available when the Downlink transmission direction is selected. The channel table of base
station 1 is filled (preset) with the set parameters. The sequence length of the generated
signal is 1 frame.
With the "Parameter Predefined" function, it is possible to create highly complex scenarios with just a few keystrokes. This function is of use if, say, just the envelope of the signal
is of interest.
Use Channels
Selects if P-CPICH, P-SCH, S-SCH and PCCPCH are used in the scenario or not. These
"special channels" are required by user equipment for synchronization.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCHannels on page 325
Use S-CCPCH
Selects if S-CCPCH is used in the scenario or not.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCCPch:​STATe on page 325
Symbol Rate S-CCPCH
Sets the symbol rate of S-CCPCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCCPch:​SRATe on page 325
Number of DPCH
Sets the number of activated DPCHs.
The maximum number is the ratio of the chip rate and the symbol rate (maximum 512 at
the lowest symbol rate of 7.5 ksps).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​DPCH:​COUNt on page 324
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
69
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Additional User Equipment - Uplink
Symbol Rate DPCH
Sets the symbol rate of all DPCHs.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​DPCH:​SRATe on page 324
Crest Factor
Selects desired range for the crest factor of the test scenario. The crest factor of the signal
is kept in the desired range by automatically setting appropriate channelization codes
and timing offsets.
"Minimum"
The crest factor is minimized. The channelization codes are distributed
uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are increased by 3
per channel.
"Average"
An average crest factor is set. The channelization codes are distributed
uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are all set to 0.
"Worst"
The crest factor is set to an unfavorable value (i.e. maximum). The channelization codes are assigned in ascending order. The timing offsets are
all set to 0.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​CRESt on page 323
Accept
Presets the channel table of basestation 1 with the parameters defined in the Predefined
Settings menu. Scrambling Code 0 is automatically selected (as defined in the 3GPP test
models).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​EXECute on page 325
4.7 Additional User Equipment - Uplink
Submenu "Additional User Equipment" can be reached via the "3GPP FFD" main menu.
It is only available when the Uplink transmission direction is selected.
The menu makes it possible to simulate up to 128 additional user equipment and thus to
generate a signal that corresponds to the received signal for a base station with high
capacity utilization.
The fourth user equipment (UE4) serves as a template for all other stations.
The following parameters are the only ones modified for the additional user equipment:
●
Scrambling code (different for all stations)
●
Power (different to UE4, but identical among themselves)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
70
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Additional User Equipment - Uplink
State
Activates additional user equipment. At "State Off", all the additional user equipment are
switched off.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​STATe on page 396
Number of Additional UE
Sets the number of additional user equipment. As many as 128 additional user equipments can be simulated.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​COUNt on page 395
Scrambling Code Step
Enters the step width for increasing the scrambling code of the additional user equipment.
The start value is the scrambling code of UE4.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​SCODe:​STEP on page 396
Power Offset
Sets the power offset of the active channels of the additional user equipment to the power
outputs of the active channels of UE4.
The resultant power must fall within the range 0 ... - 80 dB. If the value is above or below
this range, it is limited automatically.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​POWer:​OFFSet
on page 396
Time Delay Step
Enters the step width for the time delay of the additional user equipment to one another.
The start value returns the time delay of UE4. Entry is made in chips and can be a maximum of 1 frame.
The time delay allows user equipment to be simulated even if the arrival of their signals
is not synchronized at the base station.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​TDELay:​STEP on page 396
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
71
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
4.8 Base Station Configuration
The "Base Station Configuration" menu is called by selecting base station "BS1 ...
BS4" in the "3GPP FFD" menu. Base stations can be configured independently of one
another. Base station 1 (BS1) also includes enhanced channels (Enhanced Channels,
Realtime).
The menu comprises the "Common Settings" section, in which the general parameters
of the base station are set, a row containing the buttons "Multi Channel Assistant", "Code
Domain" and "Channel Graph", which call the appropriate submenus and graphics and
the most important part, the channel table with graphical display of the structure of the
channel being edited.
4.8.1 Common Settings
The general parameters of the base station are set in the Common Settings section.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
72
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
State - BS
Activates or deactivates the selected base station. The number of the selected base
station is displayed in the menu header.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​STATe on page 372
2nd Search Code Group - BS
Displays the 2nd search code group.
This parameter is specified in the table defined by the 3GPP standard "Allocation of SSCs
for secondary SCH". This table assigns a specific spreading code to the synchronization
code symbol for every slot in the frame. The value is calculated from the scrambling code.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SSCG on page 371
Use Scrambling Code - BS
Activates or deactivates the scrambling code. The scrambling code can be deactivated
for test purposes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCODe:​STATe on page 371
Scrambling Code - BS
Enters the base station identification. This value is also the initial value of the scrambling
code generator (see chapter 3.1, "Scrambling Code Generator", on page 16).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCODe on page 371
Page Indicators/Frame - BS
Enters the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page indicator channel (PICH).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​PINDicator:​COUNt on page 370
Use S-CPICH as Phase Reference - BS
Activates or deactivates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase.
If activated the phase of S-CPICH and the phase of all DPCHs is 180 degrees offset from
the phase of P-CPICH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCPich:​PREFerence[:​STATe]
on page 371
Diversity / MIMO - BS
Selects the antenna and the antenna configuration to be simulated.
The R&S Signal Generator supports two antenna configurations: a single-antenna system and a two-antenna system. Thus, an instrument equipped with two paths can simulate simultaneously the signals of both antennas of one two-antenna system. Moreover,
for this two-antenna system, transmit diversity can be additionally activated or deactivated.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
73
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
To simulate transmit diversity, a two-antenna system has to be selected and "Open Loop
Transmit Diversity" has to be activated.
To configure HS-PDSCH MIMO channels, a two-antenna system has to be selected.
"Single
Antenna"
The signal of single-antenna system is calculated and applied.
"Antenna 1 of 2"Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 1 of a two-antenna
system.
"Antenna 2 of 2"Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 2 of a two-antenna
system.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity on page 372
Open Loop Transmit Diversity - BS
(Enabled for two-antenna system only)
Activates/deactivates open loop transmit diversity. The antenna whose signal is to be
simulated is selected with the parameter "Diversity/MIMO".
Various forms of transmit diversity are described in the 3GPP standard. Different coding
is used to divide the signal between the two antennas. As a result, the receiver can
decode the traffic signal from the two input signals and is less liable to fading and other
interferences.
A fixed diversity scheme is assigned to each channel type:
● TSTD (time switched transmit diversity for SCH) for P-SCH, S-SCH
● STTD (space time block coding transmit antenna diversity) for all other channels,
except HS-PDSCH MIMO.
The HS-PDSCH MIMO channels are precoded as described in chapter 3.14, "MIMO
in HSPA+", on page 29.
These two schemes are described in detail in TS 25.211.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity on page 372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​OLTDiversity on page 370
Time Delay- BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Enters the time delay of the signal of the selected base station compared to the signal of
base station 1.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDELay on page 372
Use Compressed Mode- BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Activates compressed mode.
The Compressed mode is configured in the submenu called by button "Compressed
Mode".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe on page 369
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
74
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Compressed Mode…
Calls the menu for configuring the compressed mode.
The menu is described in chapter 4.9, "Compressed Mode - BS", on page 83.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Reset Channel Table
Calls the default settings for the channel table.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel:​PRESet on page 330
Multi Channel Assistant…
Calls the menu for configuring several DPCH channels simultaneously.
The menu is described in chapter 4.23, "Multi Channel Assistant - BS", on page 141.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Code Domain…
Calls a graphical display of the assigned code domain.
The code domain graph is described in chapter 4.10, "Code Domain Graph - BS",
on page 89.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channel Graph…
Opens the channel graph display to visually check the configured signal.
The channel graph is described in chapter 4.11, "Channel Graph - BS", on page 92.
SCPI command:
n.a.
HSDPA H-Set
(This feature is available for BS 1 only.)
Calls the default settings of the channel table for the HSDPA H-Set mode.
Channels 12 to 17 are preset for HSDPA H-Set 1.
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRES
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​TYPE?
Response: HSSC
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRED?
Response: P1QPSK
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel:​HSDPa:​HSET:​PRESet
on page 330
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
75
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
4.8.2 Channel Table
The "channel table" is located in the lower part of the menu. The channel table is where
the individual channel parameters are set. The structure of the channel currently being
edited is displayed graphically in the table header.
139 channels are available for each base station. Channels 0 to 10 are assigned to the
special channels, with the allocation of channels 0 to 8 being fixed. Channels 9 and 10
can be assigned a PDSCH, a DL-DPCCH, an HS-SCCH, an E-AGCH, an E-RGCH, or
an E-HICH.
Code channels 11 to 138 can either be assigned a DPCH, an HS-SCCH, an HS-PDSCH
(QPSK), an HS-PDSCH (16QAM), an HS-PDSCH (64QAM), an HS-PDSCH (MIMO), an
E-AGCH, an E-RGCH, an E-HICH, or an F-DPCH (see also the List of Supported Channels). This makes it possible to simulate the signal of a base station that supports highspeed channels.
Channels 4 and 11 to 13 of base station 1 can be generated in realtime (enhanced channels) and are highlighted in color. User-definable channel coding can be activated for
these channels. Bit and block errors can be simulated and data can be added to the data
and TPC fields from data lists either at the physical level or in the transport layer.
Table 4-6: List of supported channel types and their sequence in the 3GPP FDD channel table
Index
Shortform
Name
Function
0
P-CPICH
Primary Common Pilot Channel
●
●
●
1
S-CPICH
Secondary Common Pilot Channel
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
Optional
Enhanced in
BS1
Specifies the scrambling code in the no
scrambling code group (2nd stage of
scrambling code detection)
Phase reference for additional downlink channels
Reference for the signal strength
no
76
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Index
Shortform
Name
Function
Optional
Enhanced in
BS1
2
P-SCH
Primary Sync Channel
Slot synchronization
no
3
S-SCH
Secondary Sync Channel
●
●
Frame synchronization
no
Specifies the scrambling code group
4
P-CCPCH
Primary Common Control Phys.
Channel
●
Transfers the system frame number yes
(SFN)
Timing reference for additional
downlink channels
Contains the BCH transport channel
●
●
5
S-CCPCH
Secondary Common Control Phys.
Channel
6
PICH
Page Indication Channel
7
AICH
Acquisition Indication Channel
no
8
AP-AICH
Access Preamble Acquisition Indication Channel
no
9 / 10
PDSCH
Phys. Downlink Shared Channel
no
DL-DPCCH
Dedicated Physical Control Channel
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
DPCH
Dedicated Phys. Channel
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
no
HS-PDSCH (QPSK)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (QPSK)
no
HS-PDSCH (16
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (16 QAM)
no
HS-PDSCH (64
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (64 QAM)
no
HS-PDSCH (MIMO)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (MIMO)
no
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
no
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
no
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
no
F-DPCH
Fractional Dedicated Phys. Channel
no
11 - 13
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
no
Transfers the paging indicator
Transfers the user data and the control
information
no
yes
77
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Index
Shortform
Name
Function
Optional
Enhanced in
BS1
14 - 138
DPCH
Dedicated Phys. Channel
Transfers the user data and the control
information
no
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
HS-PDSCH (QPSK)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (QPSK)
HS-PDSCH (16
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (16 QAM)
HS-PDSCH (64
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (64 QAM)
HS-PDSCH (MIMO)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (MIMO)
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
F-DPCH
Fractional Dedicated Phys. Channel
At the physical level, a downlink DPCH consists of the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data
Channel) and the DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel); the channel characteristics are defined by the symbol rate. The DPDCH transports the user data that is fed
directly into the data field.
The DPCCH transports the control fields (TFCI = Transport Format Combination Indicator; TPC = Transmit Power Control and Pilot field). DPDCH is grouped with DPCCH using
time division multiplexing in accordance with 3GPP TS 25.211, see diagram below (the
formation of a downlink reference measurement channel is described in chapter 4.16,
"Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 113).
Fig. 4-4: Structure of a downlink DPCH in the time domain
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
78
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Channel Number - BS
Displays the consecutive channel numbers from 0 to 138.
All the rows are always displayed, even if the channels are inactive. They are switched
on and off by the "On/Off" button in the "State" column.
SCPI command:
n.a.
(selected via the suffix to the keyword :​CHANnel<n>)
Channel Type - BS
Selects channel type.
The channel type is fixed for channel numbers 0...8; for the remaining channel numbers,
the choice lays between the relevant standard channels and the high-speed channels.
The first 11 channels are reserved for special channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​TYPE on page 360
Enhanced Settings / HSDPA Settings - BS1
(Enhanced Settings are available for BS1 only.)
Calls the menu for configuring the enhanced channels of BS1 or the menu for configuring
the high-speed channels for all base stations.
Enhanced Settings
The channel state, "Enhanced On" or Off, is displayed in different colors. If the
"Enhanced" state is switched to Off, the ARB channel selection appears in the "Data"
column of the table.
Enhanced channels are generated in realtime. Channel coding in accordance with the
'Reference Measurement Channels' definition in TS25.101, TS25.104 and TS25.141 can
be activated. Any other user-defined coding can also be configured and stored.
If data lists are used as the data sources for data fields and TPC fields, it is possible to
load external data, for example, user information from a higher layer, to the R&S Signal
Generator. For example, this allows externally generated data with user information to
be applied, or TPC lists to be used to generate longer, non-repetitive power profiles.
To test the BER/BLER testers (e.g. integrated in the base station), it is possible to feed
through artificial bit errors to all the data sources (and block errors to the CRC checksum).
The enhanced settings menu is different for the P-CCPCH and the DPCHs. The menus
are described in chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 113 and
chapter 4.15, "Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1", on page 110.
HSDPA Settings
The available settings and indications of the HSDPA settings menu depend on the
selected high-speed channel type HS-SCCH, HS-PDSCH (QPSK), HS-PDSCH (QAM)
or HS-PDSCH (MIMO).
The menu is described in chapter 4.12, "HSDPA Settings - BS", on page 93.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
79
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Slot Format - BS
Enters the slot formats for the selected channel.
The range of values depends on the channel selected. For DPCH channels, for example,
the slot formats are 0 to 16.
For F-DPCH channels, the slot Formats 1 .. 9 are enabled only for instruments eqquiped
with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59. The difference between the F-DPCH slot formats is the
position of the 2 bits TPC field.
A slot format defines the complete structure of a slot made of data and control fields and
includes the symbol rate.
Parameters set via the slot format can subsequently be changed individually.
The structure of the channel currently selected is displayed in a graphic above the channel table (slot structure).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​SFORmat
on page 359
Symbol Rate - BS
Sets the symbol rate of the selected channel. The range of values depends on the channel
selected.
A change in the symbol rate may lead to a change in the slot format and vice versa.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​SRATe on page 359
Channelization Code - BS
Enters the channelization code (formerly the spreading code number).
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The range
of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the channel.
The standard assigns a fixed channelization code to some channels (P-CPICH, for
example, always uses channelization code 0).
The range of values runs from 0 to
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​CCODe on page 332
Power - BS
Sets the channel power in dB.
The power entered is relative to the powers outputs of the other channels. If "Adjust Total
Power to 0 dB" is executed (top level of the 3GPP menu), all the power data is relative
to 0 dB.
The set "Power" value is also the start power of the channel for "Misuse TPC" and
"Dynamic Power Control" (enhanced channels of basestation 1).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
80
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
Note: The maximum channel power of 0 dB applies to non-blanked channels (duty cycle
100%), with blanked channels, the maximum value can be increased (by Adjust Total
).
Power) to values greater than 0 dB (to
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​POWer on page 358
Data - BS
Selects data source.
The data sources "PN9, PN15, PN16, PN20, PN21, PN23, ALL 0, ALL1, Pattern", and
"Data List" are all available to choose from.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, you can enter the bit pattern in a bit editor that is called
in the column "DList Pattern". The length is limited to 64 bits.
If the "Data List" data type is used, you can select the list from a file window that is called
in the "DList Pattern" column. The selected data list is shown in the "DList Pattern" column.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA on page 332
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA:​PATTern
on page 334
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 333
Data Config - BS
(This feature is available for BS1 with active channel coding only.)
Calls the menu for configuring the data sources of subchannels in the transport layer.
The menu is described in chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1",
on page 113.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Timing Offset - BS
Sets the timing offset.
The timing offset determines the shift of the source symbols before interleaving.
The absolute starting time of the frame (slot 0) is shifted relative to the start of the scrambling code sequence by the timing offset * 256 chips. This means that whatever the symbol rate, the resolution of the timing offset is always 256 chips.
This procedure is used to reduce the crest factor. To obtain a lower crest factor, for
example, a good offset from channel to channel is 1, that is to say DPCH11 - timing offset
0, DPCH12 - timing offset 1, DPCH13 - timing offset 2, etc.
The illustration below shows the effect of the timing offset parameter. For various scenarios, the scrambling code sequence is shown in time relation to the data slots and to
a reference time t0 (starting from t0 the signal is calculated in the R&S Signal Generator).
● Timing offset is not used (TOffset = 0). The beginning of the frame (slot 0) and the
beginning of the scrambling code period are synchronous with starting point t0.
● Timing offset is used (TOffset > 0). The absolute starting time of the frames (slot 0)
is shifted relative to the reference time t0 by TOffset * 256 chips. The beginning of
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
81
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Base Station Configuration
the scrambling code sequence is still synchronous with reference time t0. The beginning of the scrambling code period and the frame (slot 0) are no longer synchronous.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​TOFFset
on page 360
DPCCH Settings - BS
Calls the menu for configuring the control fields of the selected channel.
The selected slot format predetermines the setting of the control fields. So a change is
also made to the control fields by changing the slot format and vice versa.
The menu is described in chapter 4.19, "DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table",
on page 130.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channel State - BS
Activates or deactivates the channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​STATe on page 360
Domain Conflict - BS
Displays whether the channel has a code domain conflict with one of the channels lying
above it (with a lower channel number). If there is a conflict, a red dot appears and the
column is colored soft orange. If there is no conflict, the column is colored soft blue.
The R&S Signal Generator helps to resolve code domain conflicts by automatically
adapting the channelization code of the channels involved. You get the button required
for this purpose if you click the table field in a submenu.
To call the graphical display of code domain occupancy by all the active code channels,
use the "Code Domain" button (see chapter 4.10, "Code Domain Graph - BS",
on page 89.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
82
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
You can recognize a domain conflict when the assigned domains of different channel
rows overlap. The occupied code domain of a channel is calculated from the symbol rate
of the channel, the minimum symbol rate (for 3GPP FDD 7.5 ksps), the chip rate (3.84
Mcps) and the channelization code number with
as follows:
"Lower domain limit" = current channelization code number * domain factor
"Upper domain limit" = lower domain limit + domain_factor – 1.
Example:
Channel with symbol rate 30 ksps and channelization code 10:
Domain factor = 30/7.5 = 4,
Lower domain limit = 10 x 4 = 40,
Upper domain limit = 40 + 4 - 1 = 43.
The channel occupies the code domain 40 to 43.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​DCONflict[:​STATe] on page 370
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​DCONflict:​RESolve on page 369
4.9 Compressed Mode - BS
To enable handover of a mobile station from a 3GPP FDD base station to another base
station, (3GPP FDD, 3GPP TDD or GSM) at a different frequency, transmission and
reception of the 3GPP FDD signal must be interrupted for a short time. During this time,
the mobile station changes to the frequency of the new base station, for example to
measure the receive level of this station or read system information.
To transmit a consistently high data volume also in the remaining (shorter) period of time,
the data is compressed. This can be done by halving the spreading factor (SF/2 method)
or reducing error protection (puncturing method). In both cases, transmit power in the
ranges concerned is increased to maintain adequate signal quality.
Apart from these two methods, there is also the method of "higher layer scheduling". With
this method, transmission of the data stream is stopped during the transmission gap. This
method is suitable for packet-oriented services; it involves no power increase (power
offset) in the active ranges.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
83
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
4.9.1 General Settings
Compressed Mode State - BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only)
Activates compressed mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe on page 369
Compressed Mode Method - BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only)
Selects compressed mode method.
"Puncturing"
The data is compressed by reducing error protection.
"Higher layer
scheduling"
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data stream
during the transmission gap.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
84
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
"SF/2"
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
This method can be demonstrated in the code domain graph. The graph
is split into two windows. The upper window shows the code domain
assignment with non-compressed slots, the lower window with compressed slots. It can be recognized clearly that the DPCH bars in the
lower window are wider, which is due to the reduction of the spreading
factor of these channels. The other channels (e.g. CPICH) have the
same width in both halves.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​METHod on page 366
DL Frame Structure - BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only)
Selects frame structure. The frame structure determines the transmission of TPC and
pilot field in the transmission gaps.
For 3GPP FDD radio communication to operate, the mobile station receiver requires
information in the pilot field for synchronization and channel estimation and in the power
control field TPC for control of the mobile station transmit power.
To keep the period during which no channel estimation takes place as short as possible,
the pilot is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap.
Optionally, the first TPC field of the transmission gap can be sent in addition.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
85
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
"Type A (Last
Pilot)"
The pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap.
"Type B (First
TPC, Last
Pilot)"
The pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap. The first
TPC field of the transmission gap is sent in addition.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​DLFStructure on page 366
Power Offset Mode - BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only)
Selects power offset mode.
The compressed slots can be sent with a power offset, i.e. at an increased power level.
"Auto (By Pilot The power offset is obtained as the relation between the Number of pilots
bits of non-compressed slots and the Number of pilot bits by compressed
Bit Ratio)"
slots.
"User"
The power offset is defined manually. The value is input in entry field
Power offset.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POMode
on page 369
Power Offset - BS
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Defines power offset. The entered value is only valid for Power Offset Mode User. The
value range is 0 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POFFset
on page 368
4.9.2 Compressed Mode Configuration Graph
The remaining parameters of the compressed mode are set in the configuration graph.
The graph displays the distribution of transmission gaps in a compressed mode signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
86
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
The signal generated can be divided into three subranges.
4.9.3 Transmission Gaps
A transmission gap has a maximum length of 14 slots. Since at least eight active slots
must be sent per frame, gaps comprising seven slots and more have to be distributed
over two neighboring frames.
The transmitted signal consists of max. two patterns that are sent alternately. Each pattern comprises two transmission gaps.
The graph includes all parameters necessary to define the transmission gaps in the signal.
The settings in the graph are also valid for the compressed mode graph of the user
equipment with the same number. For example, setting a distance of 9 slots for base
station 4 also sets the distance to 9 slots for user equipment 4.
The parameters below are interrelated in many ways. For example, the transmission gap
distance must be selected so that no frame contains more than one gap. In the event of
an invalid entry, the next valid value is automatically set. If the entry is valid but changes
the valid range for another parameter, the setting of the parameter is adapted.
In the following example, the signal (or more precisely: the pattern of transmission gaps)
is repeated every four frames.
At Slot:
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap slot number.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGSN
on page 368
Gap Len:
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
87
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - BS
Transmission gap lengths.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGL<di>
on page 367
Distance
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap distance.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGD
on page 366
Pattern Len:
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap pattern length. The input range is 0 ... 100 frames for pattern 1 and
1 ... 100 frames for pattern 2. Thus, it is possible to configure transmission gap pattern
with only one pattern.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGPL
on page 367
4.9.4 Compressed Ranges
All slots of a frame that are not blanked are compressed. If the transmission gap is transmitted within one frame (single-frame method), an envelope as shown by the diagram
below is obtained:
Fig. 4-5: Envelope of compressed mode signal with single-frame method
If the transmission gap is distributed over two neighboring frames, all slots of the two
frames that are not blanked are compressed:
Fig. 4-6: Envelope of compressed mode signal with double-frame method
A different slot format, usually with a higher number of pilot bits, is used in the compressed
ranges.
The transmit power can be increased ("Power Offset Mode)" automatically or manually
by defining a power offset.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
88
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Code Domain Graph - BS
4.9.5 Non-compressed ranges
Frames containing no transmission gaps are sent with the same slot format and the same
power as in the non-compressed mode.
4.10 Code Domain Graph - BS
The channelization codes are taken from a code tree of hierarchical structure (see below).
The higher the spreading factor, the smaller the symbol rate and vice versa. The product
of the spreading factor and symbol rate is constant and always yields the chip rate.
The outer branches of the tree (right-most position in the figure) indicate the channelization codes for the smallest symbol rate (and thus the highest spreading factor). The
use of a channelization code of the level with spreading factor N blocks the use of all
other channelization codes of levels with spreading factor >N available in the same
branch of the code tree. Channelization codes with smaller spreading factor are contained
in the codes with larger spreading factor in the same code branch. When using such
competitive channelization codes at the same time, the signals of associated code channels are mixed such that they can no longer be separated in the receiver. Orthogonality
will then be lost.
Fig. 4-7: Code tree of channelization codes
The outer branches of the tree (right-most position in the figure) indicate the channelization codes for the smallest symbol rate (and thus the highest spreading factor). The
use of a channelization code of the level with spreading factor N blocks the use of all
other channelization codes of levels with spreading factor >N available in the same
branch of the code tree.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
89
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Code Domain Graph - BS
Example:
If code c2,1 is being used, the remaining branch with c4,1 and c4,2 is blocked.
The domain of a certain channelization code is the outer branch range (with minimum
symbol rate and max. spreading factor) which is based on the channelization code
selected in the code tree. Using a spreading code means that its entire domain is used.
At a chip rate of 3.84 Mcps, the domain ranges from 0 to 511
The "Code Domain" display indicates the assigned code domain. The channelization
code is plotted at the X-axis, the colored bars indicate coherent code channels. The colors
are assigned to fixed symbol rates, the allocation is shown below the graph. The relative
power can be taken from the height of the bar.
It is possible to determine from this display whether the settings made have resulted in
a code domain conflict , that is to say, whether the code domains of the active channels
intersect. A code domain conflict is indicated by overlapping bars:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
90
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Code Domain Graph - BS
The graph is calculated from the settings that have been made. The code domain display
for the measured signal can be called from the "Graphics" menu ("Graphics" function
block).
In the channel table, a code domain conflict with an overlying channel (with a lower index)
is indicated in column "Do Conf" on the far right of the graph by a red dot and the orangecolored column.
By pressing the red button, a submenu opens which allows automatic resolution of the
existing code domain conflicts.
The code domain conflict is resolved by changing the channelization codes of the affected
channels. The red dots in column "Co Conf" disappear and the column is blue-colored.
The HSUPA control channels E-RGCH and E-HICH may use the same channelization
code as long as they use different signature sequence hopping index that identifies the
user equipment.The F-DPCH channels may also use the same channelization code as
long as they use a different timing offset (TOffs) or slot format.
The graphs immediately display the change:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
91
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Channel Graph - BS
4.11 Channel Graph - BS
The channel graph display shows the active code channels. The channel number is plotted on the X-axis. The red bars represent the special channels (P-CPICH to DL-DPCCH),
the green bars the data channels (DPCH). The height of the bars shows the relative power
of the channel.
The graph is calculated from the settings that have been made.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
92
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA Settings - BS
4.12 HSDPA Settings - BS
The "Enhanced HSDPA Mode" menu can be called in the BS channel table in column
"HSDPA Settings" with button "Config" The available settings and indications of the menu
depend on the selected HSDPA mode and channel type.
Section "MIMO Settings" is only available for enabled two-antenna system (see "Diversity / MIMO - BS" on page 73) and selected HS-PDSCH MIMO channel.
The high speed channels can be generated either continuously as defined in test model
5, in packet mode or in H-Set mode according to TS 25.101 Annex A.7.
In packet mode, the start of the channel and the distance between the HSDPA packets
can be set. The packets can be sent in one of five sub-frames (0 to 4). A sub-frame has
the same length as a packet and is 3 slots long. A HS-SCCH starts at the beginning of
the selected sub-frame, a HS-DPSCH starts with an offset of two slots to the selected
sub-frame. The active parts of the HS-SCCH and the HS-PDCCH for a specific sub-frame
setting differ by the slot offset of the HS-PDCCH.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
93
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA Settings - BS
Example:
Setting Sub-frame 1
HS-SCCH: slot 3 to 5 active
HS-PDSCH: slot 5 to 7 active.
Fig. 4-8: Timing diagram for the HS-SCCH and the associated HS-PDSCH, Packet Subframe 1 mode and
Inter TTI Distance = 3
In H-Set mode, the first packet is sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0. Up to 15 HSDPA
channels are coupled to be used as fixed reference channels. The number of coupled
channels depends on the selected HS-PDSCH slot format. Channel coding is always
performed over a certain number of bits. The resulting packets are distributed evenly over
one subframe of all HS-PDSCH channels. Therefore, the data stream is not assigned to
a defined channel but to all coupled channels.
4.12.1 Enhanced HSDPA Mode Settings
HSDPA Mode - BS
Selects the HSDPA mode.
"Continuous"
The high-speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is used
in test model 5 and 6.
"Subframe 0 | 1 The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode.
The start of the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the first
| 2 | 3 | 4"
packet is sent.
The distance between subsequent packets is set with parameter "Inter
TTI Distance".
"H-Set"
(This feature is available for BS1 and HS-SCCH only.)
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode. The first packet is
sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0.
The number of the coupled channel in the H-Set can be changed with
the parameter "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MODE
on page 358
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
94
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA Settings - BS
Burst Mode - BS
Activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy data
are sent during transmission brakes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​BMODe[:​
STATe] on page 342
Inter TTI Distance - BS
(Available for "subframe x" only)
Selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode.
The distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of
1 means continuous generation.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
TTIDistance on page 358
Constellation Version Parameter b - BS
(Available for "HS-PDSCH 16QAM" and "64QAM" only)
Switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM or 64QAM mapping.
The re-arrangement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​CVPB
on page 343
4.12.2 MIMO Configuration
The parameters in this menu section are available for instruments equipped with option
SMx-K59, BS1 and Channel Type HS-PDSCH (MIMO) only.
Precoding Weight Pattern (w2) - BS
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see chapter 3.14, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 29.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
PWPattern on page 357
Stream 2 Active Pattern - BS
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
95
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
STAPattern on page 357
Modulation Stream 1/2 (HS-PDSCH MIMO) - BS
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and respectively stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
MODulation<di> on page 357
Constellation Version Parameter b Stream 1/2 - BS
Switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM or 64QAM mapping.
The re-arrangement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
CVPB<di> on page 356
4.13 HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
The Enhanced HSDPA H-Set Mode menu is available for BS1, HS-SCCH and HSDPA
Mode set to H-Set only.
Compared to previous releases of the instrument's firmware, much more flexibility in the
configuration of H-Sets is provided now. Several former fixed parameters are now configurable, e.g.:
●
The channelization codes used for the physical channels are not any more fixed
●
A redundancy version sequence can be selected, i.e. varying the RV is possible in
case HARQ Mode Constant NACK is configured.
To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the same "Channelization Codes" as the codes used
for your physical channels and set the "HARQ Mode" to "Constant ACK".
A configuration according to an H-Set defined in TS 25.101 can be easily accomplished
by selecting one of the predefined H-Sets in the "Enhanced HSDPA H-Set Mode" menu.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
96
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
97
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
4.13.1 HSDPA H-Set General Setting
HSDPA Mode (H-Set) - BS
Selects the HSDPA mode.
"Continuous"
The high-speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is defined
in test models 5 and 6.
"Subframe 0 | 1 The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode.
The start of the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the first
| 2 | 3 | 4"
packet is sent.
The distance between subsequent packets is set with parameter "Inter
TTI Distance".
"H-Set"
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode. The first packet is
sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0.
The number of the coupled channel in the H-Set can be changed with
the parameter "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MODE
on page 358
Burst Mode (H-Set) - BS
Activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy data
are sent during transmission brakes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​BMODe[:​
STATe] on page 342
4.13.2 H-Set Configuration Common Settings
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
Predefined H-Set - BS
Selects the H-Set and the modulation according to TS 25.101 Annex A.7 .
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
98
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Table 4-7: Following combinations are possible:
H-Set
Modulation
1, 2, 3, 6, 10
QPSK 16QAM
4, 5, 7, 12
QPSK
8
64QAM
9
16QAM (Stream 1) QPSK (Stream 2)
11
64QAM (Stream 1) 16QAM (Stream 2)
User
-
Note: H-Sets 7 - 9 and H-Set 11 are enabled for instruments equipped with option SMUK59 only. H-Set 9 and H-Set 11 are available only for enabled two-antenna system (see
"Diversity / MIMO - BS" on page 73).
Several parameters are automatically set, depending on the selection made for the
parameter "H-Set". However, it is also possible to change these parameters. In this case,
the value of the parameter "H-Set" is automatically set to User.
Note: Use the predefined settings to let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one
generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
PREDefined on page 348
Advanced Mode (requires ARB) - BS
Activates/deactivates the advanced mode in which the H-Set will be generated by the
ARB. The parameter can be configured only for H-Sets 1 - 5. For H-Sets 6 - 11 and User,
it is always enabled.
For an H-Set calculated in arbitrary waveform mode (enabled "Advanced Mode") it is
critical to set an appropriate "Current ARB Sequence Length" in order to generate a signal
without unwanted artefacts when the pre-calculated sequence is repeated cyclically. In
particular, the HARQ cycles have to terminate completely before restarting the signal.
Assistance in setting an appropriate sequence length is provided by the parameter
"Suggested ARB Sequence Length" and the "Adjust" button. When working in Advanced
Mode, it is recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the suggested
one.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​AMODe
on page 343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth on page 352
Suggested ARB sequence length - BS
Displays the suggested ARB sequence length.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
99
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
The Suggested ARB Sequence Length is the calculated minimum length that depends
on several parameters, like TTI distance, Number of HARQ Processes, HARQ cycles,
HARQ Mode, RV Parameter Sequence, HS-SCCH Type, Precoding Weight Pattern and
Stream 2 Active Pattern.
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​AMODe
on page 343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth on page 352
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth:​ADJust on page 352
Current ARB sequence length - BS
Displays the current ARB sequence length or the adjusted ARB sequence length, set
after pressing the button Adjust.
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SLENgth on page 304
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth:​ADJust on page 352
Adjust - BS
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth:​ADJust on page 352
Nominal Average Information Bitrate - BS
Indicates the average data rate on the transport layer. In case of MIMO, the parameter
indicates the Combined Nominal Average Information Bitrate.
The Nominal Average Information Bitrate is calculated for the ideal case of infinite
sequence and with regard of the Stream 2 Active Pattern.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
NAIBitrate on page 348
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
100
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
UE Category - BS
Displays the UE category that is minimum required to receive the selected H-Set (see
also chapter 3.16, "UE Capabilities", on page 38).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
UECategory on page 355
HS-SCCH Type - BS
Sets the HS-SCCH type.
"Type 1 (normal)"
Normal operation mode.
"Type 2 (less
operation)"
(Available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 only)
HS-SCCH Less operation mode (see also chapter 3.12, "HS-SCCH less
operation", on page 26.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
101
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
"Type 3
(MIMO)"
(Available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 and enabled
two-antenna system only)
HS-SCCH Type 3 mode is defined for MIMO operation (see also chapter 3.14.2, "MIMO downlink control channel support", on page 31.
Enabling this operation mode, enables the parameters in section "MIMO
Settings" and the Stream 2 parameters in sections "HARQ Simulation,
Signal Structure" and "Coding Configuration".
While working in HS-SCCH Type 3 mode and simulating Antenna 2 of
one two-antenna system without transmit diversity, no control channel is
send although the HS-SCCH channel is displayed as active in the channel table. To prove that there is no control channel transmission consult
the "Code Domain Graph".
The HS-SCCH channel is displayed as DTX.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity on page 372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TYPE
on page 355
4.13.3 MIMO Settings
The parameters in this section are available for instruments equipped with option SMxK59, BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode, and for HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO) only.
Precoding Weight Pattern (w2) - BS
Selects the sequence for the MIMO precoding weight parameter w2.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
102
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see chapter 3.14, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 29.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
PWPattern on page 349
Stream 2 Active Pattern - BS
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
STAPattern on page 353
4.13.4 Global Settings
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
Data Source (HS-PDSCH) - BS
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
New data is retrieved from the data source each time an initial transmission is performed
within one TTI. An initial transmission is performed in case of "HARQ Mode" set to Constant ACK or by each new beginning of the "Redundancy Version Sequence".
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0 / All 1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the Pattern entry field.
"Data List /
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list is used. The data list can be
generated by the Data Editor or generated externally.
Data lists are selected in the Select Data List field.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA
on page 345
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​
PATTern on page 346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​
DSELect on page 346
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
103
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
UEID (H-RNTI) - BS
Enters the UE identity which is the HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier (H-RNTI) defined
in 3GPP TS 25.331: "Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol Specification".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​UEID
on page 356
Channelization Code HS-SCCH (SF128) - BS
Sets the channelization code of the HS-SCCH.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the same "Channelization Codes" as the codes used
for your physical channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
HSCCode on page 347
Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes - BS
Sets the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels assigned to the HS-SCCH.
The maximum number of channels assigned to the H-Set depends on the "HS-SCCH
Type" and the channel number of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation) maximum of two channels can be assigned.
For HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and Type 3 (MIMO) the maximum number of
assigned channels is 15.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
CLENgth on page 344
Start Cannelization Code HS-PDSCH (SF16) - BS
Sets the channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set.
The channelization codes of the rest of the HS-PDSCHs in this H-Set are set automatically.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the same "Channelization Codes" as the codes used
for your physical channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SCCode on page 351
4.13.5 Coding Configuration
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only. The
parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 and
for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
104
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
HS-PDSCH Modulation Stream1/2 - BS
Sets the HS-PDSCH modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
Note: The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59
only.
For HS-SCCH Type 2, the available modulation scheme is QPSK only.
For HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO), the modulation selected for stream 1 has to be the higher
order one, i.e. combination 16QAM/64QAM is not allowed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TYPE
on page 355
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
MODulation<di> on page 348
UE Supports 64QAM - BS
(Available for BS1, "HSDPA H-Set Mode", "HS-SCCH Type 1" and "16QAM" only)
Enables/disables UE support of 64QAM.
In case this paramour is disabled, i.e. the UE does not support 64QAM, the xccs,7 bit is
used for channelization information.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
S64Qam on page 351
Binary Channel Bits per TTI (Physical Layer) Stream1/2 - BS
Displays the coded binary channel bits per TTI and per stream.
The value displayed is calculated upon the values and selections for the parameters "HSPDSCH Modulation", "Symbol Rate" and "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
BCBTti<di> on page 343
Transport Block Size Table Stream1/2 - BS
Selects Table 0 or Table 1 as described in in 3GPP TS 25.321.
For "HS-PDSCH Modulation" set to 64QAM, only Table 1 is available.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
TABLe<di> on page 354
Transport Block Size Index Stream1/2 - BS
Selects the Index ki for the corresponding table and stream, as described in 3GPP
TS 25.321.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
INDex<di> on page 354
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
105
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Transport Block Size Reference Stream1/2 - BS
(Available for BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode and HS-SCCH Type 2 only)
While working in less operation mode, this parameter is signaled instead of the parameter
Transport Block Size Index.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
REFerence on page 354
Information Bit Payload (TB-Size) Stream 1/2 - BS
Displays the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number of transport
layer bits sent in each TTI before coding.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
BPAYload<di> on page 344
Coding Rate Stream 1/2 - BS
Displays the resulting coding rate per stream.
The coding rate is calculated as a relation between the "Information Bit Payload" and
"Binary Channel Bits per TTI".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
CRATe<di> on page 345
Virtual IR Buffer Size (per HARQ Process) Stream1/2 - BS
Sets the size of the Virtual IR Buffer (Number of SMLs per HARQ-Process) per stream.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
VIBSize<di> on page 356
4.13.6 Signal Structure
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only. The
parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 and
for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
Inter TTI Distance (H-Set) - BS
(Available for "subframe x" and "HSDPA H-Set Mode" only)
Selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode.
The distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of
1 means continuous generation.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
106
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
TTIDistance on page 358
Number of HARQ Processes per Stream - BS
Sets the number of HARQ processes. This value determines the distribution of the payload in the subframes and depends on the Inter "TTI Distance" (see figure).
A minimum of 6 HARQ Processes are required to achieve continuous data transmission.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​HARQ:​
LENgth on page 346
Signaling Pattern Stream1/2 - BS
Displays the distribution of packets over time. The Signaling Pattern displays a HARQProcess cycle and is a sequence of HARQ-IDs and "-". A HARQ-ID indicates a packet,
a "-" indicates no packet (see figure). The Signaling Pattern is cyclically repeated.
Long signaling patterns with regular repeating groups of HARQ-ID and "-" are not displayed completely. The signaling pattern is shortened and ". . ." is displayed but the
scheduling is performed according to the selected "Inter TTI Distance". Long signaling
patterns with irregularity in the HARQ-ID and "-" groups are displayed completely.
Depending on the selected "Burst Mode", a Dummy - TTI will be sent within the no packet
subframes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity on page 372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TYPE
on page 355
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
TTIDistance on page 358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​HARQ:​
LENgth on page 346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SPATtern<di> on page 353
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
107
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
4.13.7 HARQ Simulation
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only. The
parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 and
for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
Mode (HARQ Simulation) - BS
Sets the HARQ Simulation Mode.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the "HARQ Mode" to "Constant ACK".
"Constant ACK"New data is used for each new TTI. This mode is used to simulate maximum throughput transmission.
"Constant
NACK"
(enabled in "Advanced Mode" only)
Enables NACK simulation, i.e. depending on the sequence selected with
parameter "Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence" packets are
retransmitted. This mode is used for testing with varying redundancy
version.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MODE
on page 358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​AMODe
on page 343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​HARQ:​
MODE on page 347
Redundancy Version Stream1/2- BS
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant ACK.
Enters the Redundancy Version Parameter per stream. This value determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (16/64QAM
modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter is always 0.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
RVParameter<di> on page 349
Redundancy Version Sequence Stream 1/2 - BS
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant NACK.
Enters a sequence of Redundancy Version Parameters per stream. The value of the RV
parameter determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation
Arrangement (16/64QAM modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
The sequence has a length of maximum 30 values. The sequence length determines the
maximum number of retransmissions. New data is retrieved from the data source after
reaching the end of the sequence.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
108
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence
is always "0,3,4".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
RVPSequence<di> on page 350
4.13.8 Error Insertion
The parameters in this menu section are available for BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode and
disabled Advanced Mode only.
In the "Bit Error Insertion" and "Block Error Insertion" sections, errors can be inserted into
the data source and into the CRC checksum, in order, for example, to check the bit and
block error rate testers.
Bit Error State - HSDPA H-Set BS1
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data stream of the coupled HS-PDSCHs. It is possible to
select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​STATe on page 393
Bit Error Rate TCH - HSDPA H-Set BS1
Sets the bit error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​RATE on page 393
Insert Errors On - HSDPA H-Set BS1
Selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
"Physical layer" Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer on page 393
Block Error State - HSDPA H-Set BS1
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
109
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​STATe on page 394
Block Error Rate - HSDPA H-Set BS1
Sets the block error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE on page 393
4.14 Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1
The "Enhanced Settings" menu can be called in the BS channel table in column
"Enhanced Settings" with button "Config".
This settings are only available for base station 1.
P-CPICH Pattern - Enhanced P-CPICH BS1
Sets the P-CPICH pattern (channel 0).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PCPich:​PATTern
on page 394
4.15 Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
The "Enhanced Settings" menu can be called in the BS channel table in column
"Enhanced Settings" with button "Config".
This menu is only available for base station 1.
The settings for the enhanced P-CCPCH channel and the enhanced DPCH channels are
different (see chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 113. The
menu for the enhanced P-CCPCH channel (channel 4) is described below.
The upper section is where the selected channel is displayed and where the enhanced
state of this channel can be activated.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
110
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made. Interleaver
states 1 and 2 can be activated separately.
4.15.1 Channel Number and State
Channel Number - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
Displays the channel number and the channel type.
SCPI command:
n.a.
State - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
Switches the P-CCPCH (Primary Common Control Phys. Channel) to the enhanced
state. The channel signal is generated in realtime.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​STATe on page 392
4.15.2 Channel Coding - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made.
The channel-coded P-CCPCH (Broadcast Channel BCH) with System Frame Number is
generated according to the following principle.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
111
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
Fig. 4-9: Generation of a channel coded P-CCPCH/BCH
The data blocks of the BCH at transport-channel level comprise data determined for 20
ms of the PCCPCH (i.e. 2 frames) after channel coding. The first field of such a data block
is an 11bit long field for the system frame number (SFN). The SFN is automatically incremented by 1 (as stipulated in the standard) from transport block to transport block (equivalent to a step width of 2 frames due to the transport time interval length of 20 ms). After
2048 transport blocks (equivalent to 4096 frames) the SFN is reset and starts again at 0
(SFN restart). An output trigger indicating the SFN restart can be generated (see "Marker
Mode" on page 62).
The SFN format is defined in the standard; it is MSB-first coded.
The remaining system information (a 235-bit long field per block) is filled from the data
source selected for the P-CCPCH.
A data list can be used to transmit further specific system information in addition to the
SFN. If only the SFN is required, "ALL 0" is recommended as data source for P-CCPCH.
The BCH transport blocks are then channel-coded. A coded transport block comprises
the data sequence for two P-CCPCH frames.
Channel Coding State - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
112
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
The coding scheme is displayed in the field below.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​STATe
on page 392
Channel Coding Type - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
Displays the coding scheme.
The coding scheme of P-CCPCH (BCH) is specified in the standard. The channel is generated automatically with the counting system frame number (SFN). The system information after the SFN field is completed from the selected data source.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​TYPE
on page 392
Interleaver - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver states 1 and 2.
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​
INTerleaver<di> on page 391
4.16 Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
The "Enhanced Settings" menu can be called in the channel table in column "Enhanced/
HSDPA Settings" with button "Config".
This menu is only available for base station 1.
The settings for the enhanced P-CCPCH channel (see chapter 4.15, "Enhanced Settings
for P-CCPCH - BS1", on page 110) and the enhanced DPCH channels are different. The
menu for the enhanced DPCH channels (channels 12... 14) is described below. The
channels can be set independently.
For high-speed channels, menu HSDPA Settings is called with button "Config".
The upper section is where the selected channel is displayed and where the enhanced
state of this channel can be activated.
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made. You can
choose between a reduced display, where it is only possible to select the coding scheme,
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
113
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
and a display with detailed setting options. The Transport Channel section for detailed
settings can be revealed with the "Show Details" button and hidden with the "Hide
Details" button.
The "Bit Error Insertion" section is where the bit error simulation is configured and activated.
The "Block Error Insertion" section is where the block error simulation is configured and
activated.
In the "Dynamic Power Control" section, the power of the selected Enhanced Channel
can be increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range + Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step").
4.16.1 Channel Number and State
Channel Number - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Displays the number and type of the channel being configured in the enhanced state.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
114
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Enhanced State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Switches the DPCH channel to the enhanced state.
In the enhanced state, the modulation signal of the selected channel is generated in
realtime. It is possible to activate channel coding and simulate bit and block errors. Data
lists, for example with user data for the transport layer, can be used as the data source.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​STATe
on page 386
4.16.2 Channel Coding - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made. You can
choose between a reduced display and the detailed setting options display. With the
reduced display, it is only possible to select the coding scheme and this selection sets
the associated parameters to the presetting prescribed in the standard. The "Transport
Channel" section for detailed setting and for defining a user coding can be revealed with
the "Show Details" button and hidden with the "Hide Details" button.
A downlink reference measurement channel according to 3GPP TS 25.101 is generated
when the transport channels DTCH (Dedicated Traffic Channel) and DCCH (Dedicated
Control Channel) , which contain the user data, are mapped to a DPCH (Dedicated
Physical Channel) with a different data rate after channel coding and multiplexing. The
display below is taken from the standard (TS 25.101) and shows in diagrammatic form
the generation of a 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel from the DTCH and DCCH
transport channels (see standard for figures and tables of other reference measurement
channels).
Fig. 4-10: Channel coding of the 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel (downlink)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
115
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Table 4-8: The table below shows a summary of the transport channel parameters of the 12.2 kpbs
reference measurement channel
Parameter
DCCH
DTCH
Data Source
All 0
All 0
Transport Block Size
100
244
Transmission Time Interval
40 ms
20 ms
Type of Error Protection
Convolution Coding
Convolution Coding
Coding Rate
1/3
1/3
Rate Matching attribute
256
256
Size of CRC
12
16
Interleaver 1/2
On
On
Channel Coding State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
Channel-coded measurement channels - so-called "reference measurement channels" are required for many test procedures specified by the standard.
When channel coding is activated, (depending on the coding type) the slot format (and
thus the symbol rate, the pilot length and the TFCI state) are predetermined. The corresponding parameters in the channel table are disabled.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​STATe on page 377
Channel Coding Type - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects channel coding.
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate bit to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The
additional AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel.
The BTFD coding types with different data rates are also defined in the 3GPP specification (TS 34.121). They are used for the receiver quality test Blind Transport Format
Detection. DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits are included in the data stream
between rate matching and interleaving 1.
User coding can be defined as required in the detailed coding settings menu section
revealed with button "Show Details". They can be stored and loaded in the "User Coding" submenu. Selection User is indicated as soon as a coding parameter is modified
after selecting a predefined coding type.
The input data bits are taken for channel coding from the data source specified in the <<<
"Hide Details" menu section. The bits are available with a higher rate at the channel
coding output. The allocations between the measurement input data bit rate and the output symbol rate are fixed, that is to say, the symbol rate is adjusted automatically.
The following are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2
kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
116
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144
kbps"
144 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 384
kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2
kbps"
Channel coding for the AMR coder
"BTFD Rate 1 Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 1 (12.2 kbps)
12.2ksps"
"BTFD Rate 2 Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 2 (7.95 kbps)
7.95ksps"
"BTFD Rate 3 Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 3 (1.95 kbps)
1.95ksps"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​TYPE on page 378
Show Details... - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Reveals the detailed setting options for channel coding.
Available as well as the "Transport Channel" section are the "Bits per Frame" parameter
and the "User Coding" button.
Once the details are revealed, the labeling on the button changes to "Hide Details". Use
this to hide the detailed setting options display again.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
117
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
SCPI command:
n.a.
User Coding ... - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Calls the "User Coding" menu.
From the "User Coding" menu, the "File Select" windows for saving and recalling userdefined channel coding and the "File Manager" can be called.
User coding of BST1 are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.
3g_ccod_dl. The file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable; the
file extension is assigned automatically.
The complete channel coding settings in the menu section "Show Details" are saved and
recalled.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​CATalog on page 379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​STORe on page 379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​LOAD on page 379
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
118
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Slot Format (DPDCH) - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Enters the slot format. The slot format (and thus the symbol rate, the pilot length and the
TFCI state) depends on the coding type selected. The User Coding selection appears as
soon as the slot format is changed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​SFORmat on page 376
Symbol Rate (DPDCH) - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Displays the symbol rate.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​SRATe on page 377
Bits per Frame (DPDCH) - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Displays the data bits in the DPDCH component of the DPCH frame at physical level.
The value depends on the slot format.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​BPFRame on page 376
4.16.3 Transport Channel - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
In the "Transport Channel" section, up to 7 transport channels (TCHs) can be configured.
The first one is always a DCCH; the other six are DTCHs (DTCH1 to 6). The most important parameters of the TCH are displayed (data source and transport block size). The
associated parameters shown in the section below depend on which TCH is currently
selected.
A wide arrow beneath the block indicates which TCH is currently selected.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
119
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Transport Channel State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates the transport channel.
Note: In case of remote control, DCCH corresponds to :​TCHannel0, DTCH1 to :​
TCHannel1, etc.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​STATe on page 390
Data Source TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All 1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the Pattern entry field.
"Data List,
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list is used. The data list can be
generated by the Data Editor or generated externally.
Data lists are selected in the "Select Data List" field.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA on page 386
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​PATTern on page 388
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​DSELect on page 387
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
120
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Transport Time Interval TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TTINterval on page 391
Transport Block Count TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets the number of transport blocks for the TCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TBCount on page 390
Transport Block Size TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets the size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TBSize on page 391
Size of CRC TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Defines the type (length) of the CRC. Checksum determination can also be deactivated
(setting None).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​CRCSize on page 386
Rate Matching Attribute TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​RMATtribute on page 390
DTX Indication Bits TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets the number of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits. These bits are entered in the
data stream between rate matching and interleaver 1. Channel coding of BTFD reference
measurement channels Rate 2 and Rate 3 includes DTX267 and DTX644, respectively
(see 3GPP TS 34.121).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DTX on page 388
Error Protection TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects error protection.
"None"
No error protection
"Turbo 1/3"
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
121
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
"Conv 1/2 | 1/3" Convolution Coder of rate 1/2 or 1/3 with generator polynomials defined
by 3GPP.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​EPRotection on page 389
Interleaver 1 State TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 of the transport channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be set independently in each TCH. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​INTerleaver on page 389
Interleaver 2 State TCH - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 of all the transport channels.
Interleaver state 2 can only be set for all the TCHs together. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
INTerleaver2 on page 385
4.16.4 Error Insertion - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
In the "Bit Error Insertion" and "Block Error Insertion" sections, errors can be inserted into
the data source and into the CRC checksum, in order, for example, to check the bit and
block error rate testers.
Bit Error State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel coding
is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or
transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DERRor:​BIT:​STATe on page 381
Bit Error Rate - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets the bit error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DERRor:​BIT:​RATE on page 380
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
122
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Insert Errors On - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
This selection is only available when channel coding is active.
"Physical layer" Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer on page 380
Block Error State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​STATe on page 381
Block Error Rate - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets block error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE on page 381
4.16.5 Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
In the "Dynamic Power Control" section of menu "Enhanced Settings", the power of the
selected enhanced channel can be increased or decreased within the predefined
dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power
Step") with an control signal.
The control signal can be provided either externally (LEV ATT), internally (TPC pattern)
or manually (see Mode - Enhanced DPCHs BS1).
The R&S SMBV does not support externally provided control signals.
With "Dynamic Power Control" the test of Closed (Inner) Loop Power Control can be
performed in two test constellations:
1. Test whether the DUT (receiver) correctly performs the SIR (Signal to Interference
Ratio) measurement and inserts the corresponding bits into the TPC field of its transmitting signal. The TPC control information is provided by an external "Dynamic
Power Control" signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
123
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
2. Test whether the DUT (transmitter) responds with the correct output power to
received TPC bits. This can be carried out by using a data list adapted to the test
condition as TPC data source. The TPC pattern can be defined in the channel table.
The power change of the channels is performed by a switchover of the mapping table,
controlled by the "Dynamic Power Control" signal which is queried at the beginning of the
pilot field. Since the number of mappings is limited, the maximum dynamic range is
restricted to 30 dB and the step width to min. 0.5 dB. The output power of each channel
is thus limited to the dynamic range around the channel-specific start power.
To obtain optimum signal quality, the "Power Up Range" should not be set higher than
necessary since the mapping of the I/Q level in this range must be maintained as a level
margin.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
124
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Example:
Power Up Range = Power Down Range
Mode Up for channel11 and 13
Mode Down for channel 12
The following figure shows the change of channel power of the 3 enhanced channels.
The external control signal LEV ATT is used.
Fig. 4-11: Dynamic Power Control - Down Link
Available mappings are shown on the X-axis with MAPM being the starting point. In this
point, all channels have the start power which was set in the channel table.
At the beginning of the pilot field the LEVATT line is queried in each timeslot. If this line
is set to logical "1" switchover is made to the right mapping MAPM+1. This means an
increase of the output power by "Power Step" for all channels with "Power Control Mode
Up". The power of channel 12 is decreased by the same value (see figure 4-11).
If the LEVATT line is set to logical "0" switchover is made to the left mapping MAPM-1.
This means a reduction of the output power by "Power Step" for all channels with "Power
Control Mode Down". The power of channel 12 is increased by the same value.
The "Dynamic Power Control" settings are performed in the "Enhanced Settings" menu
of the channel table.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
125
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Dynamic Power Control State - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Activates or deactivates the "Dynamic Power Control" for the selected enhanced channel.
With activated Dynamic Power Control, the power of the enhanced channel can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range (Up Range + Down Range)
and with the predefined step size (Power Step) with an external control signal. The external control signal has to be supplied via the LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O connector.
For two-path instruments, the external control signal has to be supplied via the LEV ATT
input of the AUX I/O connector (path A) or via one of the USER interfaces (path B).
The Mode settings determine if the channel power is increased or decreased by a high
level of the control signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STATe on page 383
Mode - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects the control signal for Dynamic Power Control.
"External"
(the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV)
An external control signal is used for "Dynamic Power Control". The
external control signal is supplied via the LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O
connector.
For two-path instruments, external control signal is supplied via the LEV
ATT input of the AUX I/O connector (path A) or via one of the USER
interfaces (path B).
"TPC"
The TPC pattern is used for Dynamic Power Control. This selection corresponds to selection (Mis) Use TPC for not enhanced DPCHs.
"Manual"
The control signal is manually produced by pushing one of the buttons 0
or 1. Button 1 corresponds to a positive control signal, button 0 to a negative control signal.
The channel power is increased or decreased depending on the Direction
setting by the set power step.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​MODE on page 382
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STEP:​MANual on page 383
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
126
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Direction - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects the Dynamic Power Control direction. The Direction setting defines whether the
channel power is increased or decreased by a high level of the control signal (see figure 4-11).
"Up"
A high level of the control signal leads to an increase of channel power.
"Down"
A high level of the control signal leads to a decrease of channel power.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​DIRection on page 382
Power Step Dyn Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets step width by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" being switched on - the channel
power of the selected enhanced channel in the timeslot grid (= 0,667 ms) is increased or
decreased within the set dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range").
The start power of the channel is set in the Power column of the channel table.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STEP[:​EXTernal] on page 384
Up Range Dyn Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel
power of the selected enhanced channel can be increased. The resulting "Dynamic
Power Control" dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range") may be 30 dB at max.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​RANGe:​UP on page 383
Down Range Dyn Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel
power of the selected enhanced channel can be decreased. The resulting "Dynamic
Power Control" dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range") may be 30 dB at max.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​RANGe:​DOWN on page 382
Power Control Graph - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Indicates the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power start value
of the corresponding enhanced channels.
The graph is automatically displayed with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on.
Note: Since a realtime update of the window in the timeslot (= 0.667 ms) is not possible
for reasons of speed, an update can be performed in a more coarse time interval. Fast
channel power changes are not displayed but the settled state of the control loop can be
recognized very easily.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl[:​POWer] on page 385
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
127
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table
4.17 S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table
The "Config S-CCPCH" menu for configuring the fields of the secondary common control
physical channel can be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Settings" with the
"Config..." button.
The selected slot format predetermines the setting of the parameters provided in the
menu. Whenever the TFCI State and Pilot Length settings are changed, the slot format
is adjusted accordingly. Pilot Length and TFCI State can be selected for the S-CCPCH
channel.
Slot Structure (S-CCPCH) - BS
Displays the slot structure.
The structure of the slot depends on the slot format selected (see also 3GPP TS 25.211,
Table 18: Secondary CCPCH fields)
Slot Format (S-CCPCH) - BS
Displays the slot format.
The slot format displayed changes when a change is made to the TFCI and Pilot control
field settings.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Use TFCI (S-CCPCH) - BS
Activates TFCI field usage.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe
on page 336
TFCI Value (S-CCPCH) - BS
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator). This value
is used to select a combination of 30 bits, which is divided into two groups of 15 successive slots.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
128
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI
on page 336
Pilot Length (S-CCPCH) - BS
Sets the length of the pilot fields.
The range of values for this parameter depends on the channel type and the symbol rate.
To achieve a constant slot length, the data fields are lengthened or shortened depending
on the pilot length, as defined in the standard.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​PLENgth
on page 334
4.18 Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table
The "Config AICH" or "Config AP-AICH" menu for configuring the fields of the dedicated
physical control channel can be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Sett" with
the "Config" button.
Signature ACK/NACK Pattern - BS
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
This field is used by the base station to acknowledge, refuse or ignore requests of up to
16 user equipments.
Note: Pattern + is entered using the numeric key 1. Pattern - is entered via the numeric
key +/-.
""+" = ACK"
The ACK is sent. Transmission was successful and correct.
""-" = NACK"
The NACK is not sent. Transmission was not correct.
""0" = DTX"
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​AICH:​SAPattern
on page 331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​APAIch:​SAPattern
on page 331
Access Slot - BS
Selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​AICH:​ASLOt
on page 331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​APAIch:​ASLOt
on page 331
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
129
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
4.19 DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
The "Config DPCCH" menu for configuring the fields of the dedicated physical control
channel can be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Settings" with the "Config" button.
This menu is only available for selected channel types.
The selected slot format predetermines the setting of the parameters provided in the
menu. Whenever the TFCI State and Pilot Length settings are changed, the slot format
is adjusted accordingly.
The upper section of the menu is where the slot structure is displayed and the TFCI and
Pilot control fields are set.
The "TPC Settings" section is where the TPC field is set.
The "DPCCH Power Offset" section is where the power offset of the control fields to the
set channel power is set.
4.19.1 Slot Structure (DPCCH) - BS
Displays the slot structure.
The structure of the slot depends on the slot format selected (see also 3GPP TS 25.211,
Table 11: DPDCH and DPCCH fields)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
130
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Slot Format (DPCCH) - BS
Displays the slot format.
The slot format displayed changes when a change is made to the TFCI and Pilot control
field settings.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Use TFCI (DPCCH) - BS
Activates TFCI field usage.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe
on page 336
TFCI Value (DPCCH) - BS
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) . This value
is used to select a combination of 30 bits, which is divided into two groups of 15 successive slots.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI
on page 336
Pilot Length (DPCCH) - BS
Sets the length of the pilot fields.
The range of values for this parameter depends on the channel type and the symbol rate.
To achieve a constant slot length, the data fields are lengthened or shortened depending
on the pilot length, as defined in the standard.
Note: The pilot fields of all active DPCHs must be of the same length if Dynamic Power
Control with external control signal is active.The remote-control command is not valid for
multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​PLENgth
on page 334
Multicode State (DPCCH) - BS
Activates multicode transmission.
Multicode transmission can be activated for a group of channels destined for the same
receiver that is to say, belonging to a radio link. The first channel of this group is used as
the master channel.
With multicode transmission, the common components (Pilot, TPC and TCFI) for all the
channels are spread using the spreading code of the master channel.
This parameter is only available for the DPCHs.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
131
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​MCODe
on page 334
TPC Data Source (DPCCH) - BS
The "TPC Settings" section is where the settings for the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) are made. This field is used to control the transmit power.
When "Pattern" is selected, an entry field appears for the bit pattern. The maximum bit
pattern length is 64 bits.
When "Data List" is selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select" window.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA
on page 336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​
PATTern on page 338
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​
DSELect on page 337
TPC Read Out Mode (DPCCH) - BS
Defines TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a base station to a
specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate around this
power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power measurements
to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power). Together with the option
(Mis-) Use TPC for output power control (see below), TPC Read Out Mode can also be
used to generate various output power profiles.
Note: The remote-control commands are not valid for multi channel mode.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 bit.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
132
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
"Single + alt. 01"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt. 10"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​READ
on page 339
Misuse TPC for Output Power Control (DPCCH) - BS
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If ("Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified
pattern is misused; in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of this
pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0") the
channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this is 0
dB and the lower limit -80 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel power of
0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern ReadOut
Mode "Continuous".
Fig. 4-12: Dynamic change of channel power (continuous)
Note: The change in power is always carried out (as stipulated in the standard) at the
start of the slot pilot field. Misuse TPC for Output Power Control is not available for
enhanced DPCHs. Power Control via TPC pattern for enhanced channels can be
selected for active Dynamic Power Control (see chapter 4.16.5, "Dynamic Power Control
- Enhanced DPCHs BS1", on page 123).
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MISuse
on page 338
TPC Power Step (DPCCH) - BS
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for (Mis-) use TPC for output power control.
Note: Misuse TPC for Output Power Control is not available for enhanced DPCHs. Power
Control via TPC pattern for enhanced channels can be selected for active Dynamic Power
Control (see chapter 4.16.5, "Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1",
on page 123).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
133
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep
on page 338
4.19.2 DPCCH Power Offset section
The DPCCH Power Offset section is where the power offset of the control fields to the
set channel power is set.
Power Offset Pilot (DPCCH) - BS
Sets the power offset of the pilot field to the channel power in dB.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​
PILot on page 335
Power Offset TPC (DPCCH) - BS
Sets the power offset of the TPC field to the channel power in dB.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​
TPC on page 335
Power Offset TFCI (DPCCH) - BS
Sets the power offset of the TFCI field to the channel power in dB.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​
TFCI on page 335
4.20 Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
The "Config E-AGCH" menu for configuring the fields of the HSUPA control channels can
be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Settings" with the "Config" button.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
134
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
E-AGCH Information Field Coding – HSUPA BS
Enables/disables the information coding. Disabling this parameter corresponds to a
standard operation, i.e. no coding is performed and the data is sent uncoded. Enabling
this parameter allows you to configure the way the data is coded.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
IFCoding on page 361
E-DCH TTI – HSUPA BS
Switches between 2 ms and 10 ms. The processing duration also influences the number
of used slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTIEdch on page 362
Number of entries (TTIs) – HSUPA BS
Sets the number of configurable TTIs.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTICount on page 362
UEID (A-GCH) – HSUPA BS
Sets the UE Id for the selected TTI.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
135
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN20:​HSUP:​EAGC:​IFC ON
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN20:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIC 10
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN20:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTI9:​UEID 2000
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​UEID on page 362
Absolute Grant Value Index – HSUPA BS
Sets the Index for the selected TTI. According to the TS 25.212 (4.10.1 A.1), there is a
cross-reference between the grant index and the grant value. The TTI configuration of
the table is used cyclically. Depending on the selection made for the parameter "E-DCH
TTI", each table row corresponds to a 2ms TTI or to a 10ms TTI.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​AGVIndex on page 361
Absolute Grant Scope – HSUPA BS
Sets the scope of the selected grant. According to the TS 25.321, the impact of each
grant on the UE depends on this parameter.
For E-DCH TTI = 10ms, the "Absolute Grant Scope" is always All HARQ Processes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​AGSCope on page 361
4.21 Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
The "Config E-RGCH" or "Config E-HICH" menu for configuring the fields of the HSUPA
control channels can be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Settings" with the
"Config" button.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
136
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
Type of Cell – HSUPA BS
Switches between Serving Cell and Non Serving Cell. The cell type determines the number of used slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
CTYPe on page 364
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
CTYPe on page 363
E-DCH TTI – HSUPA BS
Switches between 2 ms and 10 ms. The processing duration also influences the number
of used slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
TTIEdch on page 365
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
TTIEdch on page 364
Signature Hopping Pattern Index – HSUPA BS
Enters a value that identifies the user equipment. The values are defined in TS 25.211.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
SSINdex on page 365
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
SSINdex on page 364
Relative Grant Pattern – HSUPA BS
(This feature is available for E-RGCH only.)
Enters a pattern: 0 = Hold, + = Up, - = Down.
Note: Pattern + is entered using the numeric key 1. Pattern - is entered via the numeric
key +/-.
For Non Serving Cell "1" is not allowed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
RGPAttern on page 365
ACK/NACK Pattern - BS
(This feature is available for E-HICH only.)
Enters the pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
For Non Serving Cell only "+" (ACK) and "0" (no signal) is allowed. For Serving Cells only
"+" (ACK) and "-" (NACK) is allowed.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
137
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
Note: Pattern + is entered using the numeric key 1. Pattern - is entered via the numeric
key +/-.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
RGPAttern on page 363
Tau DPCH - BS
Enters the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
DTAU on page 363
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
DTAU on page 364
Tau E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS
Displays the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
ETAU on page 363
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
ETAU on page 365
4.22 Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
The "Config F-DPCCH" menu for configuring the fields of the fractional dedicated physical
control channel can be called in the channel table in column "DPCCH Settings" with the
"Config" button.
This menu is only available for selected channel types.
Slot Format (F-DPCH) - BS
Displays the slot format as selected with the parameter "Slot Format" in the Channel
Table.
The corresponding slot structure is displayed above the parameter.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
138
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
Slot Formats 1 .. 9 are enabled only for instruments eqquiped with option R&S SMx/AMUK59.
The difference between the F-DPCH slot formats is the position of the 2 bits TPC field.
SCPI command:
n.a.
TPC Source – F-DPCH
Selects the data source for the F-DPCH channel.
The following data sources are available for selection
"All 0, All 1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the Data Pattern entry field.
"Data List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by
means of the "Select Data List" button.
The "File Manager" is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S
Signal Generator, and can be called within every "File Select" window by
means of the "File Manager" button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA on page 339
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​DSELect on page 340
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​PATTern on page 341
TPC Read Out Mode (F-DPCH) - BS
Defines TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
139
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a base station to a
specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate around this
power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power measurements
to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power). Together with the option
(Mis-) Use TPC for output power control TPC Read Out Mode can also be used to generate various output power profiles.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
Note that, the remote-control commands are not valid for multi channel
mode.
"Single + All 0" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 bit.
"Single + alt. 01"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt. 10"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
READ on page 342
TPC For Output Power Control (Mis-) Use (F-DPCH) - BS
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If "(Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified
pattern is misused; in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of this
pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0") the
channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this is 0
dB and the lower limit -80 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel power of
0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern ReadOut
Mode "Continuous":
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
MISuse on page 341
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
140
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
TPC Power Step (F-DPCH) - BS
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for "(Mis-) use TPC for output power
control".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
PSTep on page 341
4.23 Multi Channel Assistant - BS
The "Multi Channel Assistant" menu is called with the button of the same name above
the channel table. It allows several channels to be set simultaneously and is only available
for the channel types DPCH, HS-SCCH, HS QPSK, HS 16QAM and HS 64QAM.
Enhanced state is automatically deactivated. The channel table is only filled with new
values when the "Accept" button is pressed.
Start Channel Number - Multichannel Base Station
Enters the index for the start channel of the channel range that is set jointly.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Stop Channel Number - Multichannel Base Station
Enters the index for the stop channel of the channel range that is set jointly.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
141
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
Channel Type - Multichannel Base Station
Enters the channel type for the channel range that is set jointly. Available for selection
are DPCH, HS-SCCH, HS QPSK, HS 16QAM, or HS 64QAM.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Slot Format - Multichannel Base Station
Enters the slot format.
For DPCH channels, the slot formats are 0 to 16.
A slot format defines the structure of a slot made of data and control fields and includes
the symbol rate.
The individual parameters of a slot can later be changed, with the slot format being
adjusted, if necessary.
This parameter is not available for high-speed channels.
Note: For the "DPCCH Settings", this value is read-only.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Symbol Rate - Multichannel Base Station
Sets the symbol rate. The range of values depends on the channel selected.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channelization Code - Multichannel Base Station
Sets the channelization code for the start channel.
The channel is spread with the specified channelization code (spreading code).
The range of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the channel.
The range of values runs from 0 to (chip_rate/symbol_rate) - 1
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channelization Code Step- Multichannel Base Station
Sets the step width for the channelization code from channel to channel.
The valid range of values for the channelization code of an individual channel must not
be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded, the channelization code is limited automatically.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Power - Multichannel Base Station
Sets the channel power of the start channel in dB.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
142
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the LEVEL power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed (top level of
the 3GPP dialog), all the power data is relative to 0 dB.
Note: The maximum channel power of 0 dB applies to non-blanked channels (duty cycle
100%), with blanked channels, the maximum value can be increased (by "Adjust Total
Power") to values greater than 0 dB (to 10*log10(1/duty_cycle)). The Power value is also
the starting power of the channel for Misuse TPC and Dynamic Power Control
.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Power Step - Multichannel Base Station
Enters the step width for the change of channel power from channel to channel.
The valid range of values must not be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded, the
power is automatically limited to the permissible of -80 dB to 0 dB.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Data Source (DPDCH) - Multichannel Base Station
Selects data source.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PRBSxx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the Pattern entry field.
"Data List,
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
The data list selection is called with the "Select Data List" button.
SCPI command:
n.a.
DPCCH Settings - Multichannel Base Station
Calls the menu for configuring DPCCH channels.
The parameters of the menu are described in chapter 4.19, "DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table", on page 130. In contrary to setting a single channel, the remote control commands are not available.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Timing Offset - Multichannel Base Station
Sets the timing offset for the start channel.
The timing offset determines the shift of the source symbols before interleaving.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
143
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
The absolute starting time of the frame (slot 0) is shifted relative to the start of the scrambling code sequence by the timing offset * 256 chips. This means that whatever the symbol rate, the resolution of the timing offset is always 256 chips.
This procedure is used to reduce the crest factor. A good way to obtain a lower crest
factor is to use an offset of 1 from channel to channel, for example.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Timing Offset Step- Multichannel Base Station
Sets the step width for the timing offset from channel to channel.
The valid range of values must not be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded, the
timing offset is automatically limited to the permissible range.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channel State- Multichannel Base Station
Activates or deactivates all the channels in the set channel range.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Accept- Multichannel Base Station
Executes automatic completion of the channel table in accordance with the parameters
set.
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.24 User Equipment Configuration (UE)
The "User Equipment Configuration" menu is called by selecting user equipment "UE1 ...
UE4" in the "3GPP FFD" dialog.
In the standard, the term "Mobile Station" has been replaced by the term "User Equipment", to take into account the fact that there is a great variety of mobile terminal equipment available to users, with functionality that is constantly being enhanced.
A user equipment has a maximum of 6 DPDCHs, with parameters largely prescribed by
the standard (TS 25 211). To simplify operation, a distinction is made between three
modes ("PRACH only", "PCPCH only" and "DPCCH + DPDCH").
With the DPCCH + DPDCH mode, the HSDPA channel HS-DPCCH and the HSUPA
channels E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH can be activated.
With the PRACH only and PCPCH only modes, there is also a choice between "Standard" (all parameters can be set) and "Preamble only" (only the preamble can be set). The
menu of each particular mode only displays the parameters that are relevant.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
144
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
User equipment 1 (UE1) generates the DPCCH, up to one DPDCH and the HS-DPCCH
channel in enhanced mode (realtime).
The menu comprises an upper section "Common Settings", with central sections "PRACH
Settings", "PCPCH Settings" or "DPCCH Settings" with "DPDCH Settings", depending
on which mode is set. When "DPCCH + DPDCH" modes are selected, the only the channel structure , the state and the channel power are indicated. The "Channel Table" section
also appears below. The section for detailed setting and the channel table can be
revealed with the "Show Details" button and hidden with the "Hide Details" button.
In the menu for user equipment 1, under "DPDCH settings", there is a menu for setting
the enhanced channel parameters. When "PRACH only" or "PCPCH only" mode is
selected, the "Channel Coding" section also appears below.
In the menus for user equipment 2, 3 and 4, the compressed mode can be activated and
configured ("Use Compressed Mode").
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
145
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
146
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
4.24.1 Common Settings - UE
The "Common Settings" section is where the general settings for the selected user
equipment are made.
State - UE
Activates or deactivates the selected user equipment. The number of the selected user
equipment is specified in the menu header.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​STATe on page 399
Mode - UE
Selects the mode in which the user equipment is to work. The lower part of the menu will
change in accordance with the mode. The following modes are available:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
147
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
"PRACH only - In this mode, the instrument generates a single physical random access
channel (PRACH). This channel is needed to set up the connection
Standard"
between the user equipment and the base station. All the PRACH parameters can be set in the PRACH Settings section (see chapter 4.28,
"PRACH Settings - UE", on page 157).
"PRACH only - In this mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical
Preamble only" random access channel (PRACH). Only the PRACH preamble parameters can be set in the PRACH Settings section. This mode is needed for
Test Case 8.8 TS 25.141.
"PCPCH only - In this mode the instrument generates a single physical common packet
channel (PCPCH). This channel is used to transmit packet-oriented serStandard"
vices (e.g. SMS). The specific PCPCH parameters can be set in the
PCPCH Settings section (see chapter 4.29, "PCPCH Settings - UE",
on page 166).
"PCPCH only - In this mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical
Preamble only" common packet channel (PCPCH). Only the PRACH preamble parameters can be set in the PCPCH Settings section. This mode is needed
for Test Case 8.9 TS 25.141.
"DPCCH +
DPDCH"
In this mode the instrument generates a control channel (DPCCH) and
up to 6 data channels (DPDCH). This mode corresponds to the standard
mode of user equipment during voice and data transmission.
Alternatively the HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH channels can be
activated.
Channel-specific parameters can be set in the DPCCH Settings and
DPDCH Settings sections.
When UE1 is selected, the DPCCH, up to one DPDCH and the HSDPCCH channels are generated in realtime (realtime; enhanced). All the
channels (DPCCH + 6 DPDCH) can be generated simultaneously in
realtime (see chapter 4.30, "DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 176and
chapter 4.33, "DPDCH Settings - UE", on page 197).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​MODE on page 397
Scrambling Code - UE
Sets the scrambling code.
The scrambling code is used to distinguish the transmitter (UE) by transmitter-dependent
scrambling. Hexadecimal values are entered. Long or short scrambling codes can be
generated (see also chapter 3.1, "Scrambling Code Generator", on page 16).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​SCODe on page 398
Scrambling Mode - UE
Sets the type of scrambling code.
With scrambling code, a distinction is made between Long and Short Scrambling Code
(see also Section Scrambling Code Generator).
"Off"
Disables scrambling code for test purposes.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
148
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
"Long Scrambling Code"
Sets the long scrambling code.
"Short Scram- (only modes "DPCCH + DPDCH" and "PCPCH only")
Sets short scrambling code.
bling Code"
The short scrambling code is only standardized for DPCCH and DPDCH
channels. But it can also be generated for the PCPCH channel for test
purposes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​SCODe:​MODE on page 399
Time Delay - UE
Enters the time delay of the signal of the selected user equipment compared to the signal
of user equipment 1.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​TDELay on page 399
Use Compressed Mode- UE
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 and "DPCCH+DPDCH" Mode only.)
Activates compressed mode.
The Compressed mode is configured in the submenu called by button "Compressed
Mode".
The menu is described in chapter 4.26, "Compressed Mode - UE", on page 151.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe on page 402
Use UL-DTX - UE
(for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59, UE 1 and "DPCCH
+DPDCH" Mode only)
Enables/disables uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX), i.e. uplink DPCCH gating.
The R&S Signal Generator enables an UL-DTX in a "DPCCH only" mode, i.e.:
● there is no cross-reference between the scheduling of the HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH
and E-DPDCH and the DPCCH bursts and
● enabling the UL-DTX deactivates the channels DPDCH, HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and
E-DPDCH.
The UL-DTX settings are configured in the submenu called by button "UL-DTX". The
menu is described in chapter 4.27, "UL-DTX - UE", on page 155.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​STATe on page 463
UL-DTX - UE
(for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59, UE 1 and DPCCH+DPDCH
Mode only)
Opens the dialog for configuring the uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX) settings.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
149
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Code Domain Graph - UE
The menu is described in chapter 4.27, "UL-DTX - UE", on page 155.
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.25 Code Domain Graph - UE
The button "Code Domain" above the channel table calls a graphical display of the
assigned code domain.
Code Domain … - UE
Opens the code domain display to visually check the signal.
The "Code Domain" display indicates the assigned code domain. The channelization
code is plotted at the X axis; the colored bars indicate coherent code channels. The colors
are assigned to fixed symbol rates; the allocation is shown below the graph. The relative
power can be taken from the height of the bar. The symbols on so-called I- and Qbranches are spread independently. The channelization codes are fixed for the channels.
It is possible to determine from this display whether the settings made have resulted in
a code domain conflict , that is to say, whether the code domains of the active channels
intersect. A code domain conflict is indicated by overlapping bars. It may occur only when
switch "Force Channelization Code to I/Q" is activated.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
150
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - UE
4.26 Compressed Mode - UE
To enable handover of a mobile station from a 3GPP FDD user equipment to another
user equipment, (3GPP FDD, 3GPP TDD or GSM) at a different frequency, transmission
and reception of the 3GPP FDD signal must be interrupted for a short time. During this
time, the mobile station changes to the frequency of the new user equipment, for example
to measure the receive level of this station or read system information.
To transmit a consistently high data volume also in the remaining (shorter) period of time,
the data is compressed. This can be done by halving the spreading factor (SF/2 method)
or reducing error protection (puncturing method). In both cases, transmit power in the
ranges concerned is increased to maintain adequate signal quality.
Apart from these two methods, there is also the method of "higher layer scheduling". With
this method, transmission of the data stream is stopped during the transmission gap. This
method is suitable for packet-oriented services; it involves no power increase (power
offset) in the active ranges.
4.26.1 Compressed Mode General Settings
Compressed Mode State - UE
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 and DPCCH+DPDCH Mode only.)
Activates compressed mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe on page 402
Compressed Mode Method - UE
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 and DPCCH+DPDCH Mode only.)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
151
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - UE
Selects compressed mode method.
"Higher layer
scheduling"
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data stream
during the transmission gap.
"SF/2"
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​METHod on page 400
Power Offset Mode - UE
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 and DPCCH+DPDCH Mode only.)
Selects power offset mode.
The compressed slots can be sent with a power offset, i.e. at an increased power level.
"Auto (By Pilot The power offset is obtained as the relation between the Number of pilots
bits of non-compressed slots and the Number of pilot bits by compressed
Bit Ratio)"
slots
"User"
The power offset is defined manually. The value is input in entry field
"Power Offset".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POMode
on page 369
Power Offset - UE
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 only.)
Defines power offset.
The input is only valid for "Power Offset" Mode User.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POFFset
on page 368
4.26.2 Compressed Mode Configuration Graph
The remaining parameters of the compressed mode are set in the configuration graph.
The graph displays the distribution of transmission gaps in a compressed mode signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
152
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - UE
The signal generated can be divided into three subranges, the Compressed Range, the
Non-compressed Range and the Transmisssion Gaps.
4.26.3 Transmission Gaps
A transmission gap has a maximum length of 14 slots. Since at least eight active slots
must be sent per frame, gaps comprising seven slots and more have to be distributed
over two neighboring frames.
The transmitted signal consists of max. two patterns that are sent alternately. Each pattern comprises two transmission gaps.
The graph includes all parameters necessary to define the transmission gaps in the signal.
The settings here are also valid for the compressed mode graph of the base station with
the same number. For example, setting a distance of 9 slots for user equipment 4 also
sets the distance to 9 slots for base station 4.
The parameters below are interrelated in many ways. For example, the transmission gap
distance must be selected so that no frame contains more than one gap. In the event of
an invalid entry, the next valid value is automatically set. If the entry is valid but changes
the valid range for another parameter, the setting of the parameter is adapted.
In the following example, the signal (or more precisely: the pattern of transmission gaps)
is repeated every 4 frames.
At Slot
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap slot number.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGSN
on page 401
Gap Len
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap lengths.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGL<di>
on page 400
Distance
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap distance.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGD
on page 400
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
153
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Compressed Mode - UE
Pattern Len
(This feature is available for UE 2...4 only.)
Transmission gap pattern length.
The input range is 0 ... 100 frames for pattern 1 and 1 ... 100 frames for pattern 2. Thus,
it is possible to configure transmission gap pattern with only one pattern.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGPL
on page 401
4.26.4 Compressed Ranges
All slots of a frame that are not blanked are compressed. If the transmission gap is transmitted within one frame (single-frame method), an envelope as shown by the diagram
below is obtained:
Fig. 4-13: Envelope of compressed mode signal with single-frame method
If the transmission gap is distributed over two neighboring frames, all slots of the two
frames that are not blanked are compressed:
Fig. 4-14: Envelope of compressed mode signal with double-frame method
A different slot format, usually with a higher number of pilot bits, is used in the compressed
ranges.
The transmit power can be increased "(Power Offset Mode") automatically or manually
by defining a power offset.
4.26.5 Non-compressed ranges
Frames containing no transmission gaps are sent with the same slot format and the same
power as in the non-compressed mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
154
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
UL-DTX - UE
4.27 UL-DTX - UE
UL-DTX settings are available only for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMUK59.
Uplink discontinuous transmission (UL DTX) is one of the features of the Continuous
Packet Connectivity (CPC) provided to reduce the uplink control channel overhead. UL
DTX allows the UE to stop transmission of uplink DPCCH in case there is no transmission
activity on E-DCH or HS-DPCCH. This is sometimes also called uplink DPCCH gating.
Fig. 4-15: Uplink DTX
Uplink DPCCH is not transmitted continuously any more, but it is transmitted from time
to time according to a known activity pattern. This regular activity is needed in order to
maintain synchronization and power control loop. Gating is only active if there is no uplink
data transmission on E-DCH or HS-DPCCH transmission ongoing. In case E-DCH or HSDPCCH is used, the uplink DPCCH is always transmitted in parallel.
The "UL-DTX" dialog is available for UE1 and DPCCH+DPDCH mode and is used to
adjust the UL-DTX settings.
The menu provides the settings necessary to configure the DPCCH activity pattern (DTX
cycle), i.e. to determine the frequentness of the DPCCH bursts and the DPCCH start
offset, the DPCCH bursts length (without pre- and postamble) and the Preamble length.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
155
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
UL-DTX - UE
Fig. 4-16: DPCCH activity pattern
The R&S Signal Generator enables an UL-DTX in a "DPCCH only" mode, i.e.:
●
there is no cross-reference between the scheduling of the HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH
and E-DPDCH and the DPCCH bursts and
●
enabling the UL-DTX deactivates the channels DPDCH, HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and
E-DPDCH.
State - UL-DTX
Enables/disables uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX), i.e. uplink DPCCH gating.
The R&S Signal Generator enables an UL-DTX in a "DPCCH only" mode, i.e. enabling
the UL-DTX deactivates the channels DPDCH, HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​STATe on page 463
DPCCH Burst Length - UL-DTX
Sets the DPCCH length in subframes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​BURSt on page 461
Preamble Length - UL-DTX
Sets the preamble length in slots (see figure 4-16).
A preamble can be added to the DPCCH burst for synchronisation reasons. The preamble
length determines how many slots in advance the UE will start with the DPCCH transmission before uplink data or HS-DPCCH transmission are allocated. Hence, a longer
preamble should be configured to simulate an absence of uplink data or HS-DPCCH
transmission for a longer time.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​PREamble on page 462
Postamble Length - UL-DTX
Displays the postamble length in slots (see figure 4-16).
The postamble is added to the DPCCH burst for synchronisation reasons. The postamble
length determines how many slots longer the UE will continue with the DPCCH transmission after uplink data or HS-DPCCH transmission have been terminated.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
156
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
The postamble length is fixed to 1 slot.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​POSTamble
on page 462
DTX Cycle - UL-DTX
Sets the offset in subframe between two consecutive DPCCH bursts, i.e. determines how
often the DPCCH bursts are transmitted (see figure 4-16).
The minimum allowed value of the DTX cycle is calculated so that there is no overlap
between two DPCCH bursts.
This parameter can be used to set different UE DTX cycles.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​CYCLe on page 461
Offset - UL-DTX
Sets start offset of first DPCCH bursts (see figure 4-16).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​OFFSet on page 462
4.28 PRACH Settings - UE
The "PRACH Settings" section is where the settings are made for the PRACH channel.
This section is only available when "PRACH only" mode is activated.
In "Standard" mode, the instrument generates a single physical random access channel
(PRACH). This channel is needed to set up the connection between the user equipment
and the base station.
In "Preamble only" mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical random access channel (PRACH). This mode is needed for Test Case 8.8 TS 25.141.
When the selection is "PRACH only" - "Standard", all the parameters described below
are available, when the selection is "PRACH only" - "Preamble only", only the preamble
parameters are available.
The menu section is subdivided into the graphical display of the PRACH including the
timing parameters and the "Preamble Settings" and "Message Part" sections, in which
the settings are made for the preamble and for the data part of the channel. Some settings
are made directly in the input fields of the graphical display.
In the "Channel Coding" section channel coding can be activated.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
157
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
The graphical display shows either the complete PRACH including the message part or
only the preamble depending on the selected mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
158
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Display for PRACH - Preamble-only mode
Display for PRACH - Standard mode
Some of the parameter values can be input directly in the input fields of the graphical
display. However, the displayed settings of most parameters does not correspond to their
real settings. They are shown as an example to explain the parameter function. An
exception are the indicated sequence period and the power correction values, they match
the real settings. This allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the set ARB
sequence length. The power correction values can be used to calculate the correct settings for the desired RF level.
The graphic indicates the correction value for the last preamble before the message part
(indication in the preamble block, (PowPre) and the correction values for the message
part overall and separately for data and control part (indications in the message part
block, (PowMP). The power of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the
set "Preamble Power Step".
For one active UE, the RF power of the message part is calculated by adding the set RF
level to the correction value.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
159
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Example:
Level = 5 dBm
ΔPowMP = 2,3 dB
The message part power is 7,3 dBm
4.28.1 Graphical Display
Delta Power - Preamble - PRACH UE
Indication of the level correction value for the last preamble before the message part.
The level of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set "Preamble
Power Step".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​PREamble
on page 441
Delta Power - Message Part - PRACH UE
Indication of the level correction value for the message part.
In addition to the total value of the message part power, the power offsets of the data and
control part are indicated separately. The indication of the total value is important for
measurements where just the envelope of the signal is of interest whereas the separate
indication is useful for receiver tests.
In case of one UE active, the power of the message part can be calculated by adding the
set RF level.
Example:
"Level" = 5 dBm + "ΔPowMP" = 2,3 dB = 7,3 dBm.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt
on page 440
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt:​
DATA on page 441
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt:​
CONTrol on page 441
Start Offset - PRACH UE
Enters the start offset of the PRACH in access slots or slots.
The starting time delay in timeslots is calculated according to:
2 x Start Offset #
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​SOFFset
on page 442
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
160
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Transmission Time - Preamble - PRACH UE
Enters the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREPre
on page 443
Transmission Time - Message Part - PRACH UE
Enters the time difference between the last preamble and the message part in access
slots or slots.
Two modes are defined in the standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode 1 it is 4 access slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREMp
on page 442
Sequence Length - PRACH UE
Indication of the sequence length.
This indication allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the set ARB
sequence length.
●
In "PRACH only - Preamble" mode, the sequence period is defined by settings Start
Offset, Time Pre - Pre and Preamble Repetition:
Sequence Length = Start Offset (Slots) + Preamble Repetition x Transmission Time
- Preamble
Example:
Start Offset = 2 Access Slots = 4 Slots
Preamble Repetition = 3
Transmission Time - Preamble = 3 Access Slots = 6 Slots
Sequence Length = 4 Slots + 3 x 6 Slots = 22 Slots
●
In "PRACH only - Standard" mode, the sequence period is defined by settings "Start
Offset", "Transmission Time - Preamble", "Message Part Length" and "Preamble
Repetition":
Sequence Length = Start Offset (Slots) + (Preamble Repetition - ) x Transmission
Time - Preamble + Transmission Time - Message Part + 15 x Message Part Length
(Frames)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
161
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Example:
Start Offset = 2 Access Slots = 4 Slots
Preamble Repetition = 3
Transmission Time - Preamble = Transmission Time - Message Part = 3 Access Slots =
6 Slots
Message Part Length = 2 Frames
Sequence Length = 4 Slots + 2 x 6 Slots + 6 Slots + 15 x 2 = 52 Slots
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​SPERiod
on page 442
ARB Sequence Length - PRACH UE
Indication of the ARB sequence length.
This indication allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the set ARB
sequence length.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SLENgth on page 304
4.28.2 Preamble Settings
Preamble Power - PRACH UE
Sets the power of the preamble component of the PRACH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PPOWer on page 438
Preamble Power Step - PRACH UE
Sets the power by which the preamble is increased from repetition to repetition. The
power set under Preamble Power is the "target power", used during the last repetition of
the preamble.
Example:
"Preamble Power" = 0 dB
"Preamble Repetition" =3
"Preamble Power Step" = 3 dB
Generated power sequence:
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PPOWer:​STEP on page 439
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
162
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Preamble Repetition - PRACH UE
Sets the preamble count.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PREPetition on page 439
Signature - PRACH UE
(This feature is available for the "PRACH only – Standard" mode only.)
Selects the signature to be used for the PRACH channel.
The signature defines the code domain for the channelization code being used. 16 fixed
bit patterns are defined.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SIGNature on page 440
4.28.3 Message Part
The "Message Part" section is where the settings for the data part of the PRACH are
available. This section is only available when "PRACH only - Standard" is selected.
Data Power - PRACH UE
Sets the power of the data component of the PRACH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DPOWer on page 438
Control Power - PRACH UE
Sets the power of the control component of the PRACH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​CPOWer on page 436
Message Length - PRACH UE
Sets the length of the message component of the PRACH channel in frames.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​MLENgth on page 438
Slot Format - PRACH UE
Selects the slot format.
Slot formats 0 to 3 are available for the PRACH channel. The slot format defines the
symbol rate of the message component.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SFORmat on page 439
Symbol Rate - PRACH UE
Sets the symbol rate of the PRACH channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
163
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SRATe on page 440
TFCI - PRACH UE
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the control
component of the PRACH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TFCI on page 440
Data Source - PRACH UE
Selects the data source for the data component of the PRACH channel.
The following data sources are available for selection
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data is generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the "Data Pattern" entry field.
"Data List,
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by
means of the "Select Data List" button.
The "File Manager" is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S
Signal Generator, and can be called within every File Select window by
means of the "File Manager" button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA on page 437
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​PATTern on page 438
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​DSELect on page 437
4.28.4 Channel Coding State
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding for the PRACH channel is
activated and deactivated and the coding type is defined. Use "Show Coding" to display
the fixed settings for the channel coding parameters.
Channel coding of PRACH is possible for all UEs.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
164
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PRACH Settings - UE
Channel Coding State - PRACH UE
Activates or deactivates channel coding for the PRACH channel.
When On, the "Message Part Length" automatically is set to 2. It cannot be changed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PRACh:​CCODing:​STATe
on page 478
Channel Coding Type - PRACH UE
Selects the predefined reference measurement channel coding types for the PRACH
channel.
"RACH RMC
(TB size 168
bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size of
168 bit.
"RACH RMC
(TB size 360
bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size of
360 bit.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PRACh:​CCODing:​TYPE
on page 478
Show Coding - PRACH UE
Calls the menu for displaying the channel coding settings. The reference measurement
channel parameters are set to fixed values.
Remote-control command: n.a.
The following parameters are displayed:
"Data Source" The data source is displayed in the transport channel graphical display.
"Transport
Block Size"
Size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
"Transport
Block"
Transport block count.
"Transport TimeNumber of frames into which a TCH is divided.
Interval"
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
165
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
"Size of CRC" CRC type (length).
"Error Protection"
Error protection.
"Interleaver 1 / 2Channel coding interleaver state
State"
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.29 PCPCH Settings - UE
The "PCPCH Settings" section is where the settings are made for the PCPCH channel.
This section is only available when "PCPCH only" mode is activated.
In "Standard" mode, the instrument generates a single physical common packet channel
(PCPCH). This channel is used to transmit packet-oriented services (e.g. SMS).
In "Preamble only" mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical common packet channel (PCPCH). This mode is needed for Test Case 8.9 TS 25.141.
When the selection is "PCPCH only - Standard", all the parameters described below are
available, when the selection is "PCPCH only - Preamble only", only the preamble
parameters are available.
The menu section is subdivided into the graphical display of the PCPCH including the
timing parameters and the "Preamble Settings" and "Message Part" sections, in which
the settings are made for the preamble and for the data part of the channel. Some settings
are made directly in the input fields of the graphical display.
The "Channel Coding" section for activating channel coding is available for UE1 with
enhanced channels.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
166
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
The graphical display shows either the complete PCPCH including the message part or
only the preamble depending on the selected mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
167
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
Display for PCPCH - Standard mode
Display for PCPCH - Preamble-only mode
Some of the parameter values can be input directly in the input fields of the graphical
display. However, the displayed settings of most parameters does not correspond to their
real settings. They are shown as an example to explain the parameter function. An
exception are the indicated sequence lengths and the power correction values, they
match the real settings. This allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the
set ARB sequence length. The power correction values can be used to calculate the
correct settings for the desired RF level.
The graphic indicates the correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message
part and the CD Preamble (indication in the AICH and CD Preamble block, (PowPre).
These two values are identical. The power of the other preambles can be calculated by
subtracting the set "Preamble Power Step". It also indicates the power correction value
of the message part (indication in the message part block, PowMP).
For one active UE, the RF power of the message part is calculated by adding the set RF
level to the correction value.
Example:
"Level "= 5 dBm
"ΔPowMP" = 2,3 dB
The message part power is 7,3 dBm
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
168
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
4.29.1 Graphical Display
Delta Power - Preamble - PCPCH UE
Indication of the level correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message
part. This value is identical to the correction value for the CD preamble.
The level of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set Preamble Power
Step.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​PREamble
on page 432
Delta Power - Message Part - PCPCH UE
Indication of the level correction value for the message part.
In case of one UE active, the power of the message part can be calculated by adding the
set RF level.
Example:
Level = 5 dBm + ΔPowMP = 2,3 dB = 7,3 dBm.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt
on page 432
Start Offset - PCPCH UE
Enters the start offset of the PCPCH in access slots or slots.
Note: The PCPCH only transmitted once, at the start of the sequence.
The starting time delay in timeslots is calculated according to:
2 x Start Offset #
TS 25 211, Chapter 7.3 PCPCH/AICH timing relation
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​SOFFset
on page 433
Transmission Timing - Preamble
Enters the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots or slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREPre
on page 434
Transmission Timing - Message Part
Enters the time difference between the last preamble and the message part in access
slots or slots.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
169
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
Two modes are defined in the standard. In mode AICH transmission timing 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode AICH transmission timing 1
it is 4 access slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREMp
on page 433
Sequence Length - PCPCH UE
Indication of the sequence length.
This indication allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the set ARB
sequence length.
●
In "PCPCH only - Preamble" mode, the sequence period is defined by settings "Start
Offset", "Transmission Timing - Preamble" and "Preamble Repetition":
Sequence Length = Start Offset (Slots) + Preamble Repetition x Transmission Timing
- Preamble
Example:
Start Offset = 2 access slots = 4 slots
Preamble Repetition = 3
Transmission Timing - Preamble = 3 access slots = 6 slots
Sequence length = 4 slots + 3 x 6 slots = 22 slots
●
In "PCPCH only - Standard" mode, the sequence period is defined by settings Start
Offset, Transmission Timing - Preamble, Transmission Timing - Message Part, Message Part Length and Preamble Repetition:
Sequence length = Start Offset (slots) + Preamble Repetition x Transmission Timing
- Preamble + Transmission Timing - Message Part + 15 x Message Part Length
(frames)
Example:
Start Offset = 2 access slots = 4 slots
Preamble Repetition = 3
Time Pre - Pre = Time Pre - MP = 3 access slots = 6 slots
Power Control Preamble Length = 8 slots
Message Part Length = 2 frames
Sequence length = 4 slots + 3 x 6 slots + 6 slots + 8 + 15 x 2 = 66 slots
Note: In PCPCH mode the CD preamble has to be taken into account. Therefore, Preamble Repetition instead of (Preamble Repetition - 1) is used.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​SPERiod
on page 433
ARB Sequence Length - PCPCH UE
Indication of the ARB sequence length.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
170
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
This indication allows the user to check if the sequence period fits into the set ARB
sequence length.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SLENgth on page 304
4.29.2 Preamble Settings
Preamble Power - PCPCH UE
Sets the power of the preamble component of the PCPCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PPOWer on page 430
Preamble Repetition - PCPCH UE
Sets the preamble count.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PREPetition on page 431
Preamble Power Step - PCPCH UE
Sets the power by which the preamble is increased from repetition to repetition. The
power set under Preamble Power is the "target power", used during the last repetition of
the preamble.
Example:
"Preamble Power" = 0 dB
"Preamble Repetition" = 3
"Preamble Power Step" = 3 dB
Generated power sequence:
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PPOWer:​STEP on page 431
Power Control Preamble Length - PCPCH UE
Sets the length of the power control preamble in slots.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PLENgth on page 430
Signature - PCPCH UE
Selects the signature to be used for the PCPCH channel. The signature defines the code
domain for the channelization code being used.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​SIGNature on page 431
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
171
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
4.29.3 Message Part
The "Message Part" section is where the settings for the data part of the PCPCH are
available. This section is only available when "PCPCH only - Standard" is selected.
Data Power - PCPCH UE
Sets the power of the data component of the PCPCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DPOWer on page 429
Control Power - PCPCH UE
Sets the power of the control component of the PCPCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​CPOWer on page 427
Message Length - PCPCH UE
Sets the length of the message component of the PCPCH channel in frames.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​MLENgth on page 430
Slot Format - PCPCH UE
Selects the slot format of the control component of the PCPCH channel.
Slot formats 0 to 2 are available for the PCPCH channel. The slot format defines the
structure of the control component, the FBI mode.
When channel coding is active, the FBI mode and the slot format are prescribed.
"Slot format 0" no FBI field
"Slot format 1" 1 FBI field
"Slot format 2" 2 FBI fields
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​CPSFormat on page 427
FBI Mode - PCPCH UE
Selects the FBI (Feed Back Information) mode.
The FBI mode is determined by the slot format set. A change in the FBI mode leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
"FBI Off"
The FBI field is not in use.
"FBI On 1 Bit" The FBI field is used with a length of 1 bit.
"FBI On 2 Bits" The FBI field is used with a length of 2 bits.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​FBI:​MODE on page 429
FBI Pattern - PCPCH UE
Enters the bit pattern for the FBI field in the control part (of the message part) of the
PCPCH.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
172
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
The FBI field is filled cyclically with a pattern of up to 32 bits in length.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​FBI:​PATTern on page 429
Symbol Rate - PCPCH UE
Sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH channel.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is prescribed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​SRATe on page 431
Data Source - PCPCH UE
Selects the data source for the data component of the PCPCH channel.
The following data sources are available for selection:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" entry field.
"Data List,
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by
means of the "Select Data List" button.
The File Manager is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S Signal
Generator, and can be called within every File Select window by means
of the "File Manager" button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA on page 428
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​PATTern on page 429
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​DSELect on page 428
TFCI - PCPCH UE
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the control
component of the PCPCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TFCI on page 432
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
173
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
TPC Data Source - PCPCH UE
Defines the data source for the TPC field of the PCPCH channel.
During data list selection the "Select TPC Data List" button appears for selecting a data
list.
During pattern selection, the "TPC Pattern" entry window is displayed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA on page 434
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 434
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern
on page 435
TPC Read Out Mode - PCPCH UE
Defines the TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 bits.
"Single + alt. 01"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt. 10"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​READ on page 435
4.29.4 Channel Coding
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding for the PCPCH channel is
activated and deactivated and the coding type is defined. Use "Show Coding" to display
the fixed settings for the channel coding parameters.
Channel coding of PCPCH is only possible for the enhanced channel of UE1.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
174
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
PCPCH Settings - UE
Channel Coding State - PCPCH UE1
Activates or deactivates channel coding for the PCPCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​STATe
on page 477
Channel Coding Type - PCPCH UE1
Selects the predefined reference measurement channel coding types for the PCPCH
channel.
"CPCH RMC
(TB size 168
bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size of
168 bit.
"CPCH RMC
(TB size 360
bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size of
360 bit.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​TYPE
on page 477
Show Coding - PCPCH UE1
Calls the menu for displaying channel coding. The reference measurement channel
parameters are set to fixed values.
The following parameters are displayed:
"Data Source" The data source is displayed in the transport channel graphical display.
"Transport
Block Size"
Size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
"Transport
Block"
Transport blocks count.
"Transport TimeNumber of frames into which a TCH is divided.
Interval"
"Size of CRC" CRC type (length).
"Error Protection"
Error protection.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
175
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
"Interleaver 1 / 2Channel coding interleaver state
State"
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.30 DPCCH Settings - UE
The DPCCH Settings section is where the settings are made for the DPCCH channel.
This section is only available if DPCCH + DPDCH mode is activated (see also chapter 4.33, "DPDCH Settings - UE", on page 197).
When user equipment 1 (UE1) is selected, the DPCCH, up to one DPCH and the HSDPCCH channels are generated in realtime (realtime; enhanced).
At the physical level, an uplink DPCH consists of the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data
Channel) and the DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel); the channel characteristics are defined by the symbol rate.
The DPDCH transports the user data that is fed directly into the data field. The DPCCH
carries the control fields (Pilot field; TPC = Transmit Power Control, FBI (Feedback Information) and TFCI = Transport Format Combination Indicator). DPDCH is grouped with
DPCCH I/Q code multiplexing in accordance with 3GPP TS 25.211, see diagram below.
The generation of an uplink reference measurement channel is described in chapter 4.36,
"Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1", on page 218.
Fig. 4-17: Structure of an uplink DPCH in the time domain
In the upper section, the settings of the DPCCH parameters are made. The channel
structure is displayed.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
176
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
Channelization Code - DPCCH UE
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPCCH. The
code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The standard
assigns a fixed channelization code to the DPCCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CCODe on page 404
Power - DPCCH UE
Sets the power of the DPCCH channel.
Test cases defined in the 3GPP standard often use notation "Signalling values for βc and
βd". The quantization of the gain parameters is shown in the following table which is taken
from 3GPP Spec 25.213 (left columns) and supplemented by the instrument-specific
values (right column).
Signalling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set for R&S Signal
Generator / dB
15
1.0
0.0
14
14/15
-0.60
13
13/15
-1.24
12
12/15
-1.94
11
11/15
-2.69
10
10/15
-3.52
9
9/15
-4.44
8
8/15
-5.46
7
7/15
-6.62
6
6/15
-7.96
5
5/15
-9.54
4
4/15
-11.48
3
3/15
-13.99
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
177
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
Signalling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set for R&S Signal
Generator / dB
2
2/15
-17.52
1
1/15
-23.52
0
Switch off
Switch channel off or -80 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​POWer on page 418
DL-UL Timing Offset - DPCCH UE
Displays the timing offset between the downlink and the uplink.
The timing offset determines the time delay in chips between receipt of the downlink
signal and transmission of the uplink signal.
The standard specifies this value at 1024 chips and this is taken into account automatically when generating the uplink signal. The signal is calculated synchronously to the
downlink reference timing, that is to say, the first uplink frame starts at chip position 1024
of the simulated signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TOFFset on page 420
Slot Format # - DPCCH UE
Selects the slot format.
The slot format defines the structure of the DPCCH slots and the control fields. Depending
on the selected slot format, the slot structure is displayed.
Slot formats 0 to 4 are available for the DPCCH channel as defined in the 3GPP Release
7 specification TS 25.211.
Note: The former slot formats 4 and 5 according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS
25.211 are not supported any more.
The slot format selection adjusts the DPCCH slot structure according to the 3GPP specification. However, it is also possible to adjust this structure by configuration of each of
the control fields separately.
The table below gives an overview of the cross-reference between the slot format and
the structure of the DPCCH slot.
Slot Format #
NPilot, bits
NTPC, bits (TPC
Mode)
NTFCI, bits
NFBI, bits
(Use TFCI)
(FBI Mode)
0
6
2
2
0
1
8
2
0
0
2
5
2
2
1
3
7
2
0
1
4
6
4
0
0
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
178
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
"Slot format 0"
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = On, i.e. TFCI field = 2 bits
"Slot format 1"
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
"Slot format 2"
"FBI Mode" = 1 bit
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = On, i.e. TFCI field = 2 bits
"Slot format 3"
"FBI Mode" = 1 bit
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
"Slot format 4"
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K59)
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 4 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​SFORmat on page 418
Use TFCI - DPCCH UE
Activates the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
The status of the TFCI field is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change leads automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe on page 419
TFCI - DPCCH UE
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) of the
DPCCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI on page 419
FBI Mode - DPCCH UE
Selects the FBI (Feed Back Information) mode.
The FBI mode is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change in the FBI mode leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
179
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
Note: The former 2-bits long FBI Mode according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS
25.211 is not supported any more.
"Off"
The FBI field is not in use.
"1 Bit"
The FBI field with a length of 1 bit is used.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​MODE on page 403
FBI Pattern - DPCCH UE
Enters the bit pattern for the FBI field.
The FBI field is filled cyclically with a pattern of up to 32 bits in length.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​PATTern on page 404
TPC Mode - DPCCH UE
Selects the TPC (Transmit Power Control) mode.
The TPC mode is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change in the TPC mode leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
"2 Bits"
A TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
"4 Bits"
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K59)
A TPC field with a length of 4 bits is used.
A 4 bits long TPC field can be selected, only for Slot Format 4 and disabled FBI and TFCI fields.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MODE on page 421
TPC Data Source - DPCCH UE
Defines the data source for the TPC field of the DPCCH channel.
When "Pattern" is selected, an entry field appears for the bit pattern. The maximum bit
pattern length is 64 bits.
When "Data List" is selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select" window for
selection of a data list.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA on page 420
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern
on page 421
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect
on page 420
TPC Read Out Mode - DPCCH UE
Defines the TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
180
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPCCH Settings - UE
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a DPCH of a base
station to a specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate
around this power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power
measurements to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power). Together
with the option (Mis-)Use TPC for output power control (see below), TPC Read Out Mode
can also be used to generate various output power profiles.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1" The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 bits.
"Single + alt. 01"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt. 10"The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​READ on page 422
Misuse TPC for Output Power Control - DPCCH UE
(This feature is available for UE2, UE3, and UE4 only.)
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If "(Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified
pattern is misused, in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of this
pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0") the
channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this is 0
dB and the lower limit -80 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel power of
0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern ReadOut
Mode Continuous:
Fig. 4-18: Dynamic change of channel power (continuous)
Note: Power control works both on the DPCCH and all the active DPDCHs.The change
in power is always carried out (as stipulated in the standard) at the start of the slot pilot
field
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MISuse on page 421
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
181
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPCCH Settings - UE
TPC Power Step - DPCCH UE
(This feature is available for UE2, UE3, and UE4 only.)
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for "(Mis-) use TPC for output power
control".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep on page 422
4.31 E-DPCCH Settings - UE
The "E-DPCCH Settings" section is where the settings are made for the E-DPCCH channel. This section is only available if "DPCCH + DPDCH" mode is activated (see chapter 4.33, "DPDCH Settings - UE", on page 197).
State - E-DPCCH UE
Activates or deactivates the E-DPCCH channel.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is activated automatically.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​STATe
on page 458
Power - E-DPCCH UE
Sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
The value range is -80 dB to 0 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​POWer
on page 457
Channelization Code – E-DPCCH UE
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (always I) of the E-DPCCH.
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The
standard assigns a fixed channelization code to the E-DPCCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CCODe on page 404
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
182
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPCCH Settings - UE
Retrans Sequence Number – E-DPCCH UE
Sets the retransmission sequence number.
The value range is 0 to 3.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​RSNumber
on page 457
E-TFCI Information – E-DPCCH UE
Sets the value for the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
The value range is 0 to 127.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​TFCI
on page 458
Happy Bit – E-DPCCH UE
Activating the happy bit. This bit is indicating whether the UE could use more resources
(Not Happy/deactivated) or not (Happy/activated).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​HBIT
on page 457
E-DCH TTI – E-DPCCH UE
Sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​TTIEdch
on page 458
Use (DTX) – E-DPCCH UE
Activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​DTX:​STATe
on page 447
DTX Pattern (bin) – E-DPCCH UE
Sets the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximum length is 64 bits.
The following values are allowed:
● 1: Data transmission
● -: DTX
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​DTX:​PATTern
on page 446
HSUPA FRC… - E-DPCCH UE
(This button is available for UE1 only).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
183
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Calls the menu for configuring the FRC (Fixed Reference Channel), see chapter 4.35,
"HSUPA FRC Settings - UE", on page 209.
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.32 HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The "HS-DPCCH Settings" section is where the settings are made for the HS-DPCCH.
This section is only available if "DPCCH + DPDCH" mode is activated (see also chapter 4.30, "DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 176 and chapter 4.33, "DPDCH Settings UE", on page 197).
When user equipment 1 (UE1) is selected, the signal is generated in real-time.
HS-DPCCH Structure
Fig. 4-19: Structure of an uplink HS-DPCCH in the time domain
The HS-DPCCH carries uplink feedback signaling related to the accuracy and quality of
downlink HS-DSCH transmission. Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) is transmitted in the first subframe slot, Channel-Quality Indication (CQI) and in case of UE configured in MIMO mode also Precoding Control Indication (PCI) are transmitted in the
second and third subframe slot. Only one HS-DPCCH may be transmitted on each radio
link. The HS-DPCCH can only exist together with an uplink DPCCH.
The HS-DPCCH subframe starts 256 ×m chips after the start of an uplink DPCCH slot
with m selected such that the subframe transmission starts within the first 0-255 chips
after 7.5 slots following the end of the received HS-PDSCH sub-frame.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
184
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Fig. 4-20: Timing offset between the uplink DPCCH, the HS-PDSCH and the HS-DPCCH at the UE
HS-DPCCH Power
According to 3GPP TS 25.214, the uplink HS-DPCCH power shall be estimated for each
HS-DPCCH slot.
In the R&S Signal Generator, the channel power can be set individually for each case of
feedback signaling and UE mode as a combination of the CQI Power (parameter
"Power") and the corresponding "Power Offset" (see the tables below). Since the feedback signalling can be configured per slot of TTI that carries HS-DPCCH, the channel
power is also calculated on a slot basis.
Table 4-9: Calculating of the HARQ-ACK power
Mode
HARQ-ACK
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Compatibility Mode =
Up to Release 7
Normal ACK/NACK Pattern
MIMO
Power Offset ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK
Power Offset NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK
Single ACK
Power Offset ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK
Single NACK
Power Offset NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK
TB1: ACK, TB2: ACK
Power Offset ACK/ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK/ACK
TB1: ACK, TB2: NACK
Power Offset ACK/NACK
Power + Power Offset ACK/NACK
TB1: NACK, TB2: ACK
Power Offset NACK/ACK
Power + Power Offset NACK/ACK
TB1: NACK, TB2: NACK
Power Offset NACK/NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK/
NACK
Compatibility Mode =
Release 8 and Later
all
HARQ-ACK
Power Offset HARQ-ACK
Power + Power Offset HARQ-ACK
Table 4-10: Calculating the PCI/CQI power
Mode
CQI
Type
CQI Parameter
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Compatib. Mode = Up to Release 7
Normal
-
CQI
-
Power
CQI Type B
CQI
-
Power
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
185
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Mode
CQI
MIMO
CQI Type A
Type
CQI Parameter
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Single TB
CQIS
Power Offset CQI
Type A
Power + Power Offset CQI Type A
Double TB CQI1 and CQI2
Compatib. Mode
Normal
CQI
CQI
DCHDSPA
non
MIMO
Comp. CQI
CQI1 and CQI2
CQI Type B
CQI
CQI Type A Single TB
CQIS
MIMO
= Release 8 and Later
Power Offset PCI/CQI
Power + Power Offset PCI/CQI
Double TB CQI1 and CQI2
4.32.1 HS-DPCCH Common Settings
The displayed channel structure depends on whether the UE is working in MIMO mode
or not.
State - HS-DPCCH - UE
Activates or deactivates the HS-DPCCH channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​STATe on page 413
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
186
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Power - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power in dB.
●
●
In case of "Copmatibility Mode release 8 and later", this parameter represents the
reference power, relative to that the power used during the HARQ-ACK slot and the
power used during the PCI/CQI slots are calculated.
While working in a Copmatibility Mode Up to Release 7, this parameter represents
the CQI Power of a UE configured in a normal mode or of a UE configured in MIMO
mode and sending CQI Type B report. The CQI Power is the reference power, relative
to that the power used during the HARQ-ACK slot and the power used during the
PCI/CQI slots of a UE configured in MIMO mode and sending CQI Type A reports
are calculated.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the LEVEL power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed (top level of
the 3GPP FDD menu), all the power data is relative to LEVEL.
Note: The uplink high speed channel is blanked (duty cycle 3/15).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer on page 412
Compatibility Mode - HS-DPCCH - UE
The concept of the graphical user interface for the configuration of HS-DPCCH has been
adapted to support simultaneous DC-HSDPA and MIMO operation, as required in 3GPP
Release 9 onwards.
The parameter "Compatibility Mode" switches to the display of the HS-DPCCH settings
provided for backwards compatibility ("Up to Release 7").
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​COMPatibility
on page 404
Start Delay - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the delay between the uplink HS-DPCCH and the frame of uplink DPCH.
Thus, the channel can be synchronized with the associated downlink PDSCH.
The delay is entered as a multiple m of 256 chips according to TS 25.211 7.7:
m = (TTX_diff /256 ) + 101
where TTX_diff is the difference in chips (TTX_diff = 0, 256, ....., 38144).
The value range of m is 0 to 250 (2 frames +1024 chips)
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SDELay on page 412
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
187
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Inter TTI Distance - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the distance between two HSDPA packets. The distance is set in number of subframes (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of 1 means continuous generation.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTIDistance
on page 418
Channelization Code - HS-DPCCH - UE
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the HS-DPCCH.
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The
channelization code of the high speed channel depends on the number of activated
DPDCHs, i.e. on the overall symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CCODe on page 404
4.32.2 Uplink Feedback Signaling Table (Release 8 and Later)
This settings are available for "Compatibility Mode" set to "Releaase 8 and Later".
MIMO settings and DC-HSDPA settings are available for configuration only for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59.
The settings available in this dialog allow you to adjust the HS-DPCCH signal of a UE
configured for normal operation, DC-HDSPA operation, MIMO mode or for a simultaneous dual cell + MIMO operation.
The HS-DPCCH structure can be configured with the parameters "Inter TTI Distance"
and "Number of TTI's", as well as by configuring the HARQ-ACK and CQI/PCI information
per TTI by means of the parameters of the uplink feedback signaling table.
MIMO Mode - HS-DPCCH - UE
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MMODe on page 411
Secondary Cell Active - HS-DPCCH - UE
Enables/disables working in dual cell HSDPA mode for the selected UE.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SCActive on page 412
Number of TTI's - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the number of configurable TTI's.
This parameter determines the number of the rows in the uplink feedback signaling table.
Each row represents one TTI. The parameters set in the table are read out cyclically.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTICount on page 418
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
188
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Suggested / Current ARB Seq. Length - HS-DPCCH - UE
Displays the suggested and current ARB sequence length.
The "Suggested ARB Sequence Length" is the calculated minimum length that depends
on the "Inter TTI Distance" and the "Number of TTI's". The current ARB sequence length
is adjusted by pressing the button "Adjust ARB Sequence Length".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SLENgth on page 413
Adjust ARB Sequence Length - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SLENgth:​ADJust
on page 413
HARQ-ACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI.
The processing of HS-DPCCH is defined for four different cases (see table).
Mode
MIMO Mode
Secondary Cell
Active
Comment
Normal operation
Off
Off
-
MIMO only
On
Off
see chapter 3.14.5, "MIMO uplink control channel
support", on page 32
DC-HSDPA only
Off
On
see chapter 3.15.1, "DC-HSDPA Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO mode)", on page 36
DC-HSDPA +MIMO
On
On
see chapter 3.15.2, "DC-HSDPA + MIMO",
on page 38
"DTX"
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other parameters
in the feedback signaling table are disabled.
"A, N"
Selects an ACK or NACK response to a single scheduled transport block.
"AA, AN, NA,
NN"
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Active Off)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks, i.e. feedback on
the primary and secondary stream in a dual stream transmission.
"A/D, N/A, … (MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active On)
(different com- Selects the response to a single scheduled transport block on each of
binations possi- the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells. (The feedback related to the serving HS-DSCH cell is given before the divider sign.)
ble)"
D means no transmission (DRX), i.e. during that TTI no transport block
is sent for the corresponding HS-DSCH cell.
"AN/NN, D/AA,
… (different
combinations
possible)"
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks on each of the
serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
D means no transmission (DRX), i.e. during that TTI no transport block
is sent for the corresponding HS-DSCH cell.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
189
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
"PRE, POST"
PRE or POST issent in the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​HACK
on page 415
Power Offset HARQ-ACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset of a HARQ-ACK response relative to the Power.
The power used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PHARQ-ACK = Power + Poff_HARQ-ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
The parameter is enabled for HARQ-ACK different than DTX.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​POHAck
on page 417
CQI Type - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the type of the CQI report (see CQI Reports: Type A and Type B and CQI reports:
CQI1 and CQI2).
The available values depend on the state of the parameters "MIMO Mode" and "Secondary Cell Active".
"DTX"
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other parameters
in the feedback signaling table are disabled.
"CQI"
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active Off)
Selects CQI report for the normal operation.
"Type A Single (MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 1 transport block is preTB"
ferred.
"Type A Double (MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 2 transport blocks are
TB"
preferred.
"Type B"
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type B report.
"Composite
CQI"
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects a Composite CQI, constructed from the two individual reports
CQI1 and CQI2 of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cell.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​CQIType
on page 414
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2 - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI (see
chapter 3.14.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type B", on page 34 and chapter 3.15.1.1,
"CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2", on page 37).
"CQI"
Sets the CQI value for CQI Type B report and the CQI in normal operation.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
190
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
"CQIS"
Sets the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when one transport block
is preferred.
"CQI1"
Sets the CQI1 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred or the CQI1 value of a composite CQI report of a dual cell only
operation.
"CQI2"
Sets the CQI2 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred or the CQI2 value of a composite CQI report of a dual cell only
operation.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​CQI<di>
on page 413
PCI - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI (see
PCI reports).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​PCI
on page 417
Power Offset PCI/CQI - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_PCI/CQI of the PCI/CQI slots relative to the Power.
The power PPCI/CQI used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PPCI/CQI = Power + Poff_PCI/CQI
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​POPCqi
on page 417
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
191
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
4.32.3 HS-DPCCH Setings for Normal Operation (Up to Release 7)
This section lists the settings enabled for backwards compability.
Power Offset ACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK of an ACK response to a single scheduled transport block
relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK used during the HARQ-ACK slot is calculated as:
PACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POACk on page 411
Power Offset NACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK of an NACK response to a single scheduled transport
block relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK used during the HARQ-ACK slot is calculated as:
PNACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​PONAck on page 411
ACK/NACK Pattern - HS-DPCCH - UE
(available for "MIMO Mode" set to Off only)
Enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement).
After receiving a transmission packet, the user equipment returns feedback information
in the HARQ-ACK field that is related to the accuracy of downlink HS-DSCH transmission.
One bit is used per HS-DPCCH packet. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
192
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
""1" = ACK"
The HARQ ACK is sent. Transmission was successful and correct.
""0" = NACK"
The NACK is not sent. Transmission was not correct. With an NACK, the
UE requests retransmission of the incorrect data.
""-" = DTX"
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​HAPattern on page 405
CQI Pattern Length - HS-DPCCH - UE
(available for "MIMO Mode" set to Off only)
Sets the length of the CQI sequence. The values of the CQI sequence are entered in
input fields "CQI Values". The pattern is generated cyclically.
With the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), the user equipment informs the base station
about the receive quality of the downlink HS-PDSCH.
Thus, the base station can adapt the modulation and coding scheme to improve the signal
quality. The R&S Signal Generator supports the control of the base station HS-PDSCH
by CQI sequences with a length of 1 to 10 values.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CQI:​PLENgth
on page 405
CQI Values - HS-DPCCH - UE
(available for MIMO Mode set to Off only)
Enters the values of the CQI sequence. Value -1 means that no CQI is sent (DTX).
The length of the CQI sequence is set at input field CQI Length. The pattern is generated
cyclically.
With the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), the user equipment informs the base station
about the receive quality of the downlink HS-PDSCH. Thus, the base station can adapt
the modulation and coding scheme to improve the signal quality. The R&S Signal Generator supports the control of the base station HS-PDSCH by CQI sequences with a
length of 1 to 10 values.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CQI<si>[:​VALues]
on page 405
MIMO Mode (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
(enabled for configuration for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 only)
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
When MIMO mode is enabled, the parameters ACK/NACK Pattern, CQI Pattern Length
and CQI Values are not available. Several MIMO specific parameters are enabled for
configuration (see chapter 4.32.4, "MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to Release 7)",
on page 194s).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO[:​MODE]
on page 411
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
193
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
4.32.4 MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to Release 7)
MIMO settings are available for configuration only for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMx/AMU-K59 and enabled parameter "MIMO Mode".
The MIMO settings available in this dialog allow you to adjust the HS-DPCCH settings
for UE configured in MIMO mode.
The HS-DPCCH structure can be configured with the parameters Inter TTI Distance and
Number of TTI's, as well as by configuring the HARQ-ACK and CQI/PCI information per
TTI by means of the parameters of the uplink feedback signaling table. Any combination
of single or dual transport block HARQ-ACK, PCI value, CQI Type and corresponding
CQI value(s), as well as channel power can be configured.
Power Offset ACK/ACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/ACK of an ACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POAAck
on page 406
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
194
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Power Offset ACK/NACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/NACK of an ACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POANack
on page 406
Power Offset NACK/ACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/ACK of an NACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​PONAck
on page 407
Power Offset NACK/NACK - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/NACK of an NACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​PONNack
on page 408
Power Offset CQI Type A - HS-DPCCH - UE
Sets the power offset Poff_CQI Type A of the PCI/CQI slots in case a CQI Type A report is
sent relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PCQI Type A used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PCQI Type A = PCQI + Poff_CQI Type A
Since the CQI Type B reports are used in a single stream transmission (see chapter 3.14.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type B", on page 34), the power PCQI Type B = PCQI.
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​
CQIType on page 409
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POCA on page 407
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
195
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Number of TTI's (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the number of configurable TTI's.
This parameter determines the number of the rows in the uplink feedback signaling table.
Each row represents one TTI.The parameters set in the table are read out cyclically.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTICount
on page 410
HARQ-ACK (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI
(see chapter 3.14.5, "MIMO uplink control channel support", on page 32).
"DTX"
Selects Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) for the corresponding TTI.
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other parameters
in the feedback signaling table are disabled.
Selects an ACK or NACK response to a single scheduled transport block.
"Single TB:
ACK/Single TB:
NACK"
"TB1:ACK,TB2: Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks.
ACK /
TB1:ACK,TB2:
NACK /
TB1:NACK,TB2
:ACK /
TB1:NACK,TB2
:NACK"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​HACK
on page 410
PCI (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI (see
chapter 3.14.7, "PCI reports", on page 34).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​PCI
on page 410
CQI Type (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the type of the CQI report (see chapter 3.14.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type
B", on page 34).
"Type A Single Selects CQI Type A report with information that 1 transport block is preferred.
TB"
"Type A Double Selects CQI Type A report with information that 2 transport blocks are
preferred.
TB"
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
196
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
"Type B"
Selects CQI Type B report.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​
CQIType on page 409
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2 (Up to Release 7) - HS-DPCCH - UE
Selects the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI (see
chapter 3.14.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type B", on page 34).
Remote-control command: TB 5
"CQI"
Sets the CQI value for CQI Type B report.
"CQIS"
Sets the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when 1 transport block
is preffered.
"CQI1"
Sets the CQI1 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preffered.
"CQI2"
Sets the CQI2 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preffered.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​
CQI<di> on page 408
4.33 DPDCH Settings - UE
The "DPDCH Settings" section is where the settings are made for the DPDCH channels.
This section is only available if "DPCCH + DPDCH" mode is activated (see also chapter 4.30, "DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 176).
The "Channel Table" section is where the channel table for the DPDCH channels is displayed. The number of active channels depends on the overall symbol rate set. The data
sources for the data part of the individual channels can be selected in the channel table.
The remaining parameters are only displayed and their value depends on the overall
symbol rate set.
When user equipment 1 (UE1) is selected, the DPCCH, up to one DPCH and the HSDPCCH channels are generated in realtime (realtime; enhanced).
The "Global Enhanced Channels" button leads to a sub-menu for configuring the
enhanced parameters.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
197
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
4.33.1 DPCCH Settings
State - DPDCH UE
Activates or deactivates all the DPDCH channels.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​STATe on page 426
Channel Power - DPDCH UE
Sets the channel power in dB.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the LEVEL power display. If "Adjust Total Power to 0dB" on page 51 is executed
(top level of the 3GPP FDD menu), all the power data is relative to LEVEL.
Note: The uplink channels are not blanked in this mode (duty cycle 100%).
Test cases defined in the 3GPP standard often use notation "Signalling values for βc and
βd". The quantization of the gain parameters is shown in the following table which is taken
from 3GPP Spec 25.213 (left columns) and supplemented by the instrument-specific
values (right column).
Signalling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set for R&S Signal
Generator / dB
15
1.0
0.0
14
14/15
-0.60
13
13/15
-1.24
12
12/15
-1.94
11
11/15
-2.69
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
198
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
Signalling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set for R&S Signal
Generator / dB
10
10/15
-3.52
9
9/15
-4.44
8
8/15
-5.46
7
7/15
-6.62
6
6/15
-7.96
5
5/15
-9.54
4
4/15
-11.48
3
3/15
-13.99
2
2/15
-17.52
1
1/15
-23.52
0
Switch off
Switch channel off or -80 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​POWer on page 426
Force Channelization Code To I/0- DPDCH UE
Sets the channelization code to I/0.
This mode can only be activated if the overall symbol rate is < 2 x 960 kbps.
It is provided for test purposes. Using an oscilloscope, the control and data bits of the
DPDCH are visible on the I/Q signal if:
● Force Channelization Code to I/Q is On
● Scrambling Code Mode is set to Off.
● DPCCH power is - 80 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​FCIO on page 425
Overall Symbol Rate - DPDCH UE
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the DPDCH channels.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and which
channelization codes they use (see table 4-11).
DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate are also disabled for operation.
Note: Up to an overall rate of 960 ksps, only DPDCH 1 is active, its symbol rate is the
same as the overall symbol rate and the channelization code is the same as spreading
factor/4 (spreading factor = chip rate / symbol rate). With an overall symbol rate greater
than 960 ksps, all the active DPDCH channels have the symbol rate 960 ksps.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​ORATe on page 425
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
199
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
4.33.2 Structure of the DPDCH Channel Table
Table 4-11: Structure of the DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate
Overall Sym- DPDCH 1
bol Rate
DPDCH 2
DPDCH 3
DPDCH 4
DPDCH 5
DPDCH 6
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
I
Q
15 ksps
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 15k
Ch. Code: 64
30 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 30k
Ch. Code: 32
60 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 60k
Ch. Code: 16
120 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 120k
Ch. Code: 8
240 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 240k
Ch. Code: 4
480 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 480k
Ch. Code: 2
960 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 960 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k
3 x 960 ksps
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k
4 x 960 ksps
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k
Ch. Code: 1
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
200
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
Overall Sym- DPDCH 1
bol Rate
DPDCH 2
DPDCH 3
DPDCH 4
DPDCH 5
DPDCH 6
5 x 960 ksps
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k
6 x 960 ksps
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 2
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k S-Rate: 960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
Global Enhanced Channels... - DPDCH UE
Calls the menu for configuring all the enhanced channel settings of user equipment UE1.
The menu is described in chapter 4.36, "Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1",
on page 218.
SCPI command:
n.a.
4.33.3 Channel Table
The "Channel Table" section is where the channel table for the DPDCH channels is displayed. The number of active channels depends on the overall symbol rate set. The data
sources for the data part of the individual channels can be selected in the channel table.
The remaining parameters are only displayed and their value depends on the overall
symbol rate set.
Channel Type - DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channel type.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channel Number - DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channel number.
SCPI command:
n.a.
(the channel is selected by the suffix at keyword CHANnel<n>)
Symbol Rate - DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the symbol rate and the state of the DCDCH channel.
The symbol rate and the state of channel 2 to 6 are dependent on the overall symbol rate
set and cannot be modified.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​SRATe
on page 425
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
201
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
DPDCH Settings - UE
Channelization Code - DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPDCH
channel.
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​CCODe
on page 423
DPDCH - DTCH Data - DPDCH Channel UE
(UE2..UE4; UE1 without channel coding)
DPDCH / DTCH
(UE1 with channel coding)
Selects the data source for the DPDCH channel.
When the selection is UE2 ... UE4, the data source for the DPDCH is always entered
here.
The data source for the DPDCH is also entered here for the enhanced channels of UE1
without channel coding.
When channel coding is active, the data source for the DTCH1 component in the transport
layer is selected here. In this situation, the display reads "DPDCH / DTCH" and the
"DCCH Data" entry field is enabled for selecting the data source of the DCCH channel.
The data sources of the other DTCH channels can be set in the Global "Enhanced Channel Settings in the Transport Channel section" sub-menu, see chapter 4.36, "Global
Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1", on page 218.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" entry field.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
202
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
"Data List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by
means of the Select Data List button.
The "File Manager" is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S
Signal Generator, and can be called within every File Select window by
means of the "File Manager" button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA
on page 424
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​
PATTern on page 425
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA:​DSELect on page 445
4.34 E-DPDCH Settings - UE
This section is only available if DPCCH + DPDCH mode is activated (see also chapter 4.30, "DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 176).
The "Channel Table" section is where the channel table for the E-DPDCH channels is
displayed. The number of active channels depends on the overall symbol rate set. The
data sources for the data part of the individual channels can be selected in the channel
table. The remaining parameters are only displayed and their value depends on the
overall symbol rate set.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
203
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
4.34.1 E-DPDCH Settings
State - E-DPDCH UE
Activates or deactivates all the E-DPDCH channels.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is activated automatically.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​STATe
on page 460
Force Channelization Code To I/0 - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the channelization code to I/0.
This mode can only be activated if the overall symbol rate is less than 2 x 960 kbps.
It is provided for test purposes. Using an oscilloscope, the control and data bits of the EDPDCH are visible on the I/Q signal if:
● Force Channelization Code to I/0 is On
● Scrambling Code Mode is set to Off.
● E-DPDCH power is - 80 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​FCIO
on page 459
Overall Symbol Rate - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the E-DPDCH channels.
The structure of the E-DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall
symbol rate determines which E-DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and
which channelization codes they use (see table 4-12).
E-DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate are also disabled for operation.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​ORATe
on page 460
Modulation - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the modulation of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified for this channel, BPSK and 4PAM
(4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for the following Overall
Symbol Rates:
● 2x960 ksps
● 2x1920 ksps
● 2x960 + 2x1920 ksps.
Note: Modulation scheme 4PAM is available only for instruments equipped with the
HSPA+ option SMx-K59.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​MODulation
on page 459
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
204
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
E-DCH TTI - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​TTIEdch
on page 460
Use (DTX) - DPDCH UE
Activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​DTX:​STATe
on page 459
DTX Pattern (bin) - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximum length is 64 bits. The following values are
allowed:
1: Data transmission
-: DTX
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​DTX:​PATTern
on page 458
4.34.2 Structure of the E-DPDCH Channel Table
Table 4-12: Structure of the E-DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate and no
DPDCH active
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
15 Ksps
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 15 k
Ch. Code: 64
30 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 30 k
Ch. Code: 32
60 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 60 k
Ch. Code: 16
120 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 120 k
Ch. Code: 8
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
205
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
240 ksps
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
S-Rate: 240 k
Ch. Code: 4
480 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 480 k
Ch. Code: 2
960 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 960 ksps
2 x1920 ksps
2 x 960 ksps + 2 x
1920 ksps
Table 4-13: Structure of the E-DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate and one
DPDCH active
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
Active HSDPCCH?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Q
I
I
Q
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
I or Q branch
15 ksps
30 ksps
60 ksps
120 ksps
S-Rate: 15 k
S-Rate: 15 k
Ch. Code: 128
Ch. Code: 128
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 30 k
S-Rate: 30 k
Ch. Code: 64
Ch. Code: 64
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 60 k
S-Rate: 60 k
Ch. Code: 32
Ch. Code: 32
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 120 k
S-Rate: 120 k
Ch. Code: 16
Ch. Code: 16
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
206
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
Active HSDPCCH?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Q
I
I
Q
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
I or Q branch
240 ksps
480 ksps
960 ksps
2 x 960 ksps
2 x1920 ksps
S-Rate: 240 k
S-Rate: 240 k
Ch. Code: 8
Ch. Code: 8
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 480 k
S-Rate: 480 k
Ch. Code: 4
Ch. Code: 4
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
4.34.3 Channel Table
The "Channel Table" section is where the channel table for the E-DPDCH channels is
displayed. The number of active channels depends on the overall symbol rate set. The
data sources for the data part of the individual channels can be selected in the channel
table. The remaining parameters are only displayed and their value depends on the
overall symbol rate set.
Channel Type - E-DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channel type.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Channel Number - E-DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channel number.
SCPI command:
n.a.
(the channel is selected by the suffix at keyword CHANnel<n>)
Symbol Rate - E-DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the symbol rate and the state of the E-DCDCH channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
207
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
The symbol rate and the state of channel 2 to 6 are dependent on the overall symbol rate
set and cannot be modified.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
SRATe on page 446
Channelization Code - E-DPDCH Channel UE
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPDCH
channel.
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
CCODe on page 444
Channel Power - E-DPDCH UE
Sets the power of the selected E-DPDCH channel (and all the other currently active
channels).
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the LEVEL power display. If "Adjust Total Power to 0dB" on page 51 is executed
(top level of the 3GPP FDD menu), all the power data is relative to LEVEL.
Note: The uplink channels are not blanked in this mode (duty cycle 100%). Exception:
The DTX mode is set to ON.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
POWer on page 446
E-DPDCH Data Source - E-DPDCH Channel UE
(UE2...UE4; UE1 without channel coding)
DPDCH / DTCH
(UE1 with channel coding)
Selects the data source for the E-DPDCH channel.
When the selection is UE2 ... UE4, the data source for the E-DPDCH is always entered
here.
The data source for the DPDCH is also entered here for the enhanced channels of UE1
without channel coding.
When channel coding is active, the data source for the DTCH1 component in the transport
layer is selected here. In this situation, the display reads "DPDCH / DTCH" and the
"DCCH Data" entry field is enabled for selecting the data source of the DCCH channel.
The data sources of the other DTCH channels can be set in the "Global Enhanced Channel Settings in the Transport Channel section" submenu, see chapter 4.36, "Global
Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1", on page 218.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
208
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" entry field.
"Data List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the File Select window, which is called by means
of the Select Data List button.
The File Manager is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S Signal
Generator, and can be called within every File Select window by means
of the File Manager button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA on page 445
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA:​PATTern on page 446
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA:​DSELect on page 445
4.35 HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
The HSUPA FRC Settings menu is where the settings for the fixed reference channel
(FRC) and the settings for the HARQ simulation are made.
For more information, see also chapter 3.11, "HARQ Feedback", on page 24 and chapter 3.13.4, "16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8", on page 29.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
209
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
210
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
4.35.1 FRC General Settings
State – HSUPA FRC
Activates or deactivates the FRC state for the E-DCH channels.
If FRC is activated, the channels E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH are automatically activated.
The following parameters of these channels are set automatically, depending on the
configured FRC:
●
●
for E-DPCCH:
– E-DCH TTI is set according to the E-DCH TTI of the selected FRC
"Retransmission Sequence Number" is set to 0
"E-TFCI"
For E-DPDCH:
– E-DCH TTI is set according to the E-DCH TTI of the selected FRC
Overall Symbol Rate is set according to the correspondent parameter of FRC.
The "Modulation" is set according to the "Modulation" used for the selected FRC.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
211
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
The E-DPDCH Data Source is set according to the Data Source (E-DCH) used
for the selected FRC.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​STATe
on page 455
Fixed Reference Channel (FRC) - HSUPA FRC
Selects the FRC according to TS 25.141 Annex A.10.
Additionally, user defined FRC can be configured.
FRC8 is available only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K59.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​CHANnel
on page 447
Maximum Information Bitrate/kbps – HSUPA FRC
Displays the maximum information bit rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​MIBRate
on page 453
UE Category - HSUPA FRC
Displays the UE category that is minimum required for the selected FRC (see also chapter 3.16.2, "UL 16QAM UE Capabilities", on page 39).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​
UECategory on page 457
4.35.2 Coding And Physical Channels
Data Source (E-DCH) – HSUPA FRC
Selects the data source for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this paramter affects the corresponding paramter of the E-DPDCH.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the Pattern entry field.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
212
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
"Data List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the File Select window, which is called by means
of the "Select Data List" button.
The File Manager is used to transmit external data lists to the R&S Signal
Generator, and can be called within every File Select window by means
of the File Manager button.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA
on page 448
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​
PATTern on page 449
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​
DSELect on page 448
Overall Symbol Rate - HSUPA FRC
Sets the overall symbol rate for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this parameter affects the corresponding parameter of the E-DPDCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​ORATe
on page 454
Modulation - HSUPA FRC
Sets the modulation of the FRC, i.e. this parameter affects the corresponding parameter
of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified, BPSK and 4PAM (4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for the following Overall Symbol
Rates:
● 2x960 ksps
● 2x1920 ksps
● 2x960 + 2x1920 ksps.
Note: Modulation scheme 4PAM is available only for instruments equipped with the
HSPA+ option R&S SMx/AMU-K59.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​
MODulation on page 454
E-DCH TTI - HSUPA FRC
Sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval) for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this
parameter affects the corresponding parameter of the channels E-DPDCH and EDPCCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TTIEdch
on page 456
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
213
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Number Of HARQ Processes - HSUPA FRC
Displays the number of HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement) processes. This value
determines the distribution of the payload in the subframes.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​
HPROcesses on page 453
Transport Block Size Table - HSUPA FRC
Selects the Transport Block Size Table from 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B according to that
the transport block size is configured.
The transport block size is determined also by the parameter "Transport Block Size
Index".
The allowed values of this parameter depend on the selected "E-DCH TTI" and "Modulation" scheme.
E-DCH TTI
Modulation
Transport Block Size
Table
Transport Block Size
Index (E-TFCI)
2 ms
BPSK
Table 0
0 .. 127
Table 1
0 .. 125
Table 2
0 .. 127
Table 3
0 .. 124
Table 0
0 .. 127
Table 1
0 .. 120
4PAM
10 ms
-
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​
TABLe on page 455
Transport Block Size Index - HSUPA FRC
Selects the Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI) for the corresponding table, as described
in in 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B.
The value range of this parameter depends on the selected "Transport Block Size
Table".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​
INDex on page 455
Information Bit Payload (Ninf) - HSUPA FRC
Displays the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number of transport
layer bits sent in each HARQ process.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​PAYBits
on page 454
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
214
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Coding Rate (Ninf/Nbin) - HSUPA FRC
Displays the relation between the information bits to binary channel bits.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​CRATe
on page 447
4.35.3 DTX Mode
State (DTX) - HSUPA FRC
Activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
Note: If activated, this setting is also set in the E-DPDCH Settings and E-DPCCH Settings
menu. The settings in the menus will be overwritten.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​
STATe on page 450
User Data (DTX Pattern) - HSUPA FRC
Sets user-definable the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximum length is 64 bits.
The following values are allowed:
● 1: Data transmission
● -: DTX
Note: This setting will overwrite the DTX pattern settings in the E-DPCCH Settings and
E-DPDCH Settings menu.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​
PATTern on page 450
4.35.4 HARQ Simulation
This section describes the HARQ settings.
R&S SMBV instruments do not support HARQ Mode HARQ Feedback.
State (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
Activates or deactivates the HARQ simulation mode.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation[:​STATe] on page 453
Mode (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
Selects the HARQ simulation mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
215
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
"Virtual HARQ" This mode simulates basestation feedback. For every HARQ process
(either 4 or 8), a bit pattern can be defined to simulate ACKs and NACKs.
"HARQ Feed- (not for R&S SMBV instruments)
This mode allows the user to dynamically control the transmission of the
back"
HSUPA fixed reference channels. An "ACK" from the base station leads
to the transmission of a new packet while a "NACK" forces the instrument
to retransmit the packet with a new channel coding configuration (i.e. new
"redundancy version") of the concerned HARQ process.
For further information, see chapter 3.11, "HARQ Feedback",
on page 24.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​MODE on page 452
Always Use Redundancy Version 0 (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
If activated, the same redundancy version is sent, that is, the redundancy version is not
adjusted for the next retransmission in case of a received NACK.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​RVZero on page 452
Maximum Number Of Retransmissions (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
("HARQ mode HARQ Feedback" only)
Sets the maximum number of retransmissions. After the expiration of this value, the next
packet is sent, regardless of the received feedback.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​MRETransmissions on page 452
ACK Definition (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
("HARQ mode HARQ Feedback" only)
Selects whether a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK or a low level.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​ADEFinition on page 451
Delay Between HARQ And Feedback (HARQ) - HSUPA FRC
(HARQ mode HARQ Feedback only)
Displays the time between the start of the HARQ process and the start of the related
feedback.
For further information, see chapter 3.11, "HARQ Feedback", on page 24.
SCPI command:
Additional User Delay - HSUPA FRC
("HARQ mode HARQ Feedback "only)
Sets an additional delay to adjust the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
216
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
For further information, see chapter 3.11, "HARQ Feedback", on page 24.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​DELay:​AUSer on page 451
HARQ1..8: ACK/NACK - HSUPA FRC
(HARQ mode Virtual HARQ only)
Enters the pattern for the HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement).
The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
""1" = ACK"
New data is transmitted and the RSN (Retransmission Sequences Number) is set to 0.
""0" = NACK"
The data is retransmitted and the RSN is increased with 1.
The maximum value of RSN is 3, i.e. even if more than 3 retransmissions
are configured, the RSN remains 3.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ[:​
SIMulation]:​PATTern<ch> on page 453
4.35.5 Bit and Block Error Insertion
Bit Error State - HSUPA FRC
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel coding
is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or
transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BIT:​STATe on page 449
Bit Error Rate - HSUPA FRC
Sets the bit error rate. The value range is 10E-1 to 10E-7.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BIT:​RATE on page 449
Insert Errors On - HSUPA FRC
Selects the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
This selection is only available when channel coding is active.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
217
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
"Physical layer" Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BIT:​LAYer on page 449
Block Error State - HSUPA FRC
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​STATe on page 450
Block Error Rate - HSUPA FRC
Sets block error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​RATE on page 450
4.36 Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
The "Global Enhanced Settings" menu can also be called in the UE1 "User Equipment
Configuration" menu by using the "Global Enhanced Settings" button located in section
DPDCH Settings.
This menu is only available for user equipment 1 (UE1).
The upper section is where the enhanced state of all the UE1 channels is displayed.
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made. You can
choose between a reduced display, where it is only possible to select the coding scheme,
and a display with detailed setting options. The "Transport Channel" section for detailed
settings can be revealed with the "Show Details" button and hidden with the "Hide
Details" button.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
218
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
The "Bit Error Insertion" section is where the bit error simulation is configured and activated.
The "Block Error Insertion" section is where the block error simulation is configured and
activated.
In the "Dynamic Power Control" section, the power of the enhanced channels can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an external, internal or
manual control signal.
4.36.1 Enhanced Channels State
Enhanced Channels State - UE 1
Displays the enhanced state of the DPCCH channel, the first DPDCH channel and the
HS-DPCCH.
These channels of user equipment 1 are always generated in the enhanced state, i.e. in
realtime.
It is possible to activate channel coding and simulate bit and block errors. Data lists, for
example with user data for the transport layer, can be used as the data source.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​STATe on page 473
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
219
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
4.36.2 Channel Coding - DPDCH Enhanced UE 1
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made. You can
choose between a reduced display and the detailed setting options display. With the
reduced display, it is only possible to select the coding scheme and this selection sets
the associated parameters to the presetting prescribed in the standard. The "Transport
Channel" section for detailed setting and for defining a user coding can be revealed with
the "Show Details" button and hidden with the "Hide Details" button.
An uplink reference measurement channel according to 3GPP TS 25.141 is generated
when the transport channels DTCH (Dedicated Traffic Channel) and DCCH (Dedicated
Control Channel) , which contain the user data, are mapped to a DPDCH (Dedicated
Physical Data Channel) with a different data rate after channel coding and multiplexing.
The display below is taken from the standard (TS 25.141) and shows in diagrammatic
form the generation of a 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel from the DTCH and
DCCH transport channels.
Fig. 4-21: Channel coding of the 12.2 kbps reference measurement channels (uplink)
Channel Coding State - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
Note: Annex A.1, 3GPP TS 25.141, lists the recommended DPCCH-settings.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​STATe
on page 464
Coding Type - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Selects channel coding.
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate bit to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The
additional AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
220
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
"User" coding can be defined as required in the detailed coding settings menu section
revealed with button "Show Details". They can be stored and loaded in the "User Coding" submenu. Selection "User" is indicated as soon as a coding parameter is modified
after selecting a predefined coding type.
The input data bits are taken from the data source specified for the "Transport Channels" for channel coding. The bits are available with a higher rate at the channel coding
output. The allocations between the measurement input data bit rate and the output
symbol rate are fixed, that is to say, the overall symbol rate is adjusted automatically.
The following are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2
kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144
kbps"
144 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 384
kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2
kbps"
Channel coding for the AMR coder
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​TYPE
on page 465
Show Details - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Reveals the detailed setting options for channel coding.
Available as well as the "Transport Channel" section are the "Overall Symbol Rate" and
Bits "per Frame" parameters as well as the "User Coding" button.
Once the details are revealed, the labeling on the button changes to "Hide Details". Use
this to hide the detailed setting options display again.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
221
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
SCPI command:
n.a.
User Coding ... - DPDCH Enhanced UE
Calls the "User Coding "menu.
From the "User Coding" menu the "File Select" windows for saving and recalling userdefined channel coding and the "File Manager" can be called.
User coding of UE1 are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.
3g_ccod_ul. The file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable; the
file extension is assigned automatically.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
222
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
The complete channel coding settings in the menu section "Show Details" are saved and
recalled.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
CATalog on page 465
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
DELete on page 466
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​LOAD
on page 466
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
STORe on page 467
Overall Symbol Rate - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the DPDCHs.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and which
channelization codes they use.
DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate, are also disabled for operation.
Note: Up to an overall rate of 960 ksps, only DPDCH 1 is active, its symbol rate is the
same as the overall rate and the channelization code is the same as spreading factor/4
(spreading factor = chip rate / symbol rate). With an overall symbol rate greater than 960
ksps, all the active DPDCHs have the symbol rate 960 ksps.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​ORATe on page 473
Bits per Frame (DPDCH) - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Displays the data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame at physical level. The value
depends on the overall symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​BPFRame on page 464
4.36.3 Transport Channel - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
In the "Transport Channel" section, up to 7 transport channels (TCHs) can be configured.
The first one is always a DCCH; the other six are DTCHs (DTCH1 to 6). The most important parameters of the TCH are displayed (data source and transport block size). The
associated parameters shown in the section below depend on which TCH is currently
selected.
A wide arrow beneath the block indicates which TCH is currently selected.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
223
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Transport Channel State - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates the transport channel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
STATe on page 473
In case of remote control, DCCH corresponds to :​TCHannel0, DTCH1 to :​
TCHannel1, etc.
Data Source TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
The data source for the DCCH and DTCH1 can also be selected in the main menu in the
channel table.
The following are available for selection as data sources:
"All 0, All1"
0 data and 1 data are generated internally.
"PN xx"
PRBS data as per CCITT with period lengths between 29-1 and 223-1 is
generated internally.
"Pattern"
A user-definable bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits is generated
internally.
The bit pattern is defined in the "Data Pattern" entry field.
"Data List,
Select Data
List"
Internal data from a programmable data list generated with the Data Editor or externally, is used.
Data lists are selected in the "Select Data List" field.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA
on page 475
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
DATA:​PATTern on page 476
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
DATA:​DSELect on page 475
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
224
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Transport Time Interval TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
TTINterval on page 474
Number of Transport Blocks TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the number of transport blocks for the TCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
TBCount on page 474
Transport Block Size TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
TBSize on page 474
Size of CRC TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Defines the type (length) of the CRC. Checksum determination can also be deactivated
(setting None).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
CRCSize on page 475
Rate Matching Attribute TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
RMATtribute on page 473
Error Protection TCH- Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Selects error protection.
"None"
No error protection
"Turbo 1/3"
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
"Conv 1/2 | 1/3" Convolution Coder of rate 1/2 or 1/3 with generator polynomials defined
by 3GPP.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
EPRotection on page 476
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
225
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Interleaver 1 State TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 of the transport channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be set independently in each TCH. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
INTerleaver on page 477
Interleaver 2 State TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 of all the transport channels.
Interleaver state 2 can only be set for all the TCHs together. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​INTerleaver2
on page 472
4.36.4 Error Insertion - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
In the "Bit Error Insertion" and "Block Error Insertion" sections, errors can be inserted into
the data source and into the CRC checksum, in order, for example, to check the bit and
block error rate testers.
Bit Error State - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel coding
is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or
transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​STATe
on page 468
Bit Error Rate TCH - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the bit error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​RATE
on page 467
Insert Errors On - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
This layer is only available when channel coding is active.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
226
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
"Physical layer" Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer
on page 467
Block Error State - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Block error generation is only available when channel coding is active.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​STATe
on page 468
Block Error Rate - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Sets the block error rate.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE
on page 468
4.36.5 Dynamic Power Control - DPDCH Enhanced User Equipment
In the "Dynamic Power Control" section of menu "Enhanced Settings", the power of the
enhanced channels can be increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range
"(Up Range" + "Down Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an
external, internal or manual control signal.
Dynamic Power Control State - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Activates or deactivates the "Dynamic Power Control".
With activated "Dynamic Power Control" the power of the enhanced channels can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an external control signal.
The external control signal has to be supplied via the LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O
connector.
Note: The R&S SMBV does not support externally provided control signals.
For two-path instruments, the external control signal has to be supplied via the LEV ATT
input of the AUX I/O connector (path A) or via one of the USER interfaces (path B).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STATe
on page 470
Mode - Enhanced DPDCH UE1
Selects the control signal for "Dynamic Power Control".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
227
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
"External"
(the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV)
An external control signal is used for Dynamic Power Control. The external control signal is supplied via the LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O.
For two-path instruments, the external control signal is supplied via the
LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O connector (path A) or via one of the USER
interfaces (path B).
"By TPC Pattern"
The TPC pattern is used for Dynamic Power Control. This selection corresponds to selection (Mis)Use TPC for not enhanced channels.
"Manual"
TThe control signal is manually produced by pushing one of the buttons
0 or 1.
The channel power is increased or decreased depending on the Direction
setting by the set power step.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​MODE
on page 469
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STEP:​
MANual on page 470
Direction - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
Selects the Dynamic Power Control mode.
"Up"
A high level of the control signal leads to an increase of channel power.
"Down"
A high level of the control signal leads to a decrease of channel power.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​
DIRection on page 469
Power Step - DPDCH Enhanced UE
Sets step width by which – with the "Dynamic Power Control" being switched on - the
channel powers of the enhanced channels in the timeslot grid are increased or decreased
within the set dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range").
The start power of the channel is set in the "Channel Power" entry field of the menu.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STEP[:​
EXTernal] on page 471
Up Range - DPDCH Enhanced UE
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel
powers of the enhanced channels can be increased. The resulting "Dynamic Power Control" dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") may be 30 dB at max.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​RANGe:​
UP on page 470
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
228
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
User Interface
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Down Range - DPDCH Enhanced UE
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel
powers of the enhanced channels can be decreased. The resulting "Dynamic Power
Control" dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") may be 30 dB at max.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​RANGe:​
DOWN on page 470
Power Control Graph - DPDCH Enhanced UE
Indicates the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power start value
of the enhanced channels.
The graph is automatically displayed with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on.
Note: Since a realtime update of the window in the timeslot (= 0.667 ms) is not possible
for reasons of speed, an update can be performed in a more coarse time interval. Fast
channel power changes are not displayed but the settled state of the control loop can be
recognized very easily.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl[:​POWer]
on page 472
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
229
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
5 Tests Case Wizard
This chapter describes the "Test Case Wizard", provided for tests on Base Stations in
Conformance with the 3G Standard 3GPP FDD.
Test Case Wizard is supported only by R&S SMU and R&S SMATE.
The following chapters describe the full functionality of the Test Case Wizard. Some of
them require a Fading Simulator and hence are not supported by the R&S SMATE.
Expect as noted otherwise, the screenshots, pictures and figures in this chapter show an
R&S SMU.
5.1 Introduction
The Test Case Wizard supports tests on base stations in conformance with the 3G
Standard 3GPP-FDD. It offers a selection of predefined settings according to Test Cases
in TS 25.141.
The basic equipment layout for the test is the same as for the 3GPP FDD signal generation. It includes the options Baseband Main Module (B13), Baseband Generator (B10/
B11) and Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (K42). However, some of the tests require further
options. An overview of the available test cases is given is in "Test Case" on page 234.
The Test Case Wizard has effect on frequency and level settings, link direction, trigger,
baseband clock source, marker settings and base station or user equipment configuration. Besides the 3GPP required settings also interfering signals (AWGN, CW interferer,
co-located modulation signals) or fading profiles are set.
The degree of freedom in setting the parameters can be determined. The "According to
Standard" edit mode allows only settings in compliance with TS 25.141. The "User Definable" edit mode allows a wider range of settings.
The menu for selecting the 3GPP FDD test is either called in 3GPP FDD menu from the
baseband block or from the menu tree under Baseband 3GPP FDD.
Button "Test Case Wizard" opens the menu.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
230
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
The "Test Wizard" dialog is divided into several sections:
At the top of the panel, the test case is selected. In the "General Settings" section the
edit mode and the general signal generator parameters are set.
The base station parameters are input in the "Basestation Configuration" section.
The graph in the right upper section symbolizes the interference scenario defined by
power level and frequency offset.
The middle section depends on the selected test case. It displays the input/output parameters of the wanted and the interfering signals and further configuration entries besides
the default settings.
Button "Apply Settings" activates the preset settings for the selected test case. Further
modification of the generator settings is still possible. Signal generation starts with the
first trigger event.
With the "Test Case Wizard", it is possible to create highly complex test scenarios with
just a few keystrokes, see the following example:
1. Preset the signal generator
2. Call the "Test Case Wizard" menu in the 3GPP menu
3. Choose the desired test case
4. Enter the specific settings for the selected test case , e.g. frequency, level, …
5. Activate the settings using the "Apply Settings" button
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
231
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
6. Switch on RF output and further refine the generator settings if required
7. Start signal generation by a trigger from the base station at connector TRIGGER1.
5.1.1 General Considerations
Test Frequencies
For 3GPP-FDD, several paired frequency bands are used. The following table shows
start and stop frequencies of both uplink (UE transmit, node B receive) and downlink
(node B transmit, UE receive) frequency bands according to 3GPP.
Operating band
Uplink frequencies UE transmit, Downlink frequencies UE
node B receive
receive, node B transmit
I
1920 MHz to 1980 MHz
2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
II
1850 MHz to 1910 MHz
1930 MHz to 1990 MHz
III
1710 MHz to 1785 MHz
1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
IV
1710 MHz to 1755 MHz
2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
V
824 MHz to 849MHz
869 MHz to 894MHz
VI
830 MHz to 840 MHz
875 MHz to 885 MHz
The measurements that have to be performed according to 3GPP in order to verify proper
operation of FDD systems apply to appropriate frequencies in the bottom, middle and top
of the operating frequency band of the base station (BS). These frequencies are denoted
as RF channels B (bottom), M (middle) and T (top).
Reference Frequency
When building up the measurement setups according to TS 25.141 it might be useful that
all the instruments share a common reference clock. However, after "Preset" the signal
generator uses its internal clock reference. In order to feed in the clock of an external
clock the RF module configuration should be switched to external reference frequency.
In the external reference mode an external signal with selectable frequency and defined
level must be input at the REF IN connector . This signal is output at the REF OUT
connector. The reference frequency setting is effective for both paths. For very good
reference sources of high spectral purity a wideband setting is provided.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
232
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
Trigger Signal
For test cases with channel coded signal, e.g. an activated RMC, the base station that
triggers the signal generation must emit an 'SFN (System Frame Number) mod 4' periodic
trigger. A simple SFN periodic trigger probably will disturb the channel coding scheme.
Baseband Clock
The clock source is automatically switched to internal when the test case settings are
activated.
Improvement of signal quality
Improvement of signal quality is possible via several settings:
●
In the "I/Q Settings" menu the internal baseband gain can be set to improved ACLR
performance (3dB or 6 dB)
●
In the "Automatic Level Control Settings" menu the RF output level can be recalibrated with "Search Once" in "Sample&Hold" mode. This is recommended if in CW mode
the signal/intermodulation ratio is to be improved for multi-transmitter measurements.
With setting "Auto", the level control is automatically adapted to the operating conditions, it may cause increased intermodulations, however.
●
In the "User Correction" menu a list of correction values can be created and subsequently activated. Thus, the frequency response of the test setup can be taken into
account .
●
In order to compensate cable loss and additionally inserted attenuators, the RF level
can directly be adjusted in the "Level" input field.
●
Additional settings in the impairments section of the AWGN block
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
233
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
5.1.2 General Settings
In the General Settings section the edit mode and the general signal generator parameters are set.
Test Case
Selects the test case.
The following table gives an overview of the available test cases, the type of signal transmitted by the signal generator and the required additional options besides the basic configuration. An equipment layout as required for 3GPP FDD signal generation for one-path
instruments is assumed to be the basic configuration.
Table 5-1: Transmitter Tests
TS 25.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional options
6.4.2
Power control steps: Out- Uplink
put power dynamics
-
6.6
Transmit intermodulation
Interferer (downlink)
-
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
7.2
Reference sensitivity
level
Uplink
-
7.3
Dynamic range
Uplink,
K62, AWGN
Table 5-2: Receiver Tests
AWGN
7.4
Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
Interferer
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2nd B10, Baseband Generator,
2nd K42, 3GPP FDD
7.5
Blocking characteristics
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
Interferer
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2nd B10, Baseband Generator,
2nd K42, 3GPP FDD
7.6
Intermodulation characteristics
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
2 x Interferer
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2nd B10, Baseband Generator,
2nd K42, 3GPP FDD
K62, AWGN
7.8
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
Verification of the internal Uplink
BER calculation
-
234
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
8.2.1
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
Demodulation in static
propagation conditions:
2x K62, AWGN
Demodulation of DCH
8.3.1
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
Multipath fading case 1
8.3.2
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
Multipath fading case 2
8.3.3
Performance requirement -
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
Multipath fading case 3
8.3.4
Performance requirement -
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
Multipath fading case 4
8.4
Demodulation of DCH in
moving propagation conditions
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
8.5
Demodulation of DCH in
birth/death propagation
conditions
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
8.6
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
Verification of the internal Uplink
BLER calculation
B20x, RF path B
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
235
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
8.8.1
RACH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
RACH preamble detection in static propagation
conditions
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
RACH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
RACH preamble detection in multipath fading
case 3
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
8.8.2
2x K62, AWGN
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
8.8.3
8.8.4
RACH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
Demodulation of RACH
message in static propagation conditions
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
RACH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
Demodulation of RACH
message in multipath
fading case 3
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
CPCH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
CPCH access preamble
and collision detection,
preamble detection in
static propagation conditions
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
CPCH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
CPCH access preamble
and collision detection,
preamble detection in
multipath fading case 3
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
CPCH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
Demodulation of CPCH
message in static propagation conditions
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
CPCH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
Demodulation of CPCH
message in multipath
fading case 3
AWGN
2nd B13, Baseband Main
Module
2x K62, AWGN
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
2x K62, AWGN
Fading
2x K62, AWGN
B14, B15, K71, Fading
Options
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TCASe on page 494
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
236
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
Edit Mode
Selects the edit mode.
"According to
Standard"
Only settings in compliance with TS 25.141 are possible in the wizard
panel.
"User Definable"
A wider range of settings is possible in the wizard panel.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe on page 483
Trigger Configuration
Selects the trigger configuration. The trigger is used to synchronize the signal generator
to the other equipment.
"Auto"
The trigger settings are customized for the selected test case. In most
cases trigger setting "Armed Auto" with external trigger source "External
Trigger 1" is used. Unless otherwise noted the trigger delay is set equal
to zero. Thus, the base station frame timing is able to synchronize the
signal generator by a SFN (System Frame Number) periodic trigger. If
the signal generator offers a channel coded signal (as all the Reference
Measurements Channels require) the base station must emit a 'SFN mod
4' periodic trigger.
"Unchanged"
The current trigger settings of the signal generator are retained
unchanged.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TRIGger on page 495
Marker Configuration
Selects the marker configuration. The marker can be used to synchronize the measuring
equipment to the signal generator.
"Auto"
The marker settings are customized for the selected test case. In most
cases "Radio Frame" markers are output. Unless otherwise noted the
marker delays are set equal to zero.
"Unchanged"
The current marker settings of the signal generator are retained
unchanged.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TRIGger:​OUTPut on page 495
Diversity
Selects the signal routing according to the base station's diversity processing capability.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
237
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
"ON"
The test signal is routed to both RF outputs.
Fig. 5-1: Signal routing R&S SMU
Fig. 5-2: Signal routing R&S SMATE
"Off"
The test signal is routed to the selected RF output.
Fig. 5-3: Signal routing R&S SMU
Fig. 5-4: Signal routing R&S SMATE
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​RXDiversity on page 492
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
238
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Introduction
Baseband A Signal Routing
Selects the signal routing for baseband A signal which in most test cases represents the
wanted signal (exception test case 6.6).
"A"
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output A.
"B"
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output B.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​ROUTe on page 492
5.1.3 Basestation Configuration
The base station parameters are input in the "Basestation Configuration" section.
Scrambling Code (hex)
Enters the scrambling code.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​SCODe on page 493
Scrambling Mode
Sets the type of scrambling code.
With scrambling code, a distinction is made between "Long" and "Short Scrambling
Code" for uplink signals. For downlink signals (test case 6.6) the scrambling code generator can be switched on and off.
"On "
(downlink only)
Enables scrambling code generator.
"Off"
Disables scrambling code generator for test purposes.
"Long Scrambling Code"
(uplink only)
Sets the long scrambling code.
"Short Scram- (uplink only)
Sets short scrambling code.
bling Code"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​SCODe:​MODE on page 493
Power Class
Enters the base station power class. The selected power class determines the output
level of the signal generator. The output level is indicated in the "Wanted Signal" section
of the Wizard panel.
For edit mode "User Definable", the output level can be set in the "Wanted Signal" section
of the Wizard panel.
"Wide Area BS"Enables power class wider area BS
"Medium RangeEnables power class medium range BS
BS"
"Local Area BS"Enables power class local area BS
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSPClass on page 482
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
239
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.1.4 Apply
Apply Settings
Activates the current settings of the test case wizard.
Initialization of the signal generator with the test case settings is performed by a partial
reset that includes only the baseband, fading and AWGN module and the RF frequency
and RF level settings. Other settings of the signal generator are not altered.
Before triggering the signal generator the user still can change these other settings. This
is particularly useful when compensating for cable loss and additionally inserted attenuators by adjusting the RF power levels is required.
Signal generation is started at the first trigger received by the generator. The RF output
is not activated /deactivated by the test case wizard, so care has to be taken that RF
State is On at the beginning of the measurement.
Note: For safety reasons the RF is not active unless the button RF ON has been pressed.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute on page 494
5.2 Receiver Tests
5.2.1 Overview
5.2.1.1
Basic Configuration
The test cases for receiver tests require at least the following equipment layout for the
signal generator:
●
Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (K42)
●
Universal Coder / Arbitrary Waveform Generator (B10/B11),
●
Baseband Main module (B13),
●
Frequency option (B10x: RF 100 kHz - x GHz).
If the test case requires further options they are listed together with the description of the
test case.
Receiver test can be performed with the signal generator only, i.e. without additional
measuring equipment.
5.2.1.2
Test Setups - Receiver Tests
The tests can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. Test
setups beside the two standard test setups described below are specified at the Test
Case description.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
240
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Standard Test Setup - One Path
In case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is assumed for the graph below.
RF port A outputs the wanted signal (with or without fading and/or interference) and is
connected to the Rx port of the base station. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input TRIGGER 1.
Fig. 5-5: Standard Test Setup (One Path) R&S SMU
Fig. 5-6: Standard Test Setup (One Path) R&S SMATE
For two-path instruments it is also possible to route baseband signal A to RF output B
and connect RF output B to the Rx port of the base station.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
241
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Example: Signal Routing "To Path and RF port A" for test case 6.3.2 Multipath
Fading Case 2
Fig. 5-7: Signal routing R&S SMU
Fig. 5-8: Signal routing R&S SMATE
Standard Test Setup - Two Paths
For two-paths measurements, the test cases always require option Second RF path
(B20x), a second option Baseband Main Module (B13) and at least one option to generate
the interfering signal in addition to the basic configuration. The signal routing can be
selected, the wanted signal can be provided either at output RF A or at output RF B.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and the interfering signal(s) at output RF B. After combining the
two(three) signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port. The signal generator
will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input TRIGGER 1.
Fig. 5-9: Standard Test Setup (Two Paths) R&S SMU
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
242
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Fig. 5-10: Standard Test Setup (Two Paths) R&S SMATE
Example: Signal Routing To Path and RF port A for test case 7.6 Intermodulation
Characteristics
Fig. 5-11: Sigan Routing R&S SMU
Example: Signal Routing To Path and RF port B for test case 7.6 Intermodulation
Characteristics
Fig. 5-12: Sigan Routing R&S SMU
Standard Test Setup - Diversity Measurements
For diversity measurements, the test cases always require at least option Second RF
path (B20x) and a second option Baseband Main Module (B13) in addition to the basic
configuration. The signal routing is fixed.
RF output A and RF output B transmit the corrupted reference measurement channel
signal (wanted signal) and are connected to the Rx ports of the base station for diversity
reception. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger
sent to input "Trigger 1".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
243
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Fig. 5-13: Standard Test Setup ( Diversity Measurements) R&S SMU
Fig. 5-14: Standard Test Setup ( Diversity Measurements) R&S SMATE
Example: Signal Routing for test case 8.3.1 Multipath Fading Case 1
Fig. 5-15: Signal Routing R&S SMU
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
244
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
As signal routing takes place at the output of the baseband block, the interference settings
of the two paths are identical for diversity measurments.
5.2.1.3
Carrying Out a Receiver Test Measurement
The following instructions lists the general steps for performing a receiver test. Specific
requirements are described together with the individual test case.
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a)
b)
c)
d)
Initialize the base station,
Set the scrambling scheme,
Set the frequency
Set the base station to receive the Reference Measurement Channel (for most
test cases),
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) reset the signal generator.
3. Set the test case wizard
a) Open the 3GPP FDD menu in the baseband block
b) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case
The General Settings parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
c) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
d) Enter additional required parameters, e.g. power class of base station.
e) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
f) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
4. Switch on RF output
5. If required, make additional settings (e.g. in the "I/Q Mod" or "RF" block) or change
test case settings (e.g. in the "Fading" block)
6. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse (e.g. SFN modulo 4) from the base station to the
signal generator.
The signal generator will start signal generation.
7. Calculate the result
The base station internally calculates the BER, BLER or Pd depending on the test
case. This value is compared to the required value.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
245
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.2.1.4
General Wanted Signal Parameters
The following parameters are available for all receiver tests. Specific parameters are
listed together with the Test Case description.
Wanted Signal State - Receiver Tests
Enables/disables the signal generation of the wanted 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​STATe on page 507
RMC - Receiver Tests
Sets the reference measurement channel.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the selection of the reference measurement channel
is restricted.
In edit mode "User definable", all following reference measurement channels are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2
kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144
kbps"
144 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 384
kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2
kbps"
channel coding for the AMR coder
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​TYPE on page 502
Wanted Signal Frequency - Receiver Tests
Sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​FREQuency on page 504
Wanted Signal Level - Receiver Tests
Sets the RF level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the RF level is determined by the selected "Power
Class".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​POWer on page 506
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
246
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.2.2 Receiver Characteristics
5.2.2.1
Test Case 7.2 - Reference Sensitivity Level
The test case requires the basic configuration and is performed using the standard test
setup for one path. The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal.
Table 5-3: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
TPC function
OFF
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.2
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to correctly demodulate the
signal sent by the signal generator at the specified (low) reference sensitivity power level.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below a
0.001 at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The reference sensitivity level is the minimum mean power received at the antenna connector at which the BER shall not exceed the specific value indicated in subclause 7.2.2.
The test is set up according to Figure B.7 and performed without interfering signal power
applied to the BS antenna connector. For duplex operation, the measurement configuration principle is indicated for one duplex branch in Figure B.7. For internal BER calculation an example of the test connection is as shown in figure B.7. The reference point
for signal power is at the input of the receiver (antenna connector).
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
247
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 5.2.1.4, "General Wanted
Signal Parameters", on page 246.
5.2.2.2
Test Case 7.3 - Dynamic Range
The test case is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
It requires option K62 - Additional White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the basic
configuration.
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal disturbed by an
interfering AWGN signal.
Table 5-4: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.3
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the useful signal
sent by the signal generator even when it is superimposed by a heavy AWGN (Additive
White Gaussian Noise) signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below 0.001
at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical
Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
248
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Quotation from TS 25.141
Receiver dynamic range is the receiver ability to handle a rise of interference in the
reception frequency channel. The receiver shall fulfil a specified BER requirement for a
specified sensitivity degradation of the wanted signal in the presence of an interfering
AWGN signal in the same reception frequency channel.
Besides the settings described for all receiver tests, AWGN configuration is possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN settings
are preset:
AWGN State - Test Case 7.3
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
C/N - Test Case 7.3
Sets the carrier/noise ratio.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to -16.8 dB.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​CNRatio on page 479
Power Level - Test Case 7.3
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class".
●
-73 dB for Wide Area BS
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
249
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
●
●
-63 dB for Medium Range BS
-59 dB for Local Area BS
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe on page 480
5.2.2.3
Test Case 7.4 - Adjacent Channel Selectivity
The test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a second option Baseband Main
Module (13), a second option Baseband Generator (B10/B11) and a second option Digital
Standard 3GPP FDD (K42) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using
the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A(B) and the adjacent channel interfering signal at output RF B(A). After
combining the two signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port. The signal
generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input "Trigger
1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
Table 5-5: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.4
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that is
sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy WCDMA signal in the adjacent
channel.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below 0.001
at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical
Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Adjacent channel selectivity (ACS) is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a wanted
signal at is assigned channel frequency in the presence of an adjacent channel signal at
a given frequency offset from the center frequency of the assigned channel. ACS is the
ratio of the receiver filter attenuation on the assigned channel frequency to the receive
filter attenuation on the adjacent channel(s).
The interference signal is offset from the wanted signal by the frequency offset Fuw. The
interference signal shall be a W-CDMA signal as specified in Annex I.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
250
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, interferer configuration is possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" the settings are preset.
Interferer State - Test Case 7.4
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering uplink signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​STATe on page 491
Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.4
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the choice is limited to +/- 5 MHz.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​FOFFset on page 487
C to I - Test Case 7.4
Enters the ratio of wanted signal level to interfering signal level.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to - 63 dB:
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CNRatio on page 484
Interferer Modulation - Test Case 7.4
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering uplink signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the modulation is fixed to "W-CDMA (3GPP
FDD)".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
251
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
"W-CDMA
(3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated
for path B.
●
DPCCH + DPDCH mode
●
DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
●
DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
●
Same scrambling code as the wanted signal
("3GPP FDD" menu)
"QPSK (3.84
MHz, Root
Cosine 0.22)"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9 data
source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​TYPE on page 491
5.2.2.4
Test Case 7.5 - Blocking Characteristics
The test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a second option Baseband Main
Module (13), a second option Baseband Generator (B10/B11) and a second option Digital
Standard 3GPP FDD (K42) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using
the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator provides the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and the interfering signal with a selectable frequency offset at output
RF B. After combining the two signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
TRIGGER 1.
The measurement must be made at the frequency M.
Table 5-6: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
M
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
In comparison with test case 7.4 this test case requires very large offset frequencies for
the interfering signal. Therefore, a second RF output is always required. Due to the maximum frequency range of 6 GHz (option B106), the test case can not be performed at all
frequency offsets required by the standard (1 MHz to 12.75 GHz).
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.5
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that is
sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy interfering signal in the not
adjacent channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
252
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below 0.001
at the test frequency M. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing,
where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The blocking characteristics is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a wanted signal
at its assigned channel frequency in the presence of an unwanted interferer on frequencies other than those of the adjacent channels. The blocking performance requirement
applies as specified in tables 7.4A to 7.4J.
The requirements shall apply to the indicated base station class, depending on which
frequency band is used. The requirements in Tables 7.4D to 7.4J may be applied for the
protection of FDD BS receivers when GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 and/or
FDD BS operating in Bands I to VI are co-located with a UTRA FDD BS.
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, the following settings are possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" most settings are preset.
Additional settings in the "Wanted Signal" section:
Blocking Scenario - Test Case 7.5
Selects the type of blocking scenario in edit mode "According to Standard".
The type of blocking scenario presets the selected "Interferer Modulation" and the "Power
Level".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
253
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
"Wideband
Blocking"
The interferer signal for wide band blocking depends on the set "Operating Band" and "RF Frequency":
●
As long as the interferer "RF frequency" lies within or close to the
selected "Operating Band", a "3GPP FDD" uplink signal with a
defined power level (depending on the selected Power Class and
RMC) is generated for path B.
●
When the interferer "RF Frequency" lies outside the selected "Operating Band", a "CW carrier" interfering signal with a defined power
level (depending on the selected Power Class and RMC) is generated for path B.
"Collocated BS A CW carrier interfering signal with a defined power level (depending on
the selected Power Class and RMC) is generated for path B ("RF" menu)
Blocking"
"Narrowband
Blocking"
A GMSK (270.833 kHz) interfering signal with a defined power level
(depending on the selected Power Class and RMC) is generated for path
B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​BTYPe on page 496
Operating Band - Test Case 7.5
Selects the operating band of the base station for "Wideband Blocking". The operating
band is required for the calculation of power levels and interferer modulation.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Operating band I: (1920 – 1980 MHz)
Operating band II: (1850 – 1910 MHz)
Operating band III: (1710 – 1785 MHz)
Operating band IV: (1710 – 1755 MHz)
Operating band V: (824 – 849 MHz)
Operating band VI: (830 – 840 MHz)
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​OBANd on page 504
Interferer Signal
Settings in the "Interferer Signal" section:
Interferer State - Test Case 7.5
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​STATe on page 491
Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.5
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​FOFFset on page 487
Power Level - Test Case 7.5
Enters the level of the interfering signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
254
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Blocking Scenario", the "RF frequency "and "Frequency Offset" and the base
station "Power Class".
For blocking scenario "Colocated BS Blocking" several power settings are permitted by
the standard. The following table show the blocking requirements for Medium Range and
Local Area BS when co-located with BS in other bands.
For blocking performance requirement tables see "Blocking performance requirements", on page 255.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​POWer on page 490
Interferer Modulation - Test Case 7.5
Selects the type of modulation for the adjacent channel interfering signal at output RF B.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the modulation is fixed to a value determined by
the selected "Blocking Scenario".
"W-CDMA
(3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated
for path B.
●
DPCCH + DPDCH mode
●
DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
●
DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
●
Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" menu)
"QPSK (3.84
MHz, Root
Cosine 0.22)"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9 data
source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
"CW Carrier"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9 data
source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
A GMSK signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data source) is gener"GMSK
(270.833 kHz)" ated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​TYPE on page 491
Blocking performance requirements
The following tables are taken from TS25141 (V6.6.0), chapter 7.5.5.
Blocking performance requirement for Medium Range BS when co-located with BS
in other bands
Co-located BS type
Center Frequency of Interfering
Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Micro GSM850
869 – 894 MHz
-3 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band V
869 – 894 MHz
+8 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band III
1805 – 1880 MHz
+8 dBm
Micro DCS1800
1805 – 1880 MHz
+5 dBm
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
255
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Co-located BS type
Center Frequency of Interfering
Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Micro PCS1900
1930 – 1990 MHz
+5 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band II
1930 – 1990 MHz
+8 dBm
Blocking performance requirement for Local Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands
Co-located BS type
Center Frequency of Interfering
Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
LA UTRA-FDD Band V
869 – 894 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico GSM850
869 – 894 MHz
-7 dBm
LA UTRA-FDD Band III
1805 – 1880 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico DCS1800
1805 – 1880 MHz
-4 dBm
LA UTRA-FDD Band II
1930 – 1990 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico PCS1900
1930 – 1990 MHz
-4 dBm
Blocking characteristics for Wide Area BS
Operating
Band
Center FreInterfering Sig- Wanted Signal
quency of
nal mean
mean power
Interfering Sig- power
nal
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
I
1920 1980 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1900 1920 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
1850 1910 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1830 1850 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
1980 2000 MHz
1 MHz
-1900 MHz
CW carrier
2000 MHz 12750 MHz
II
1910 1930 MHz
1 MHz 1830 MHz
CW carrier
1930 MHz 12750 MHz
III
17101785 MHz
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
256
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Operating
Band
Center FreInterfering Sig- Wanted Signal
quency of
nal mean
mean power
Interfering Sig- power
nal
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
1690 1710 MHz
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
17101755 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1690 1710 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
824-849 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
804-824 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
17851805 MHz
1 MHz 1690 MHz
CW carrier
1805 MHz 12750 MHz
IV
17551775 MHz
1 MHz 1690 MHz
CW carrier
1775 MHz 12750 MHz
V
849-869 MHz
1 MHz804 MHz
CW carrier
869 MHz 12750 MHz
VI
810- 830 MHz
840- 860 MHz
1 MHz810 MHz
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
CW carrier
860 MHz12750 MHz
*: The characteristics of the W-CDMA interference signal are specified in Annex I of TS
25.141.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
257
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Blocking performance requirement for Wide Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency
of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal
mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering
Signal
Macro GSM900
921- 960 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Macro DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Macro PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Macro GSM850
869- 894 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Blocking performance requirement for Medium Range BS when co-located with BS
in other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency
of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal
mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering
Signal
Micro GSM900
921- 960 MHz
-3 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
+5 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
+5 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro GSM850
869- 894 MHz
-3 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
258
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency
of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal
mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering
Signal
MR UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Blocking performance requirement for Local Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency
of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal
mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering
Signal
Pico GSM900
921- 960 MHz
-7 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
-4 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
-4 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico GSM850
869- 894 MHz
-7 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Wide Area BS
Operating
Band
Center FreInterfering Sig- Wanted Signal
quency of
nal mean
mean power
Interfering Sig- power
nal
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
II
1850 1910 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
III
17101785 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK modulated*
IV
17101755 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
259
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004.
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Medium Range BS
Operating
Band
Center FreInterfering Sig- Wanted Signal
quency of
nal mean
mean power
Interfering Sig- power
nal
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
II
1850 1910 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
III
17101785 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK modulated*
IV
17101755 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004 [12]
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Local Area BS
Operating
Band
Center FreInterfering Sig- Wanted Signal
quency of
nal mean
mean power
Interfering Sig- power
nal
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
II
1850 1910 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
III
17101785 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK modulated*
IV
17101755 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK modulated*
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004.
5.2.2.5
Test Case 7.6 - Intermodulation Characteristics
The test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a second option Baseband Main
Module (13), a second option Baseband Generator (B10/B11), a second option Digital
Standard 3GPP FDD (K42) and option AWGN (K62) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and both interfering signals (CW interferer and the WCDMA or GMSK
modulated interferer) at output RF B. After combining the signals the sum signal is fed
into the base station Rx port. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first
BS frame trigger sent to input TRIGGER 1.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
260
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The measurement must be made at frequency M.
Note:In order to generate both interfering signals with the desired frequency offset, a
frequency offset is introduced for baseband B. This baseband frequency offset has to be
added to the RF frequency B.
Table 5-7: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
M
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.6
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that is
sent by the signal generator but superimposed by two heavy interfering signals in the
adjacent channels, where the receiver intermodulation products disturb the wanted signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below 0.001
at the test frequency M. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing,
where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Third and higher order mixing of the two interfering RF signals can produce an interfering
signal in the band of the desired channel. Intermodulation response rejection is a measure of the capability of the receiver to receiver a wanted signal on its assigned channel
frequency in the presence of two or more interfering signals which have a specific frequency relationship to the wanted signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
261
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver tests, interferer 1 and 2 configuration is
possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" most of the
settings are preset.
Interferer Bandwidth Type - Test Case 7.6
Selects the interferer scenario.
"Wideband"
A 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal with the following characteristic is
generated for path B.
●
DPCCH + DPDCH mode
●
DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
●
DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
●
Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" menu)
The 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal is superimposed by a CW interfering signal with a frequency of 10 MHz and a level of -48 dBm
("AWGN" menu).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
262
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
"Narrowband" GMSK interfering signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data source)
is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
The GMSK interfering signal is superimposed by a CW interfering signal
with a frequency of 3.5 MHz and a level of -47 dBm ("AWGN" menu).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​BWIDth on page 484
Interferer 1 and 2 State - Test Case 7.6
Enables/disables the signal generation of the CW and modulation interfering signal in the
second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" both states are fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​STATe on page 486
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​STATe on page 489
Interferer 1 and 2 Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.6
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signals versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​FOFFset on page 485
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​FOFFset on page 487
Interferer 1 and 2 Power Level - Test Case 7.6
Enters the level of the interfering signals..
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth Type".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​POWer on page 486
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​POWer on page 488
Interferer 2 Modulation - Test Case 7.6
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering modulation signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth".
"W-CDMA
(3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated
for path B.
●
DPCCH + DPDCH mode
●
DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
●
DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
●
Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" menu)
A GMSK signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data source) is gener"GMSK
(270833 kHz)" ated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
263
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
"QPSK
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9 data
(3.84 MHz, Rootsource) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" menu).
Cosine 0.22)"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​TYPE on page 489
5.2.2.6
Test Case 7.8 - Verification of Internal BER
The test case requires the basic configuration and is performed using the standard test
setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a corrupted reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A. The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
Table 5-8: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.8
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to calculate the BER of a signal
where erroneous bits are inserted in the data stream by the signal generator.
The test is passed when the calculated BER is within ±10% of the BER simulated by the
signal generator the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules
for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Base Station System with internal BER calculation can synchronize it's receiver to known
pseudo-random data sequence and calculates bit error ratio from the received data. This
test is performed only if Base Station System has this kind of feature. This test is performed by feeding measurement signal with known BER to the input of the receiver.
Locations of the erroneous bits shall be randomly distributed within a frame. Erroneous
bits shall be inserted to the data bit stream as shown in the following figure.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
264
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, Bit Error Rate and Block Error Rate
selection is possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Bit Error Rate setting is possible.
Bit Error Rate - Test Case 7.8
Sets the bit error rate. In edit mode "According to Standard" only values 0.00 (no bit errors
are inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent bit errors are inserted) are available.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​RATE
on page 503
Block Error Rate - Test Case 7.8
Sets the block error rate in edit mode "User Definable".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE
on page 503
5.2.3 Performance Requirements
5.2.3.1
Test Case 8.2.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Static Propagation Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires Additional White Gaussian
Noise (AWGN) (K62) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
265
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal)
that is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A. The signal is fed into the base
station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), a second option Baseband Generator (B10/
B11) and two options Additional White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) (K62) in addition to the
standard configuration. It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and output RF B. The wanted signal is superimposed by a AWGN
signal. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
Trigger 1.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
Table 5-9: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.2.1
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that
is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of DCH in static propagation conditions is determined by
the maximum Block Error Ratio (BLER ) allowed when the receiver input signal is at a
specified Eb/N0 limit. The BLER is calculated for each of the measurement channels supported by the base station.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
266
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, AWGN Configuration is possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Required
BLER setting is possible. Fading is always off.
AWGN State - Test Case 8.x
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​STATe on page 481
Required BLER - Test Case 8.x
Sets the required Block Error Rate in edit mode "According to Standard".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RBLock:​RATE on page 480
Power Level - Test Case 8.x
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
● "-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
● "-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
● "-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe on page 480
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
267
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Eb to N0 - Test Case 8.x
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the Eb/N0 test requirements
(see table 5-10).
Table 5-10: Eb/N0 test requirements in AWGN channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (5.5 dB)
n.a. (8.7 dB)
< 10-1
5.5 dB
8.7 dB
< 10-2
1.9 dB
5.1 dB
< 10-1
2.1 dB
5.2 dB
< 10-2
1.2 dB
4.2 dB
< 10-1
1.3 dB
4.4 dB
< 10-2
1.3 dB
4.4 dB
< 10-1
1.4 dB
4.5 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​ENRatio on page 479
Fading State - Test Case 8.2.1
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to 'Off'.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe on page 483
5.2.3.2
Test Case 8.3.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 1 Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option Additional White Gaussian
Noise (AWGN) (K62) and options Fading Simulator (B14), Path Extension (B15), and
Enhanced Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal)
that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A(B). The
signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
Trigger 1.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), two options Additional White Gaussian Noise
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
268
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
(AWGN) (K62) and options Fading Simulator (B14) and Path Extension (B15), Enhanced
Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71) in addition to the basic configuration.
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A and
output RF B. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
Table 5-11: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.3.1
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that
is sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal and disturbed
by multipath fading effects.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
269
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
This test case settings are identical to test case 8.2.1 except from the channel simulation
that is set to "Multipath Fading Case 1" ("Fading" menu: Standard = 3GPP Case 1 UE/
BS) and the specific Eb/N0 test requirements (see table 5-12).
Table 5-12: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 1 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb/N0
Received Eb/N0
Required BLER
for BS with Rx diversity for BS without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
n.a. (12.5 dB)
n.a. (19.7 dB)
< 10-1
12.5 dB
19.7 dB
< 10-2
6.8 dB
12.2 dB
< 10-1
9.8 dB
16.5 dB
< 10-2
6.0 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-1
9.0 dB
15.6 dB
< 10-2
6.4 dB
11.8 dB
< 10-1
9.4 dB
16.1 dB
< 10-2
Fading State - Test Case 8.x
Indicates the state of the Fader.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
270
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The state is fixed to "On". The "Fading" menu is preset with the required settings for the
test case.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe on page 483
5.2.3.3
Test Case 8.3.2 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 2 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to "Multipath Fading Case 2" ("Fading" dialog: Standard = 3GPP Case 2 UE/BS) and the
Eb/N0 test requirements (see table 5-13).
Table 5-13: Eb/N0 Test requirements in Multipath Case 2 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS with Rx Received Eb to
diversity
N0 for BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (9.6 dB)
n.a. (15.6 dB)
< 10-1
9.6 dB
15.6 dB
< 10-2
4.9 dB
9.8 dB
< 10-1
7.0 dB
12.9 dB
< 10-2
4.3 dB
8.8 dB
< 10-1
6.2 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-2
4.7 dB
9.3 dB
< 10-1
6.7 dB
12.7dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
5.2.3.4
Test Case 8.3.3 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 3 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to 'Multipath Fading Case 3' ("Fading" menu: Standard = 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS) and the
Eb/N0 test requirements (see table 5-14).
Table 5-14: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 3 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (7.8 dB)
n.a. (11.4 dB)
< 10-1
7.8 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-2
8.6 dB
12.3 dB
< 10-3
4.0 dB
7.7 dB
< 10-1
4.4 dB
8.3 dB
< 10-2
4.7 dB
9.1 dB
< 10-3
3.4 dB
6.6 dB
< 10-1
64 kbps
144 kbps
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
271
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Measurement channel
384 kbps
5.2.3.5
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
3.8 dB
7.3 dB
< 10-2
4.2 dB
7.8 dB
< 10-3
3.8 dB
7.1 dB
< 10-1
4.2 dB
7.8 dB
< 10-2
4.8 dB
8.5 dB
< 10-3
Test Case 8.3.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 4 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to "Multipath Fading Case 4" ("Fading" menu: Standard = 3GPP Case 4 UE) and the
Eb/N0 test requirements (see following table).
Table 5-15: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
< 10-1
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
Table 5-16: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
272
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Measurement channel
144 kbps
384 kbps
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
< 10-1
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
Table 5-17: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
5.2.3.6
Test Case 8.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Moving Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to "Moving Propagation" ("Fading" menu: Standard = Moving Propagation) and the Eb/
N0 test requirements.
Table 5-18: Eb/N0 Test requirements in moving channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (6.3 dB)
n.a. (9.3 dB)
< 10-1
6.3 dB
9.3 dB
< 10-2
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
273
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.2.3.7
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
64 kbps
2.7 dB
5.9 dB
< 10-1
2.8 dB
6.1 dB
< 10-2
Test Case 8.5 - Demodulation of DCH in Birth/Death Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to B"irth/Death Propagation" ("Fading" menu: Standard = Birth/Death Propagation) and
the Eb/N0test requirements.
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS Received Eb to N0 for BS Required BLER
with Rx diversity
without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (8.3 dB)
n.a. (11.4 dB)
< 10-1
8.3 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-2
4.7 dB
8.0 dB
< 10-1
4.8 dB
8.1 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
5.2.3.8
Test Case 8.6 - Verification of Internal BLER
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires the basic configuration and is
performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a corrupted reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A. The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x) and
a second option Baseband Main Module (B13) in addition to the basic configuration.
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the corrupted reference measurement channel signal (=
wanted signal) at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are fed into the base station
Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
274
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Table 5-19: The following table lists the settings on the base station
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.6
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to calculate the BLER of a
signal where erroneous blocks are inserted in the data stream by the signal generator.
The test is passed when the calculated BLER is within ±10% of the BLER simulated by
the signal generator the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General
Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Base Station System with internal BLER calculates block error rate from the CRC blocks
of the received. This test is performed only if Base Station System has this kind of feature.
All data rates which are used in clause 8 Performance requirement testing shall be used
in verification testing. This test is performed by feeding measurement signal with known
BLER to the input of the receiver. Locations of the erroneous blocks shall be randomly
distributed within a frame. Erroneous blocks shall be inserted into the UL signal as shown
in the following figure.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
275
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, Bit Error Rate and Block Error Rate
selection is possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Block Error Rate setting is possible.
Table 5-20: UL signal levels for different data rates
Data rate
Signal level for
Wide Area BS
Signal level for
Signal level for
Medium Range BS Local Area BS
Unit
12,2 kbps
-111
-101
-97
dBm/3.84 MHz
64 kbps
-107
-97
-93
dBm/3.84 MHz
144 kbps
-104
-94
-90
dBm/3.84 MHz
384 kbps
-100
-90
-86
dBm/3.84 MHz
Block Error Rate - Test Case 8.6
Sets the block error rate. In edit mode "According to Standard" only values 0.00 (no block
errors are inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent block errors are inserted) are available.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE
on page 503
Bit Error Rate - Test Case 8.6
Sets the bit error rate in edit mode "User Definable".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​RATE
on page 503
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
276
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.2.3.9
Test Case 8.8.1 - RACH Preamble Detection in Static Propagation Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option K62 - Additional White
Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (wanted signal) that
is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A(B). The signal is fed into the base
station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), and two options Additional White Gaussian
Noise (AWGN) (K62) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using the
standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (wanted signal) that
is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are fed
into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
Table 5-21: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
RACH
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.1
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to detect the RACH preamble
that is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal.
The test is passed when internally calculated Pd is equal or above the required Pd settings at the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of RACH for preamble detection in static propagation conditions is determined by the two parameters probability of false detection of the preaEc/
N0mble (Pfa) and the probability of detection of preamble (Pd). The performance is measured by the required at probability of detection, Pd of 0.99 and 0.999. Pfa is defined as
a conditional probability of erroneous detection of the preamble when input is only noise
(+interference). Pd is defined as conditional probability of detection of the preamble when
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
277
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
the signal is present. Pfa shall be 10-3 or less. Only one signature is used and it is known
by the receiver.
The Probability of false detection of the preamble (Pfa) test is not supported.
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, AWGN and Fading Configuration is
possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard "only the
"Required Pd" setting is possible.
AWGN State - Test Case 8.x
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​STATe on page 481
Required Pd - Test Case 8.x
Sets the Required Probability of Detection of Preamble (Required Pd) in edit mode
"According to Standard":
● >= 0.99
● >= 0.999
This figure determines the ratio Ec/N0 according to the following table of Ec/N0 test
requirements.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
278
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Table 5-22: Preamble detection test requirements in AWGN channel
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.99
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.999
"BS with Rx Diversity"
-20.1 dB
-19.7 dB
"BS without Rx Diversity"
-17.2 dB
-16.4 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RPDetection:​RATE on page 481
Power Level - Test Case 8.x
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
●
●
●
"-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
"-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
"-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe on page 480
Eb/N0 - Test Case 8.x
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the selected "Required Pd".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​ENRatio on page 479
Fading State - Test Case 8.x.1
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "Off".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe on page 483
5.2.3.10
Test Case 8.8.2 - RACH Preamble Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option - Additional White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) (K62) and options Fading Simulator (B14), Path Extension (B15),
and Enhanced Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (= wanted signal) that
is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A(B). The signal
is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
279
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), two options Additional White Gaussian Noise
(AWGN) (K62) and options Fading Simulator (B14) and Path Extension (B15), Enhanced
Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71)in addition to the basic configuration.
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (= wanted signal) that
is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A and output
RF B. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
Table 5-23: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.2
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to detect the RACH preamble that is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal
and disturbed by multipath fading effects.
The test is passed when internally calculated Pd is equal or above the required Pd settings at the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
280
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.1 except from the channel simulation that is set
to "Multipath Fading Case 3" ("Fading" menu: Standard = 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS) by default
and the specific EC/N0 ratio requirements (see following table).
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.99
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.999
"BS with Rx Diversity"
-14.9 dB
-12.8 dB
"BS without Rx Diversity"
-8.8 dB
-5.8 dB
Fading State - Test Case 8.x
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "On". The "Fading" menu is preset with the required settings for the
test case.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe on page 483
5.2.3.11
Test Case 8.8.3 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Static Propagation Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option K62 - Additional White
Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
281
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A(B). The signal is fed into the base station Rx
port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), and two options Additional White Gaussian
Noise (AWGN) (K62) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using the
standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are fed into the
base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
Table 5-24: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
Transport Block Size
168 bits, 360 bits
RMC
RACH
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.3
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the RACH
message sent by the signal generator but superimposed by AWGN.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of RACH in static propagation conditions is determined by
the maximum Block Error Ratio (BLER) allowed when the receiver input signal is at a
specified Eb/N0 limit. The BLER is calculated for each of the measurement channels supported by the base station.
The preamble threshold factor is chosen to fulfil the requirements on Pfa and Pd in subclauses 8.8.1 and 8.8.2. Only one signature is used and it is known by the receiver.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
282
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, selection of "Transport Block Size" of
the wanted signal and AWGN Configuration is possible in edit mode "According to Standard".
Transport Block Size - Test Case 8.8.x
Sets the Transport Block Size:
● 168 bits
● 360 bits
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​PRACh:​CCODing:​TYPE on page 506
AWGN State - Test Case 8.8.3
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​STATe on page 481
Required BLER - Test Case 8.x
Sets the required Block Error Rate in edit mode "According to Standard".
● < 0.1
● < 0.01
This figure determines the ratio Eb/N0 according to the list of Eb/N0 test requirements (see
following table).
Eb/N0 requirements in AWGN channel
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
283
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
Table 5-25: Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI = 20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
4.5 dB
5.4 dB
4.3 dB
5.2 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
7.6 dB
8.5 dB
7.3 dB
8.2 dB
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RBLock:​RATE on page 480
Power Level - Test Case 8.8.3
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
"-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
"-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
"-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe on page 480
Eb/N0- Test Case 8.8.3
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the selected "Required
BLER".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​ENRatio on page 479
Fading State - Test Case 8.8.3
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "Off".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe on page 483
5.2.3.12
Test Case 8.8.4 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Multipath Fading Case 3
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option Additional White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) (K62) and options Fading Simulator (B14), Path Extension (B15),
and Enhanced Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed
by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A. The signal is fed into the
base station Rx port.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
284
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x), a
second option Baseband Main Module (13), two options Additional White Gaussian Noise
(AWGN) (K62), and options Fading Simulator (B14), Path Extension (B15), and
Enhanced Resolution and Dynamic Fading (K71) in addition to the standard configuration. It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed
by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A and output RF B. The
signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
"Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.4
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the RACH
message sent by the signal generator but superimposed by AWGN and disturbed by
multipath fading effects.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
285
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.3 except from the channel simulation that is set
to "Multipath Fading Case 3" ("Fading" menu: Standard = 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS) and the
specific Eb/N0 ratio requirements.
Eb/N0 test requirements in fading case 3 channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI = 20 ms
5.2.3.13
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
8.0 dB
9.1 dB
7.9 dB
8.9 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
11.7 dB
13.0 dB
11.6 dB
12.7 dB
Test Case 8.9.1 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection in Static Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.1 except that the CPCH Preamble is used
instead of the RACH preamble.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
286
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Receiver Tests
5.2.3.14
Test Case 8.9.2 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.2 except that the CPCH Preamble is used
instead of the RACH preamble.
5.2.3.15
Test Case 8.9.3 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Static Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.3 except from differing Eb/N0 ratio requirements
and the demodulation of CPCH Message instead of the RACH Message.
Test requirements in AWGN channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI = 20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
4.5 dB
5.4 dB
4.3 dB
5.2 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
7.5 dB
8.4 dB
7.3 dB
8.2 dB
Transport Block Size (TB) - Test Case 8.9.3
Sets the Transport Block Size:
168 bits
360 bits
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​TYPE on page 505
5.2.3.16
Test Case 8.9.4 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Multipath Fading Case 3
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.4 except from differing Eb/N0 ratio requirements
and the demodulation of the CPCH Message instead of the RACH Message.
Test requirements in fading case 3 channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI = 20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
8.1 dB
9.1 dB
7.9 dB
8.7 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
11.4 dB
12.6 dB
11.3 dB
12.3 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
287
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
5.3 Transmitter Tests
5.3.1 Basic Configuration
The test cases for transmitter tests require at least the following equipment layout for the
signal generator:
●
Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (K42)
●
Universal Coder / Arbitrary Waveform Generator (B10/B11),
●
Baseband Main module (DACIF; B13),
●
Frequency option (B10x: RF 100 kHz - x GHz).
Transmitter tests always require a separate measuring equipment to perform the tests,
e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
Test cases where the signal generator hardware equipment is not sufficient are shown
in grey color but are not selectable. RF power and frequency limitations of the hardware
equipment restrict the setting ranges.
5.3.2 Test Case 6.4.2 - Power Control Steps
The test case requires the basic configuration.
It can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. A vector signal
analyzer is required, e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
For the signal generator, in case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is
assumed.
Output RF A of the signal generator is connected to the Rx port of the base station. The
Tx Signal of the base station is connected to the RF input of the analyzer via an attenuator.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to input
Trigger 1. The analyzer is triggered by a marker signal (MARKER 1) of the generator.
The signal generator provides an uplink link signal with a precisely defined TPC bit
sequence. The base station responds to the TPC bits by controlling the transmitted power
of the data channel which is checked by the analyzer.
The analyzer measures the base station transmit power in the code domain to verify the
transmitter power control step tolerance and aggregated power control step range.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
288
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
5.3.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.4.2
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to adjust its transmit power in
response to the uplink TPC pattern. The cumulative power change as a result of ten
successive (identical) TPC bits is also checked (aggregated transmit power).
The test is passed when the single or aggregated power control steps are within tolerance
throughout the total dynamic range at the test frequencies B, M, and T.
Quotation from TS 25.141
The power control step is the required step change in the code domain power of a code
channel in response to the corresponding power control command. The combined output
power change is the required total change in the DL transmitter output power of a code
channel in response to multiple consecutive power control commands corresponding to
that code channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
289
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
Wanted Signal State - Test Case 6.4.2
Enables/disables the signal generation of the wanted 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to On.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​STATe on page 507
Wanted Signal Frequency - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​FREQuency on page 504
Wanted Signal Level - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the RF level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the RF level is determined by the selected "Power
Class".
It is always 10 dBm above the reference sensitivity:
● "-120.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Wide Area BS"
● "-110.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Medium Range BS"
● "-106.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Local Area BS"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​POWer on page 506
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
290
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
Slot Format DPCCH - Test Case 6.4.2
Selects the slot format.
Slot formats 0 to 5 are available for the DPCCH channel. The slot format defines the FBI
mode and the TFCI status.
"Slot format 0" no FBI field / TFCI on
"Slot format 1" no FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 2" 1 FBI field / TFCI on
"Slot format 3" 1 FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 4" 2 FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 5" 2 FBI field / TFCI on
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​SFORmat on page 497
Overall Symbol Rate - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the DPDCH channels.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and which
channelization codes they use.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​ORATe on page 503
Power Ratio DPCCH to DPDCH - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the channel power ratio of DPCCH to DPDCH.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DCRatio on page 496
Propagation Delay - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets an additional propagation delay besides the fixed DL-UL timing offset of 1024 chip
periods.
Note: The additional propagation delay is achieved by charging the start trigger impulse
with the respective delay (= entering the value as an "External Delay" in the 3GPP
"Trigger /Marker" dialog).
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​DELay
on page 507
TPC Start Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the TPC pattern for initialization of the base stations power level in edit mode U"ser
Definable". The TPC start pattern is sent before the TPC repeat pattern.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the pattern is fixed to "Maximum Power Less n
Steps."
Note: In edit mode "According to Standard", the TPC bits are read out of predefined data
lists.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
291
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
The TPC start pattern ensures that the base station responds reliably to the TPC bits
from the generator. It sets the base station to a defined initial state for the actual recording
of the measurement data. The analyzer is only triggered after the generation of the start
pattern using marker 1 of the generator.
"Maximum
Power Less n
Steps"
A sequence of power up steps (TPC bits "1") is followed by a number of
power down steps (TPC bits "0").
A sufficiently long sequence of TPC bits "1" ('power up' commands)
forces the base station to maximum transmit power. By the n 'power
down' commands the base station is set to a defined number of n power
steps (e.g. 1 dB or 0.5 dB) below its maximum transmit power at the
beginning of the measurement.
"Data List"
The TPC start pattern is taken from a user defined data list. When "Data
List" is selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select" window.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa on page 499
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​DSELect
on page 500
TPC Power Up Steps - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the number of power up bits ("1") in the TPC start pattern. The total TPC start pattern
length is the number of 'power up' bits plus the number of n 'power down' bits.
This parameter is only available for TPC Start Pattern = Max. Pow. Less N Steps.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​PUSTeps
on page 501
TPC Power Down Steps - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the number of power down bits ('0') in the TPC start pattern. The total TPC start
pattern length is the number of 'power up' ('1') bits plus the number of n 'power down' ('0')
bits.
This parameter is only available for TPC Start Pattern = "Max. Pow. Less N Steps".
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​PDSTeps
on page 501
TPC Repeat Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the TPC pattern for verification of the base stations power control steps.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the selection is limited.
"Single Power A 01 pattern is sent periodically for measurement of the transmitter power
control step tolerance.
Steps"
"Aggregated
Power Steps"
A 00000000001111111111 pattern is sent periodically for measurement
of the transmitter aggregated power control step range. The power of the
base station is measured after 10 consecutive equal TPC bits ('1' or '0').
"(All 1) Maximum Power"
A all 1 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to maximum power. This selection is only available in edit mode "User Definable"
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
292
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
"(All 0) Minimum Power"
A all 0 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to minimum
power. This selection is only available in edit mode "User Definable"
"User Defined The TPC repeat pattern can be input. When "User Defined Pattern" is
selected, an input field appears for entering the pattern. The maximum
Pattern"
bit pattern length is 64 bits. This selection is only available in edit mode
"User Definable"
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa:​PATTern
on page 499
"Data List"
The TPC repeat pattern is taken from a data list. When "Data List" is
selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select" window.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa:​DSELect
on page 498
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa on page 497
5.3.2.2
Carrying Out the Test Case 6.4.2 Measurement
For the preset Marker Configuration "Auto", Marker 1 starts delayed by the TPC start
pattern length.
Each slot takes 0.625 ms and consists of 2560 chips. Depending on the slot format 1 or
2 TPC bits are sent for each slot.
Table 5-26: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
Test Model
2
Transmit power
Any
Scrambling Code
Any
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a)
b)
c)
d)
Initialize the base station,
Set the scrambling scheme,
Set the base station to test model 2,
Set the frequency
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) Preset the signal generator unless some settings (e.g. in terms of I/Q and RF
blocks) have to be kept.
3. Set the analyzer to the basic state
a) Set the test case wizard
b) Open the 3GPP FDD menu in the baseband block
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
293
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
c) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case 6.4.2.
The General Settings parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
d) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
e) Enter the power class of the base station under test. The RF level is automatically
adjusted to the selected power class.
f) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
g) Enter the Wanted Signal parameters.
h) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
4. Set the analyzer to the measurement frequency
5. Switch on RF output
6. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator and to
the analyzer.
Signal generation and measurement procedures are started.
7. Calculate the result
The analyzer calculates the resulting code domain power of the BS downlink channel.
5.3.3 Test Case 6.6 - Transmit Intermodulation
The test case requires the basic configuration.
It can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. A vector signal
analyzer is required, e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
For the signal generator, in case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is
assumed.
RF port A is connected to the RF input of the analyzer via a circulator and an external
attenuator. The Tx Signal of the base station is connected to the RF input of the analyzer
via a circulator.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
294
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
The signal generator outputs the test model interfering signal with different frequency
offsets in relation to the BS carrier frequency and provides the trigger for the analyzer
(MARKER 1).
5.3.3.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.6
The test case verifies that a BS transmitter has the capability to inhibit intermodulation
products of non linear elements caused by the presence of an interfering signal at the
adjacent frequency channels from the signal generator.
The test is passed when the transmit intermodulation level is below an upper out of band
emission and spurious emission threshold at the test frequencies B, M, and T.
Quotation from TS 25.141
The transmit intermodulation performance is a measure of the capability of the transmitter
to inhibit the generation of signals in its non linear elements caused by presence of the
wanted signal and an interfering signal reaching the transmitter via the antenna
The transmit intermodulation level is the power of the intermodulation products when a
WCDMA modulated interference signal is injected into an antenna connector at a mean
power level of 30 dB lower than that of the mean power of the wanted signal. The frequency of the interference signal shall be 5 MHz, 10 MHz and 15 MHz offset from the
subject signal carrier frequency, but exclude interference frequencies that are outside of
the allocated frequency band for UTRA-FDD downlink specified in subclause 3.4.1.
The requirements are applicable for single carrier.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
295
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
BS Frequency - Test Case 6.6
Enters the RF frequency of the base station.
Note: In this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the
interfering signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSSignal:​FREQuency on page 482
BS RF Power - Test Case 6.6
Enters the RF power of the base station.
Note: In this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the
interfering signal.
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSSignal:​POWer on page 483
Interferer State - Test Case 6.6
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
NoteIn this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the interfering signal .
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​STATe on page 491
Interferer Mode - Test Case 6.6
Selects the interfering signal from a list of test models in accordance with TS 25.141. All
test models refer to the predefined downlink configurations. In edit mode "According to
Standard" Test Model 1, 64 DPCHs is fixed.
The following test models are available for selection in edit mode "User Definable":
● Test Model 1; 64 DPCHs
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
296
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Test Model 1; 16 Channels
Test Model 1; 32 Channels
Test Model 2
Test Model 3; 16 Channels
Test Model 3; 32 Channels
Test Model 4
Test Model 5; 38 Channels
Test Model 5; 28 Channels
Test Model 5; 8 Channels
Remote-control command: TM164
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation
on page 491
Frequency Offset - Test Case 6.6
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the choice is limited to values between +/- 15 MHz
in 5 MHz steps:
Remote-control command: -15 MHz
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​FOFFset on page 487
Interferer Level to Signal Level - Test Case 6.6
Enters the ratio of interfering signal level versus wanted signal level.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to - 30 dB:
Remote-control command: -30
SCPI command:
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CNRatio on page 484
5.3.3.2
Carrying Out a Test Case 6.6 Measurement
The signal generator outputs the test model interfering signal.
Table 5-27: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
Test Model
1
Transmit power
Maximum
Scrambling Code
any
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a) Initialize the base station,
b) Set the scrambling scheme,
c) Set the base station to test model 1,
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
297
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Tests Case Wizard
Transmitter Tests
d) Set maximum transmit power,
e) Set the frequency
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) Preset the signal generator unless some settings (e.g. in terms of I/Q and RF
blocks) have to be kept.
3. Set the analyzer to the basic state
4. Set the test case wizard
a) Open the 3GPP FDD menu in the baseband block
b) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case 6.6.
The "General Settings" parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
c) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
d) Enter the power class of the base station under test. The RF level is automatically
adjusted to the selected power class.
e) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
f) Enter the Interfering Signal parameters.
g) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
5. Set the analyzer to the measurement frequency
6. Switch on RF output
7. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator and to
the analyzer.
Signal generation and measurement procedures are started.
8. Calculate the result
The analyzer calculates the out of band emission and the spurious emission.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
298
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
6 Remote-Control Commands
The commands in the SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp subsystem are described in three sections,
separated into general remote commands, commands for base station settings and commands for user equipment settings.
This subsystem contains commands for the primary and general settings of the 3GPP
FDD standard. These settings concern activation and deactivation of the standard, setting
the transmission direction, filter, clock, trigger and clipping settings, defining the chip rate
and the sequence length, as well as the preset and power adjust setting.
The commands for setting the base station and the user equipment, the enhanced channels of the base and user equipment, as well as the commands for selecting the test
models and the test setups, are described in separate sections. The commands are divided up in this way to make the extremely comprehensive SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp subsystem
clearer.
SOURce<hw>
For one-path instruments, the keyword SOURce is optional and can be omitted.
The numeric suffix to SOURce distinguishes between signal generation for path A and
path B in the case of two-path instruments:
●
SOURce[1] = path A
The keyword SOURce is optional and can be omitted
●
SOURce2 = path B
The keyword SOURce is mandatory, i.e. the command must contain the keyword with
suffix 2.
OUTput<ch>
The numeric suffix to OUTPut distinguishes between the available markers.
Only two markers are available for the R&S SMBV, i.e. the allowed values for the suffix
are 1 or 2.
Placeholder <root>
For commands that read out or save files in the default directory, the default directory is
set using command MMEM:​CDIRectory. The examples in this description use the place
holder <root> in the syntax of the command.
●
D:\ - for selecting the internal hard disk of Windows instruments
●
E:\ - for selecting the memory stick which is inserted at the USB interface of Windows
instruments
●
/var/<instrument> - for selecting the internal flash card of Linux instrument,
where <instrument> is the instument name, e.g. smbv.
●
/usb - for selecting the memory stick which is inserted at the USB interface of Linux
instrument.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
299
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
6.1 General Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet.................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset...................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination..............................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute...................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce....................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LINK...................................................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust.....................................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer[:TOTal]....................................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PRESet...............................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:CATalog................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:DELete..................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:LOAD....................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:STORe..................................................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth..............................................................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:STATe................................................................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:WAVeform:CREate...............................................................305
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion............................................................................305
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for all the base stations. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All base station settings are preset.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​PRES
resets all the base station settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​COFFset <Coffset>
The command sets the offset for the channelization code in the destination base station.
This command is only available in the downlink (SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​LINK FORW/DOWN).
Parameters:
<Coffset>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 to 511
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​COFF 10
the channelization code is shifted by 10 when the source base
station is copied to the destination base station.
300
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​DESTination <Destination>
The command selects the station to which data is to be copied. Whether the data is copied
to a base station or a user equipment depends on which transmission direction is selected
(command W3GPp:​LINK UP | DOWN).
Parameters:
<Destination>
Example:
1|2|3|4
Range:
1 to 4
*RST:
2
BB:​W3GP:​LINK DOWN
selects the downlink transmit direction (base station to user equipment).
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​SOUR 1
selects base station 1 as the source.
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​DEST 4
selects base station 4 as the destination.
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of base station 1 to base station
4.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​EXECute
The command starts the copy process. The dataset of the source station is copied to the
destination station. Whether the data is copied to a base station or a user equipment
depends on which transmission direction is selected (command W3GPp:​LINK UP |
DOWN).
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of the selected source station to
the selected destination station.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​COPY:​SOURce <Source>
The command selects the station that has data to be copied. Whether the station copied
is a base or user equipment depends on which transmission direction is selected (command W3GPp:​LINK UP | DOWN).
Parameters:
<Source>
1|2|3|4
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1 to 4
1
301
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​LINK UP
selects the uplink transmit direction (user equipment to base station).
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​SOUR 1
selects user equipment 1 as the source.
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​DEST 4
selects user equipment 4 as the destination.
BB:​W3GP:​COPY:​EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of user equipment 1 to user
equipment 4.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK <Link>
The command defines the transmission direction. The signal either corresponds to that
of a base station (FORWard|DOWN) or that of a user equipment (REVerse|UP).
Parameters:
<Link>
Example:
FORWard|DOWN | REVerse|UP
*RST:
FORWard|DOWN
BB:​W3GP:​LINK DOWN
the transmission direction selected is base station to user equipment. The signal corresponds to that of a base station.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer:​ADJust
The command sets the power of the active channels in such a way that the total power
of the active channels is 0 dB. This will not change the power ratio among the individual
channels.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​POW:​ADJ
the total power of the active channels is set to 0 dB, the power ratio
among the individual channels is unchanged.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer[:​TOTal]?
The command queries the total power of the active channels. After "Power Adjust", this
power corresponds to 0 dB.
Return values:
<Total>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​POW?
queries the total power of the active channels.
Response:​ -22.5
the total power is -25 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
302
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for the 3GPP FDD standard. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All 3GPP FDD settings are preset.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​PRES
resets all the 3GPP FDD settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​CATalog?
This command reads out the files with 3GPP FDD settings in the default directory. The
default directory is set using command MMEM:​CDIRectory. Only files with the file extension *.3g will be listed.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\user\dig_mod
sets the default directory to <root>\user\dig_mod.
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​CAT?
reads out all the files with 3GPP FDD settings in the default directory.
Response:​ UPLINK,​DOWNLINK
the files UPLINK and DOWNLINK are available.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​DELete <Delete>
This command deletes the selected file with 3GPP FDD settings The directory is set using
command MMEM:​CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in
the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file
extension *.3g will be deleted.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
<file_name>
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​DEL 'UPLINK'
deletes file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​LOAD <Load>
This command loads the selected file with 3GPP FDD settings The directory is set using
command MMEM:​CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in
the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file
extension *.3g will be loaded.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
303
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Setting parameters:
<Load>
<file_name>
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​LOAD 'UPLINK'
loads file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​STORe <Store>
This command stores the current 3GPP FDD settings into the selected file. The directory
is set using command MMEM:​CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case
the files in the specified directory are read. Only the file name has to be entered. 3GPP
FDD settings are stored as files with the specific file extensions *.3g.
Setting parameters:
<Store>
string
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​STOR 'UPLINK'
stores the current 3GPP FDD settings into file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SLENgth <Slength>
The command sets the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component of the
3GPP signal in the number of frames. This component is calculated in advance and output in the arbitrary waveform generator. It is added to the realtime signal components
(Enhanced Channels).
The maximum number of frames is calculated as follows:
Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform memory size/(3.84 Mcps x 10 ms).
When working in Advanced Mode (W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON), it is
recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the suggested one.
Parameters:
<Slength>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to Max frames
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​SLEN 10
sets the sequence length to 10 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe <State>
The command activates modulation in accordance with the 3GPP FDD standard. Activating this standard deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modulation
modes.
In case of two-path instruments, this affects the same path.
BB:​W3GP:​STAT ON deactivates the other standards and digital modulation.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
304
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​STAT ON
activates modulation in accordance with the 3GPP FDD standard.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​WAVeform:​CREate <Create>
This command creates a waveform using the current settings of the 3GPP FDD menu.
The file name is entered with the command. The file is stored with the predefined file
extension *.wv. The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable.
Setting parameters:
<Create>
<file_name>
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\user\waveform
sets the default directory to <root>\user\waveform.
BB:​W3GP:​WAV:​CRE 'gpp3_bs'
creates the waveform file gpp3_bs.wv in the default directory.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​GPP3:​VERSion?
The command queries the version of the 3GPP standard underlying the definitions.
Return values:
<Version>
string
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​GPP3:​VERS?
queries the 3GPP version.
Usage:
Query only
6.2 Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel....................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE...................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:STATe..................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation.................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:ILENgth....................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:ILENgth:AUTO..........................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:OSAMpling................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO......................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25..................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:COSine...................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs....................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs....................................................309
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
305
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM.............................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine.................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase...................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPe........................................................................310
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​LEVel <Level>
The command sets the limit for level clipping (Clipping). This value indicates at what point
the signal is clipped. It is specified as a percentage, relative to the highest level. 100%
indicates that clipping does not take place.
Level clipping is activated with the command SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​STAT ON
Parameters:
<Level>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 100 PCT
Increment: 1
*RST:
100 PCT
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of the maximum level.
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​STAT ON
activates level clipping.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​MODE <Mode>
The command sets the method for level clipping (Clipping).
Parameters:
<Mode>
VECTor|SCALar
VECTor
The reference level is the amplitude | i+jq |
SCALar
The reference level is the absolute maximum of the I and Q values.
Example:
*RST:
VECTor
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​MODE SCAL
selects the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values as the
reference level.
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of this maximum level.
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​STAT ON
activates level clipping.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​STATe <State>
The command activates level clipping (Clipping). The value is defined with the command
BB:​W3GPp:​CLIPping:​LEVel, the mode of calculation with the command BB:​
W3GPp:​CLIPping:​MODE.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
306
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​CLIP:​STAT ON
activates level clipping.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CRATe?
The command queries the set system chip rate. The output chip rate can be set with the
command SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​CRAT:​VAR.
Return values:
<Crate>
R3M8
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​CRAT?
queries the system chip rate.
Response:​ R3M8
the system chip rate is 3.8 Mcps.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CRATe:​VARiation <Variation>
The command enters the output chip rate.
The chip rate entry changes the output clock and the modulation bandwidth, as well as
the synchronization signals that are output. It does not affect the calculated chip
sequence.
Parameters:
<Variation>
Example:
float
Range:
1 Mcps to 5 Mcps
*RST:
3.84 MCps
BB:​W3GP:​CRAT:​VAR 4086001
sets the chip rate to 4.08 Mcps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​ILENgth <Ilength>
available for R&S WinIQSIM2 only
The command sets the impulse length (number of filter tabs).
Parameters:
<Ilength>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
1 to 128
*RST:
10
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​ILEN 10
sets the number of filter tabs to 10.
307
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​ILENgth:​AUTO <Auto>
available for R&S WinIQSIM2 only
The command acivates/deactivates the impulse length state. If activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check.
Parameters:
<Auto>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​ILEN:​AUTO ON
the most sensible parameters are selected automatically.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​OSAMpling <Osampling>
available for R&S WinIQSIM2 only
The command sets the upsampling factor.
Parameters:
<Osampling>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 32
*RST:
32
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​OSAM 32
sets the upsampling factor to 32.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​OSAMpling:​AUTO <Auto>
available for R&S WinIQSIM2 only
The command acivates/deactivates the upsampling factor state. If activated, the most
sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If
deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
Parameters:
<Auto>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​OSAM:​AUTO ON
the most sensible parameters are selected automatically.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​APCO25 <Apco25>
The command sets the roll-off factor for filter type APCO25.
Parameters:
<Apco25>
float
Range:
0.05 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.20
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
308
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​APCO25 0.2
sets the roll-off factor to 0.2 for filter type APCO25.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​COSine <Cosine>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<Cosine>
Example:
float
Range:
0.05 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.35
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​COS 0.35
sets the roll-off factor to 0.35 for filter type Cosine.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​GAUSs <Gauss>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Gauss filter type.
Parameters:
<Gauss>
Example:
float
Range:
0.15 to 2.50
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.50
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​GAUS 0.5
sets B x T to 0.5 for the Gauss filter type.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​LPASs <Lpass>
The command sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass (ACP opt.) filter type. The
minimum/maximum values depend on the current symbol rate:
Parameters:
<Lpass>
Example:
float
Range:
0.05 to 2.0
*RST:
0.5
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​LPAS 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​LPASSEVM <Lpassevm>
The command sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass (EVM opt.) filter type.
The minimum/maximum values depend on the current symbol rate:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
309
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
Parameters:
<Lpassevm>
Example:
float
Range:
0.05 to 2.0
*RST:
0.50
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​LPASSEVM 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​RCOSine <Rcosine>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Root Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<Rcosine>
Example:
float
Range:
0.05 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.22
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​RCOS 0.22
sets the roll-off factor to 0. 22 for filter type Root Cosine.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​PARameter:​SPHase <Sphase>
The command sets B x T for the Split Phase filter type.
Parameters:
<Sphase>
Example:
float
Range:
0.15 to 2.50
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
2.00
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​PAR:​SPH 0.5
sets B x T to 0.5 for the Split Phase filter type.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​FILTer:​TYPe <Type>
The command selects the filter type.
Parameters:
<Type>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
RCOSine|COSine|GAUSs|LGAuss|CONE|COF705|
COEQualizer|COFequalizer|C2K3x|APCO25|LPASs|
LPASSEVM|SPHase|RECTangle|DIRac|ENPShape|EWPShape
*RST:
RCOSine
BB:​W3GP:​FILT:​TYPE COS
sets the filter type COSine.
310
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
6.3 Trigger Settings
The trigger settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
EXTernal<ch>
The numeric suffix to EXTernal<ch> distinguishes between the external trigger via the
TRIGGER 1 (suffix 1) and TRIGGER 2 (suffix 2) connector.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute........................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXECute................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut...............................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay.................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit.................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:RMODe.................................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLENgth................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLUNit...................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SOURce................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay............................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit............................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp[:TRIGger]:SEQuence............................................................316
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​ARM:​EXECute
The command stops signal generation for trigger modes Armed_Auto and Armed_Retrigger. A subsequent internal or external trigger event restart signal generation.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SEQ ARET
sets Armed_Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal
generation to restart.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​ARM:​EXEC
signal generation is stopped.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started again.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​EXECute
The command executes a trigger. The internal trigger source must be selected using the
command BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR INT and a trigger mode other than AUTO must be
selected using the command :​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SEQ.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
311
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SEQ RETR
sets Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal generation to restart.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​EXEC
executes a trigger.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​SYNChronize:​OUTPut <Output>
Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event.
See also "Sync. Output to External Trigger" on page 60 for a detailed description of the
applications of this parameter.
Parameters:
<Output>
ON|OFF
ON
The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external
trigger event but because of the instrument's processing time the
first samples are cut off and no signal is outputted. After elapsing
of the internal processing time, the output signal is synchronous
to the trigger event.
OFF
The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and
starts with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted.
Example:
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GPp:​TRIG:​SOUR EXT
sets external triggering.
BB:​W3GPp:​TRIG:​EXT:​SYNC:​OUTP ON
enables synchrounous output to external trigger
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OBASeband:​DELay <Delay>
The command specifies the trigger delay (expressed as a number of chips) for triggering
by the trigger signal from the second path.
Parameters:
<Delay>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 chip2 to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OBAS:​DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 chips for the trigger.
312
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OBASeband:​INHibit <Inhibit>
The command specifies the number of chips by which a restart is to be inhibited following
a trigger event. This command applies only for triggering by the second path (two-path
instruments only).
Parameters:
<Inhibit>
Example:
float
Range:
0 chips to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 chips following a trigger event.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​RMODe?
The command queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes with
3GPP FDD modulation on.
Return values:
<Rmode>
STOP|RUN
STOP
the signal is not generated. A trigger event did not occur in the
triggered modes, or signal generation was stopped by the
command :​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​ARM:​EXECute (armed trigger
modes only).
RUN
the signal is generated. A trigger event occurred in the triggered
mode.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR EXT
sets external triggering via the TRIGGER 1 connector.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​MODE ARET
selects the Armed_Retrigger mode.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​RMOD?
queries the current status of signal generation.
Response:​ RUN
the signal is generated, an external trigger was executed.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
313
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SLENgth <Slength>
The command defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger
mode (SOUR:​BB:​W3GPp:​SEQ SING). The unit is defined with command SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​TRIG:​SLUNit.
It is possible to output deliberately just part of the frame, an exact sequence of the frame,
or a defined number of repetitions of the frame.
Parameters:
<Slength>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to (2^32-1) chips
*RST:
1 frame length
BB:​W3GP:​SEQ SING
sets trigger mode Single.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SLUN CHIP
sets unit chips for the entry of sequence length.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SLEN 200
sets a sequence length of 200 chips. The first 200 chips of the
current frame will be output after the next trigger event.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SLUNit <Slunit>
The command defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence
(SOUR:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIG:​SLEN) to be output in the Single trigger mode (SOUR:​BB:​
W3GPp:​SEQ SING).
Parameters:
<Slunit>
Example:
FRAMe|SLOT|CHIP|SEQuence
*RST:
SEQuence
BB:​W3GP:​SEQ SING
sets trigger mode Single.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SLUN FRAM
sets unit frames for the entry of sequence length.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SLEN 2
sets a sequence length of 2 frames. The current frame will be output twice after the next trigger event.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​SOURce <Source>
The command selects the trigger source.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
314
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal|EXTernal|BEXTernal|OBASeband
INTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the Trigger command BB:​
W3GP:​TRIGger:​EXECute or *TRG in the case of remote control
and by means of "Execute Trigger" in the case of manual
operation.
EXTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the signal on the TRIGGER 1
connector.
BEXTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the signal on the TRIGGER 2
connector.
OBASeband
Triggering is executed by means of the trigger signal from the
second path (two-path instruments only).
Example:
*RST:
INTernal
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR EXT
sets external triggering via the TRIGGER 1 connector.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​DELay <Delay>
The command specifies the trigger delay (expressed as a number of chips) for external
triggering.
Parameters:
<Delay>
Example:
float
Range:
0 chips to 2^32-1 chip
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR EXT
sets an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 chips for the trigger.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​INHibit <Inhibit>
The command specifies the number of chips by which a restart is to be inhibited following
a trigger event. This command applies only in the case of external triggering.
Parameters:
<Inhibit>
float
Range:
0 chips to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
0 chips
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
315
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SOUR EXT
selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 chips following a trigger event.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp[:​TRIGger]:​SEQuence <Sequence>
The command selects the trigger mode.
Parameters:
<Sequence>
AUTO|RETRigger|AAUTo|ARETrigger|SINGle
AUTO
The modulation signal is generated continuously.
RETRigger
The modulation signal is generated continuously. A trigger event
(internal or external) causes a restart.
AAUTo
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. After the trigger event the signal is generated
continuously. Signal generation is stopped with command
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​ARM:​EXEC and started again when a
trigger event occurs.
ARETrigger
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. The device automatically toggles to RETRIG mode. Every
subsequent trigger event causes a restart.
Signal generation is stopped with command SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
TRIG:​ARM:​EXEC and started again when a trigger event occurs.
SINGle
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified
with command SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​SLEN. Every subsequent
trigger event causes a restart.
Example:
*RST:
AUTO
BB:​W3GP:​SEQ AAUT
sets the Armed_auto trigger mode; the device waits for the first
trigger (e.g. with *TRG) and then generates the signal continuously.
6.4 Marker Settings
This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the markers.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
316
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
The marker delay settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
OUTput<ch>
The numeric suffix to OUTPut distinguishes between the available markers.
Only two markers are available for the R&S SMBV, i.e. the allowed values for the suffix
are 1 or 2.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed.............................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum.................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime.............................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime............................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod..............................................320
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut:​DELay:​FIXed <Fixed>
The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range
the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal. If a delay is entered in
setting ON but is outside this range, the maximum possible delay is set and an error
message is generated.
The numeric suffix in OUTPut has no significance for this command, since the setting
always affects every marker.
Parameters:
<Fixed>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​DEL:​FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay <Delay>
The command defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start
of the signal, expressed in terms of chips. Command :​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​
OUTPut:​DELay:​FIXed can be used to restrict the range of values to the dynamic range,
i.e. the range within which a delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the
marker and signal.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
0 chips to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
0 chips
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
317
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP2:​DEL 16000
sets a delay of 16000 chips for the signal on connector MARKER
2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay:​MAXimum?
The command queries the maximum marker delay for setting :​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIG:​
OUTP:​DEL:​FIX ON.
Return values:
<Maximum>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​DEL:​FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​DEL:​MAX
queries the maximum of the dynamic range.
Response:​ 20000
the maximum for the marker delay setting is 20000 chips.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​DELay:​MINimum?
The command queries the minimum marker delay for setting :​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​
OUTPut:​DELay:​FIXed ON.
Return values:
<Minimum>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​DEL:​FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​DEL:​MIN
queries the minimum of the dynamic range.
Response:​ 0
the minimum for the marker delay setting is 0 chips.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​MODE <Mode>
The command defines the signal for the selected marker output.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
318
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
Parameters:
<Mode>
SLOT|RFRame|CSPeriod|SFNR|RATio|USER | DPC|HFE
SLOT
A marker signal is generated at the start of each slot (every 2560
chips or 0.667 ms).
RFRame
A marker signal is generated at the start of each frame (every
38400 chips or 10 ms).
CSPeriod
A marker signal is generated at the start of every arbitrary
waveform sequence (depending on the setting for the arbitrary
waveform sequence length). If the signal does not contain an
arbitrary waveform component, a radio frame trigger is generated.
SFNR
A marker signal is generated at the start of every SFN period
(every 4096 frames).
RATio
A marker signal corresponding to the Time Off / Time On
specifications in the commands SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​
OUTPut:​OFFT and SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut:​
ONT is generated.
USER
A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every userdefined period. The period is defined with command SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​PERiod.
DPC
(the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV)
This marker is used internally. Marker 4 is set automatically to this
value if "Dynamic Power Control" is enabled.
HFE
(the parameter is not available for R&S SMBV)
This marker is used internally. Marker 4 is set automatically to this
value if "HARQ Feedback" is enabled.
Example:
*RST:
RFRame
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP2:​MODE SLOT
selects the slot marker signal on output MARKER 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​ONTime <Ontime>
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​OFFTime <Offtime>
The command sets the number of chips in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which
the marker signal in setting SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut:​MODE RATio on
the marker outputs is OFF.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
319
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings
Parameters:
<Offtime>
Example:
float
Range:
1 cips to 2^24-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
1 chip
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP2:​OFFT 2000
sets an OFF time of 2000 chips for marker signal 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TRIGger:​OUTPut<ch>:​PERiod <Period>
The command sets the repetition rate for the signal at the marker outputs, expressed in
terms of chips. The setting is only valid for selection USER in :​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP:​
MODE.
Parameters:
<Period>
Example:
float
Range:
1 chip to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
1 Frame (38 400 Chips)
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP2:​MODE USER
selects the user marker for the signal on connector MARKER 2.
BB:​W3GP:​TRIG:​OUTP2:​PER 1600
sets a period of 1600 chips, i.e. the marker signal is repeated every
1600th chip.
6.5 Clock Settings
This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the clock.
The clock settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE.....................................................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MULTiplier...............................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce..................................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SYNChronization:EXECute........................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE...........................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​MODE <Mode>
The command enters the type of externally supplied clock (:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SOURce
EXTernal).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
320
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings
When MCHip is used, a multiple of the chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector
and the chip clock is derived internally from this. The multiplier is entered with the command :​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​MULTiplier.
For two-path instruments, the only numerical suffix allowed for SOURce is 1, since the
external clock source is permanently allocated to path A.
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
CHIP|MCHip
*RST:
Chip
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​MODE CHIP
selects clock type Chip, i.e. the supplied clock is a chip clock.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​MULTiplier <Multiplier>
The command specifies the multiplier for clock type Multiplied (:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​
MODE MCHip) in the case of an external clock source.
For two-path instruments, the only numerical suffix allowed for SOURce is 1, since the
external clock source is permanently allocated to path A.
Parameters:
<Multiplier>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 64
Increment: 1
*RST:
4
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SOUR EXT
selects the external clock source. The clock is supplied via the
CLOCK connector.
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​MODE MCH
selects clock type Multiplied, i.e. the supplied clock has a rate
which is a multiple of the chip rate.
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​MULT 12
the multiplier for the external clock rate is 12.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SOURce <Source>
The command selects the clock source.
For two-path instruments, selecting EXTernal is only possible for path A, since the
external clock source is permanently allocated to path A. Selection AINternal is only
possible for path B.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
321
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal|EXTernal|AINTernal
INTernal
The internal clock reference is used.
EXTernal
The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connector.
AINTernal
The clock source of path A is used for path B.
Example:
*RST:
INTernal
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SOUR EXT
selects an external clock reference. The clock is supplied via the
CLOCK connector.
BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​MODE CHIP
specifies that a chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SYNChronization:​EXECute
Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument's settings required for the synchronization mode, set with the command BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SYNC:​MODE.
Example:
:​BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SYNC:​MODE MAST
the instrument is configured to work as a master one.
:​BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SYNC:​EXEC
all synchronization's settings are adjusted accordingly.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​CLOCk:​SYNChronization:​MODE <Mode>
Selects the synchronization mode.
This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of several
connected R&S SMBVs.
Note: If several instruments are connected, the connecting cables from the master
instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must
have the same length and type. This applies for all connections, the REF OUT to REF IN
connection, the MARKER 1 to TRIGGER connection and the CLOCK OUT to CLOCK IN
connection. Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
322
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Parameters:
<Mode>
NONE|MASTer|SLAVe
NONE
The instrument is working in stand-alone mode.
MASTer
The instrument provides all connected instrument with its
synchronisation (including the trigger signal) and reference clock
signal.
SLAVe
The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock
signal from another instrument working in a master mode.
Example:
*RST:
NONE
:​BB:​W3GP:​CLOC:​SYNC:​MODE MAST
the instrument is configured to work as a master one.
6.6 Test Models and Predefined Settings
The R&S Signal Generator gives you the opportunity to generate standardized or predefined test settings:
●
Test Models:
– election of test models for the downlink in accordance with 3GPP standard
25.141.
–
●
Selection of non-standardized test models for the uplink.
Predefined Settings:
Definition of Predefined Settings for base station 1 which enable the creation of highly
complex scenarios for the downlink by presetting the channel table of base station 1.
The settings take effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​
PPARameter:​EXECute.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:CRESt.............................................................323
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:COUNt..................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:SRATe..................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.........................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:SRATe...............................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:STATe...............................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCHannels......................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation...................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:CATalog.....................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation..................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation:CATalog.....................................328
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​CRESt <Crest>
This commands selects the desired range for the crest factor of the test scenario. The
crest factor of the signal is kept in the desired range by automatically setting appropriate
channelization codes and timing offsets.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
323
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
The settings of commands
●
BB:​W3GP:​BST<n>:​CHAN<n>:​CCODe and
●
BB:​W3GP:​BST<n>:​CHAN<n>:​TOFFset
are adjusted according to the selection.
Parameters:
<Crest>
MINimum|AVERage|WORSt
MINimum
The crest factor is minimized. The channelization codes are
distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are
increased by 3 per channel.
AVERage
An average crest factor is set. The channelization codes are
distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are
all set to 0.
WORSt
The crest factor is set to an unfavorable value (i.e. maximum). The
channelization codes are assigned in ascending order. The timing
offsets are all set to 0.
Example:
*RST:
MINimum
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​CRES WORS
sets the crest factor to an unfavorable value.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​DPCH:​COUNt <Count>
This command sets the number of activated DPCHs. The maximum number is the ratio
of the chip rate and the symbol rate (maximum 512 at the lowest symbol rate of 7.5 ksps).
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
Parameters:
<Count>
Example:
integer
Range:
0 to 512
*RST:
10
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​DPCH:​COUN 21
the predefined signal contains 21 DPCHs.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​DPCH:​SRATe <Srate>
This command sets the symbol rate of DPCHs.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
324
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Parameters:
<Srate>
Example:
D7K5|D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k
*RST:
D30k
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​DPCH:​SRAT D240K
sets the symbol rate of the DPCHs to 240ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​EXECute
This command presets the channel table of base station 1 with the parameters defined
by the PPARameter commands.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​EXEC
configures the signal sequence as defined by the :​PPARameter
commands.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCCPch:​SRATe <Srate>
The command sets the symbol rate of S-CCPCH.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
Parameters:
<Srate>
Example:
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k
*RST:
D30k
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​SCCP:​SRAT D240K
'sets the SCCPCH to 240 ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCCPch:​STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the S-CCPCH.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​PPAR:​SCCP:​STAT ON
S-CCPCH is activated.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​SCHannels <Schannels>
The command activates/deactivates the PCPICH, PSCH, SSCH and PCCPCH. These
"special channels" are required by a user equipment for synchronization.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
325
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
The setting takes effect only after execution of command BB:​W3GPp:​PPARameter:​
EXECute.
Parameters:
<Schannels>
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation <Bstation>
The command selects a test model defined by the standard for the downlink.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
326
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Parameters:
<Bstation>
string
Test_Model_1_04channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_1_8channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_1_16channels
Measurement: Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 16 Channels
Test_Model_1_32channels
Measurement: Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 32 Channels
Test_Model_1_64channels
Measurement: Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 64 Channels
Test_Model_2
Measurement: Output power dynamics
Test_Model_3_04channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_3_8channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_3_16channels
Measurement: Peak code domain error; 16 Channels
Test_Model_3_32channels
Measurement: Peak code domain error; 32 Channels
Test_Model_4
Measurement: Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is not
active
Test_Model_4_CPICH
Measurement: Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is
active
Test_Model_5_04_4channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_5_30_8channels
Measurement: Error Vector Magnitude; 8 High Speed Channels
Test_Model_5_14_4channels
Measurement: Error Vector Magnitude; 4 High Speed Channels
Test_Model_5_06_2channels
Measurement: Error Vector Magnitude; 2 High Speed Channels
Test_Model_6_04_4channels
Test models for Home BS
Test_Model_6_30_8channels
Measurement: Relative Code Domain Error, only applicable for
64QAM modulated codes
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​TMOD:​BST 'Test_Model_1_64channels'
selects the test model Measurement: Spectrum emission mask
ACLR; 64 Channels.
327
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation:​CATalog?
The command queries the list of test models defined by the standard for the downlink.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​TMOD:​BST:​CAT?
queries the list of available test models for the downlink transmission direction.
Response:​ Test_Model_1_16channels,​...
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​MSTation <Mstation>
he command selects a test model that is not defined by the standard for the uplink.
Parameters:
<Mstation>
string
DPCCH_DPDCH_60ksps
Preset, Uplink, UE1 on, DPDCH + DPCCH, Overall symbol rate
60 ksps.
DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps
Preset, Uplink, UE1 on, DPDCH + DPCCH, Overall symbol rate
960 ksps
TS34121_R6_Table_C_10_1_4_Subtest4
Uplink test model according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 6,
Table C.10.1.4.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_10_1_4_Subtest3
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table C.10.1.4.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_3_Subtest2
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH and E-DCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8,
Table C.11.1.3.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_4_Subtest1
Uplink test model for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH and E-DCH with 16QAM according to 3GPP TS 34.121
Release 8, Table C.11.1.4.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​TMOD:​MST 'DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps'
selects the test model with a symbol rate of 960 ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​SETTing:​TMODel:​MSTation:​CATalog?
The command queries the list of non-standardized test models for the uplink.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
328
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​SETT:​TMOD:​MST:​CAT?
queries the list of available test models
Response:​ DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps,​DPCCH_DPDCH_60ksps
Usage:
Query only
6.7 Setting Base Stations
The SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation system contains commands for setting base stations. The commands of this system only take effect if the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the DOWN transmission direction is selected and the particular base station is
enabled:
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe ON
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK DOWN
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation2:​STATe ON
BSTation<st>
The numeric suffix to BSTation determines the base station. The value range is 1 .. 4.
If the suffix is ommited, BS1 is selected.
CHANnel<ch>
In case of remote control, suffix counting for channels corresponds to the suffix counting
with 3GPP FDD (channel 0 to channel 138). SCPI prescribes that suffix 1 is the default
state and used when no specific suffix is specified. Therefore, channel 1 (and not channel
0) is selected when no suffix is specified.
The commands for setting the enhanced channels of base station 1 are described in
chapter 6.8, "Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1", on page 373.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​OCNS:​MODE <Mode>
The command selects the scenario for setting the OCNS channels.
Three different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one standard scenario and
two scenarios for testing HSDPA channels.
Parameters:
<Mode>
STANdard|HSDPa|HSDP2
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
STANdard
329
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​OCNS:​MODE HSDP
selects the scenario for testing the high-speed channels.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​OCNS:​STAT ON
activates the OCNS channels with the settings defined in the
standard.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​OCNS:​STATe <State>
The command activates OCNS channels, as defined in the standard.
Three different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one standard scenario and
two scenarios for testing HSDPA channels. The required scenario can be selected with
the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​OCNS:​MODE.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​OCNS:​MODE STAN
selects the standard scenario.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​OCNS:​STAT ON
activates the OCNS channels with the settings defined in the
standard.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for all the base stations. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All base station settings are preset.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​PRES
resets all the base station settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel:​HSDPa:​HSET:​PRESet
The command calls the default settings of the channel table for the HSDPA H-Set mode.
Channels 12 to 17 are preset for HSDPA H-Set 1.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRE
presets the H-Set.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel:​PRESet
The command calls the default settings of the channel table.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
330
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​CHAN:​PRES
presets all channels of the base station.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​AICH:​ASLOt <Aslot>
The command selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
Parameters:
<Aslot>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 15
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN7:​AICH:​ASLO 5
defines the slot to transmit the burst.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​AICH:​SAPattern
<Sapattern>
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
This field is used by the base station to acknowledge, refuse or ignore requests of up to
16 user equipments.
Parameters:
<Sapattern>
Example:
<16 bit pattern>
*RST:
+000000000000
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN7:​AICH:​SAP
"+000000000000"
sets the bit pattern to "+000000000000" (ACK).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​APAIch:​ASLOt <Aslot>
The command selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
Parameters:
<Aslot>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 15
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN7:​APAI:​ASLO 5
defines the slot to transmit the burst.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​APAIch:​SAPattern
<Sapattern>
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
331
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
This field is used by the base station to acknowledge, refuse or ignore requests of up to
16 user equipments.
Parameters:
<Sapattern>
Example:
<16 bit pattern>
*RST:
"+000000000000"
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN8:​APAI:​SAP
"+000000000000"
sets the bit pattern to "+" (ACK).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​CCODe <Ccode>
The command sets the channelization code (formerly the spreading code number). The
range of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the channel.
The standard assigns a fixed channelization code to some channels (P-CPICH, for
example, always uses channelization code 0).
[chip-rate(=3.84Mcps) / symbol_rate] - 1
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters
are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<Ccode>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 511
Increment: 1
*RST:
Depends on the channel type.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN15:​CCOD 123
sets channelization code 123 for channel 15 of base station 1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the data fields of the specified channel.
For enhanced channels with channel coding, the data source is set with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA on page 386.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
332
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|DLISt|ZERO | ONE|
PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command :​
BB:​W3GPp:​BST:​CHANnel:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command :​BB:​W3GPp:​BST:​CHANnel:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the data fields of channel 13 of base
station 2, the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DATA:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA:​DSELect
<Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the
file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\DM\IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DATA:​DLIS '3gpp_list1'
selects file '3gpp_list1' as the data source. This file must be in
the directory <root>\Lists\DM\IqData and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
333
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DATA:​PATTern
<Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum length
is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
< 64 bit pattern>
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DATA:​PATT
defines the bit pattern.
#H3F,​8
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​MCODe
<Mcode>
The command activates multicode transmission for the selected channel (ON) or deactivates it (OFF). The multicode channels are destined for the same receiver, that is to
say, are part of a radio link. The first channel of this group is used as the master channel.
The common components (Pilot, TPC and TCFI) for all the channels are then spread
using the spreading code of the master channel.
Suffix:
<ch>
11 ... 138
This setting is only valid for DPCHs.
Parameters:
<Mcode>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​MCOD ON
activates the simulation in multicode mode for channel 12 of base
station 2.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​MCOD ON
activates the simulation in multicode mode for channel 13 of base
station 2. Channel 12 is the master channel.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​PLENgth
<Plength>
The command sets the length of the pilot fields. The range of values for this parameter
depends on the channel type and the symbol rate. To achieve a constant slot length, the
data fields are lengthened or shortened depending on the pilot length, as defined in the
standard.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters
are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
334
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Plength>
Example:
BIT0|BIT2|BIT4|BIT8|BIT16
*RST:
BIT4, bei S-CCPCH 0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​PLEN BIT2
sets the length of the pilot fields for channel 12 of base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​PILot
<Pilot>
The command sets an offset to the set channel power for the pilot field.
Parameters:
<Pilot>
Example:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​POFF:​PIL -2 dB
in the pilot field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​TFCI
<Tfci>
The command sets an offset to the set channel power for the TFCI field.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​POFF:​PIL -2 dB
in the TFCI field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​POFFset:​TPC
<Tpc>
The command sets an offset to the set channel power for the TPC field.
This setting is only valid for the DPCHs.
Parameters:
<Tpc>
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
335
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​POFF:​TPC -2 dB
in the TPC field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI <Tfci>
The command enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) for the selected channel of the specified base station. The TFCI field is always filled
with exactly 10 bits with leading zeros.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 1023
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​TFCI 22
sets the value 22 for the TFCI field of channel 12 of base station
2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe
<State>
The command activates the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Identifier) for the
selected channel of the specified base station.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters
are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​DPCC:​TFCI:​STAT OFF
sets that the TFCI field of channel 12 of base station 2 is not used.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA
<Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
336
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Data>
DLISt|ZERO | ONE|PATTern
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern. The maximum
length is 32 bits.
Example:
*RST:
PATTern
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of channel 13 of base
station 2, the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​
DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the
file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
<data list name>
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\DM\IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​DSEL
'tpc_ch4'
selects the file tpc_ch4 as the data source. This file must be
in the directory <root>\Lists\DM\IqData and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
337
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum bit
pattern length is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<32 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0,1
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern for the TPC field of channel 13 of base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MISuse
<Misuse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) of the
selected channel for controlling the channel powers of these channels of the specified
base station.
The bit pattern (see commands :​W3GPp:​BSTation<n>:​CHANnel<n>:​DPCCh:​
TPC...) of the TPC field of each channel is used to control the channel power. A "1"
leads to an increase of channel powers, a "0" to a reduction of channel powers. Channel
power is limited to the range 0 dB to -80 dB. The step width of the change is defined with
the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​
DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep.
Parameters:
<Misuse>
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep
<Pstep>
The command defines the step width for the change of channel powers in the case of
"mis-" use of the TPC field.
Parameters:
<Pstep>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
-10.0 dB to 10.0 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
13 of base station 2 to 1 dB.
338
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​READ
<Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field.
The bit pattern is defined with the commands :​BB:​W3GPp:​BST<i>:​CHANnel<n>:​
DPCCh:​TPC... .
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous|S0A|S1A|S01A|S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
Example:
*RST:
CONTinuous
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN13:​DPCC:​TPC:​READ S0A
the bit pattern is used once, after which a 0 sequence is generated
(applies to channel 13 of base station 2).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
339
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Data>
DLISt|ZERO | ONE|PATTern
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PATTern
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of channel 11 of base
station 1, the bit pattern defined with the following command:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT
#H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the
file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
<data list name>
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA DLIS
selects the "Data Lists" data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\DM\IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​DSEL
'tpc_ch4'
selects the file 'tpc_ch4' as the data source. This file must be in
the directory <root>\Lists\DM\IqData and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
340
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum bit
pattern length is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<32 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0,1
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT
#H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern for the TPC field of channel 11 of base station 1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
MISuse <Misuse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) of the
selected channel for controlling the channel powers of these channels of the specified
base station.
The bit pattern (see command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern) of the TPC field of each channel
is used to control the channel power. A "1" leads to an increase of channel powers, a "0"
to a reduction of channel powers. Channel power is limited to the range 0 dB to -80 dB.
The step width of the change is defined with the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep.
Parameters:
<Misuse>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​MIS ON
activates regulation of channel power for channel 11 of base station 1 via the bit pattern of the associated TPC field.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​PST 1dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
11 of base station 1 to 1 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
PSTep <Pstep>
The command defines the step width for the change of channel powers in the case of
"mis-" use of the TPC field.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
341
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Pstep>
Example:
float
Range:
-10.0 dB to 10.0 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​PST 1.5dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
11 of base station 1 to 1.5 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​FDPCh:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field.
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous|S0A|S1A|S01A|S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
Example:
*RST:
CONTinuous
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​FDPC:​DPCC:​TPC:​READ S0A
the bit pattern is used once, after which a 0 sequence is generated
(applies to channel 11 of base station 1).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​BMODe[:​
STATe] <State>
The command activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy data are sent during transmission brakes.
Parameters:
<State>
ON|OFF
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON
342
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​BMOD OFF
deactivates burst mode, dummy data are sent during the transmission brakes.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​CVPB <Cvpb>
The command switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM and 64QAM
mapping. The re-arrengement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
Suffix:
<ch>
11 ... 138
Parameters:
<Cvpb>
Example:
0|1|2|3
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​CVPB 1
selects interchange of MSBs with LSBs.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​AMODe
<Amode>
Activates/deactivates the advanced mode in which the H-Set will be generated by the
ARB.
The parameter can be configured only for H-Sets 1 - 5.
For H-Sets 6 - 10 and User it is always enabled.
Parameters:
<Amode>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF (H-Sets 1..5); ON (H-Sets 6..9, User);
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRED P1QAM16
selects H-Set 1 (16QAM).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON
enables advanced mode for the selected H-Set.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
BCBTti<di>?
Displays the binary channel bits per TTI and per stream.
The value displayed is calculated upon the values sets with the commands:
●
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
MODulation<di>,
●
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​SRATe and
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
343
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
●
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
HSCCode.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Return values:
<Bcbtti>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE MIMO
sets the H-set type.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​BCBT2?
queries the binary channel bits per TTI for stream 2.
Response:​ "4800"
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
BPAYload<di>?
The command queries the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number of transport layer bits sent in each subframe.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Return values:
<Bpayload>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​BPAY2?
queries the payload of the information bit.
Response:​ "256"
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​CLENgth
<Clength>
The command queries the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels assigned to the
HS-SCCH.
Parameters:
<Clength>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1 to 15
5
344
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​CLEN?
queries the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels
assigned to the HS-SCCH.
Response:​ "4"
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
CRATe<di>?
Queries the resulting coding rate per stream.
The coding rate is calculated as a relation between the "Information Bit Payload" and
"Binary Channel Bits per TTI".
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Return values:
<Crate>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​CRAT2?
queries the coding rate of stream 2.
Response:​ "0.658"
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA
<Data>
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|
DLISt
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​PATTern.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​DSELect
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
345
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the transport channel
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA:​PATT
defines the bit pattern.
#H3F,​8
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​
DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the
file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
string
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\H-Sets'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA:​DSEL
'hset_ch11'
selects the file hset_ch11 as the data source. This file must be
in the directory <root>\H-Sets and have the file extension
*.dm_iqd.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​DATA:​
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum bit
pattern length is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<32 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0,1
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the H-set
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN11:​HSDP:​HSET:​DATA:​PATT
8
defines the bit pattern for the H-set.
#H3F,
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​HARQ:​
LENgth <Length>
Sets the number of HARQ processes. This value determines the distribution of the payload in the subframes.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
346
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Length>
Example:
integer
Range:
1 to 8
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HARQ:​LENG?
queries the number of HARQ processes.
Response:​"2"
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​HARQ:​
MODE <Mode>
Sets the HARQ Simulation Mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CACK|CNACk
CACK
New data is used for each new TTI.
CNACk
Enables NACK simulation, i.e. depending on the sequence
selected for the parameter Redundancy Version Parameter
Sequence packets are retransmitted.
Example:
*RST:
CACK
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HARQ:​MODE CNAC
sets Constant NACK HARQ Mode.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
HSCCode <Hsccode>
Sets the channelization code of the HS-SCCH.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the same Channelization Codes as the codes used
for your physical channels.
Parameters:
<Hsccode>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0 to 17
5
347
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HSCC 10
sets channalization code 10 for the HS-SCCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
MODulation<di> <Modulation>
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 only.
For HS-SCCH Type 2, the available modulation scheme is QPSK only.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Modulation>
Example:
QPSK|QAM16|QAM64
*RST:
HSQP
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE MIMO
sets MIMO operation mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​MOD1 HS64Q
sets the modulation of stream 2 to 64QAM
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
NAIBitrate?
The command queries the average data rate on the transport layer (Nominal Average
Information Bitrate).
Return values:
<Naibitrate>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​NAIB?
queries the average data rate on the transport layer.
Response:​"455"
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
PREDefined <Predefined>
The command selects the H-Set and the modulation according to TS 25.101 Annex A.7.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
348
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Predefined>
Example:
P1QPSK|P1QAM16|P2QPSK|P2QAM16|P3QPSK|P3QAM16|
P4QPSK|P5QPSK|P6QPSK|P6QAM16|P7QPSK|P8QAM64|
P9QAM16QPSK|P10QPSK|P10QAM16|P11QAM64QAM16|
P12QPSK|USER
*RST:
P1QPSK
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRED P3QPSK
selects H-Set 3 (QPSK).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
PWPattern <Pwpattern>
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see chapter 3.14, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 29).
Parameters:
<Pwpattern>
Example:
string
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PWP "0,​1,​3"
selects the pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
RVParameter<di> <Rvparameter>
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant ACK.
The command sets the Redundancy Version Parameter. This value determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (QAM16 modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter is always 0.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Rvparameter>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0 to 7
0
349
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HARQ:​MODE CACK
sets Constant ACK HARQ Mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​RVP 7
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter to 7.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE MIMO
selects HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​RVP2 4
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter of stream 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
RVPSequence<di> <Rvpsequence>
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant NACK.
Enters a sequence of Redundancy Version Parameters per stream. The value of the RV
parameter determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation
Arrangement (16/64QAM modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
The sequence has a length of maximum 30 values. The sequence length determines the
maximum number of retransmissions. New data is used after reaching the end of the
sequence.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence
is a read-only parameter.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Rvpsequence>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
350
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HARQ:​MODE CNAC
sets Constant NACK HARQ Mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE MIMO
selects HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​RVPS2 '0,​1,​3,​2,​0,​
1,​2,​3'
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter sequence of stream 2.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE LOP
selects HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​RVPS?
queries the Redundancy Version Parameter sequence.
Response:​ 0,​3,​4
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​S64Qam
<S64qam>
Enables/disables UE support of 64QAM.
This command is enabled only for HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and 16QAM
modulation.
In case this parameter is disabled, i.e. the UE does not support 64QAM, the xccs,7 bit is
used for channelization information.
Parameters:
<S64qam>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE NORM
selects HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​MOD QAM16
sets 16QAM modulation.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​S64Q ON
enables UE to support 64QAM
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​SCCode
<Sccode>
Sets the channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set. The channelization codes of the rest of the HS-PDSCHs in this H-Set are set automatically.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
351
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument
equipped with an older firmware, set the same Channelization Codes as the codes used
for your physical channels.
Parameters:
<Sccode>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 15
*RST:
8
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SCC 10
sets channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth?
Displays the suggested ARB sequence length.
The suggested ARB sequence length is the calculated minimum length that depends on
several parameters, like TTI distance, Number of HARQ Processes, HARQ Mode, HARQ
cycles, RV Parameter Sequence, HS-SCCH Type, Precoding Weight Pattern and Stream
2 Active Pattern.
When working in Advanced Mode (W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON), it is
recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the suggested one.
Return values:
<Slength>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SLEN?
queries the suggested ABR sequence length.
Response:​ 21
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SLEN:​ADJ
sets the ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SLENgth:​ADJust
Sets the ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
When working in Advanced Mode (W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON), it is
recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the suggested one.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
352
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SLEN?
queries the suggested ABR sequence length.
Response:​ 21
BB:​W3GP:​SLEN?
queries the current ABR sequence length.
Response:​ 12
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SLEN:​ADJ
sets the ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
BB:​W3GP:​SLEN?
queries the current ABR sequence length.
Response:​ 21
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
SPATtern<di>?
Queries the distribution of packets over time. A "-" indicates no packet
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Return values:
<Spattern>
string
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN15:​HSDP:​TTID 3
sets the TTI
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​HARQ:​LENG 2
sets the number of HARQ processes
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​SPAT1?
queries the signaling pattern for stream 1
Response:​ 0,​-,​-1,​-,​-
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
STAPattern <Stapattern>
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
Parameters:
<Stapattern>
string
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1
353
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​STAP "11-"
selects the pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
INDex<di> <Index>
Selects the Index ki for the corresponding table and stream, as described in in 3GPP TS
25.321.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Index>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 62
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​IND2 25
sets the Index ki
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
REFerence <Reference>
While working in less operation mode, this command is signaled instead of the command
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​CHAN:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​IND.
Parameters:
<Reference>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 3
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE LOP
selects less operation mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​REF 2
sets the reference.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TBS:​
TABLe<di> <Table>
Selects Table 0 or Table 1 as described in in 3GPP TS 25.321.
For HS-PDSCH Modulation set to 64QAM, only Table 1 is available.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
354
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Table>
Example:
TAB0|TAB1
*RST:
TAB0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TBS:​TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​TYPE
<Type>
Sets the HS-SCCH type.
Parameters:
<Type>
NORMal|LOPeration|MIMO
NORMal
Normal operation mode.
LOPeration
HS-SCCH less operation mode.
MIMO
HS-SCCH Type 3 mode is defined for MIMO operation.
Enabling this operation mode, enables the MIMO parameters [:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​
HSDPa:​MIMO:​CVPB<di>, [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
MODulation<di>, [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​PWPattern
and [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​STAPattern and all Stream 2
parameters.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity and antenna 1.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​TYPE MIMO
sets MIMO operation mode.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
UECategory?
Queries the UE category number.
Return values:
<Uecategory>
float
Range:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0 to 5000
355
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​PRED P3QPSK
selects H-Set 3 (QPSK).
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​UEC?
queries the UE Category.
Response:​ 5
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​UEID
<Ueid>
The command sets the UE identity which is the HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier (HRNTI) defined in 3GPP TS 25.331: "Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol Specification".
Parameters:
<Ueid>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 65535
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​UEID 256
sets the UE identity.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​HSET:​
VIBSize<di> <Vibsize>
Sets the size of the Virtual IR Buffer (Number of SMLs per HARQ-Process) per stream.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Vibsize>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 304000
Increment: 800
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​HSET:​VIBS1 9600
sets the Virtual IR Buffer Size of stream 1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
CVPB<di> <Cvpb>
The command switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM and 64QAM
mapping.
The re-arrengement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
356
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Cvpb>
0|1|2|3
Example:
Range:
0 to 3
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MIMO:​CVPB2 1
selects interchange of MSBs with LSBs for stream 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
MODulation<di> <Modulation>
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option SMx-K59 only.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Modulation>
Example:
QPSK|QAM16|QAM64
*RST:
HSQP
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MIMO:​MOD1 HS64Q
sets the modulation of stream 2 to 64QAM
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
PWPattern <Pwpattern>
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see chapter 3.14, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 29).
Parameters:
<Pwpattern>
Example:
string
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MIMO:​PWP "0,​1,​3
selects the pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MIMO:​
STAPattern <Stapattern>
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
357
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Stapattern>
Example:
string
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MIMO:​STAP "11-"
selects the pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​MODE <Mode>
The command selects the HSDPA mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CONTinuous|PSF0|PSF1|PSF2|PSF3|PSF4|HSET
CONTinuous
The high speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is
defined in test model 5.
PSFx
The high speed channel is generated in packet mode. The start of
the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the first
packet is sent.
HSET
The high speed channels are preset according to TS 25.1401
Annex A.7, H-Set.
Example:
*RST:
CONTinuous
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​MODE PSF1
selects packet mode for channel 12. The first packet is sent in
packet subframe 1 (PSF1).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​TTIDistance
<Ttidistance>
The command selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode. The
distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of 1
means continuous generation.
Parameters:
<Ttidistance>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 16
*RST:
5
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​TTID 2
selects an Inter TTI Distance of 2 subframes.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​POWer <Power>
The command sets the channel power relative to the powers of the other channels. This
setting also determines the starting power of the channel for Misuse TPC and Dynamic
Power Control.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
358
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
With the command SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer:​ADJust, the power of all the activated
channels is adapted so that the total power corresponds to 0 dB. This will not change the
power ratio among the individual channels.
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​POW -10dB
sets the channel power of channel 12 of base station 2 to -10 dB
relative to the power of the other channels.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​SFORmat <Sformat>
The command sets the slot format of the selected channel. The value range depends on
the selected channel.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters
are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<Sformat>
float
*RST:
Example:
DPCH 8; S-CCPCH (CHAN6) 0; PDSCH (CHAN10)
0; DL-DPCCH (CHAN11) 0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​SFOR 8
selects slot format 8 for channel 12 of base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​SRATe <Srate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the selected channel. The value range depends
on the selected channel and the selected slot format.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters
are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<Srate>
D7K5|D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
DPCHs D30K; CHAN1..10 D15K; DL-DPCCH
(CHAN11) D7K5;
359
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​SRAT D120K
sets the symbol rate for channel 12 of base station 2 to 120 ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​STATe <State>
The command activates the selected channel.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​STAT OFF
deactivates channel 12 of base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​TOFFset <Toffset>
The command sets the timing offset. The timing offset defines the number of chips by
which the absolute starting time of the frames (slot 0) is shifted relative to the start of the
scrambling code sequence: TOffset * 256 Chips. This procedure is used to reduce the
crest factor.
Note:
For F-DPCH channels, the value range is 0 to 9.
Parameters:
<Toffset>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 149
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​TOFF 20
defines a frame shift relative to the scrambling code sequence of
20*256 chips.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel type.
The channel type is fixed for channel numbers 0 ... 8, for the remaining channel numbers,
the choice lies between the relevant standard channels and the high-speed channels.
Parameters:
<Type>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
PCPich|SCPich|PSCH|SSCH|PCCPch|SCCPch|PICH|AICH|
APAich|PDSCh|DPCCh|DPCH|HSSCch|HSQPsk|HSQam|
HS16Qam|HS64Qam|HSMimo|EAGCh|ERGCh|EHICh|FDPCh
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CHAN12:​TYPE HSQP
selects channel type HS-PDS, QPSK for channel 12 of the channel
table.
360
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
IFCoding <Ifcoding>
Enables/disables the information coding. Disabling this parameter corresponds to a
standard operation, i.e. no coding is performed and the data is sent uncoded.
Enabling this parameter allows you to configure the way the data is coded.
Parameters:
<Ifcoding>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​IFC ON
enables information coding.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​AGSCope <Agscope>
Sets the scope of the selected grant. According to the TS 25.321, the impact of each
grant on the UE depends on this parameter.
For E-DCH TTI = 10ms, the Absolute Grant Scope is always All HARQ Processes.
Suffix:
<di0>
1 .. 9
Parameters:
<Agscope>
Example:
ALL|PER
*RST:
ALL
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​IFC ON
enables information coding.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIL 10
enables 10 TTIs for configuration.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTI9:​AGSC PER
sets the grant scope to Per HARQ Process.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​AGVIndex <Agvindex>
Sets the Index for the selected TTI. According to the TS 25.212 (4.10.1A.1), there is a
cross-reference between the grant's index and the grant value.
The TTI configuration of the table is used cyclically. Depending on the selection made
for the parameter E-DCH TTI, each table row corresponds to a 2ms TTI or to a 10ms TTI.
Suffix:
<di0>
1 .. 9
Parameters:
<Agvindex>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0 to 31
0
361
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​IFC ON
enables information coding.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIL 10
enables 10 TTIs for configuration.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTI9:​AGVI 20
sets the absolute grant value index
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTI<di0>:​UEID <Ueid>
Sets the UE Id for the selected TTI.
Suffix:
<di0>
1 .. 9
Parameters:
<Ueid>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 65535
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​IFC ON
enables information coding.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIL 10
enables 10 TTIs for configuration.
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTI9:​UEID 2000
sets the UE ID
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTICount <Tticount>
Sets the number of configurable TTIs.
Parameters:
<Tticount>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 10
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIC 5
sets the number of configurable TTIs.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EAGCh:​
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EAGC:​TTIE 2ms
sets the processing duration to 2 ms.
362
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​CTYPe
<Ctype>
The command selects the cell type.
Parameters:
<Ctype>
Example:
SERVing|NOSERVing
*RST:
SERVing
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN9:​HSUP:​EHIC:​CTYP SERV
selects the serving cell type.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​DTAU
<Dtau>
The command sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Parameters:
<Dtau>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 149
*RST:
0
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSUP:​EHIC:​DTAU 5
selects the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​ETAU?
The command queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Return values:
<Etau>
float
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSUP:​EHIC:​ETAU?
queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
RGPAttern <Rgpattern>
The command sets the bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
For Non Serving Cell only "+" (ACK) and "0" (no signal) is allowed. For Serving Cells only
"+" (ACK) and "-" (NACK) is allowed.
Parameters:
<Rgpattern>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
<bit pattern>
*RST:
+
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EHIC:​RGPA "+"
sets the bit pattern to "+" (ACK).
363
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
SSINdex <Ssindex>
The command sets the value that identifies the user equipment. The values are defined
in TS 25.211.
Parameters:
<Ssindex>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 39
*RST:
0
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN9:​HSUP:​EHIC:​SSIN 0
sets the value to identify the user equipment.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​EHICh:​
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​EHIC:​TTIE 2ms
sets the processing duration to 2 ms.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
CTYPe <Ctype>
The command selects the cell type.
Parameters:
<Ctype>
Example:
SERVing|NOSERVing
*RST:
SERVing
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN9:​HSUP:​ERGC:​CTYP SERV
selects the serving cell type.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​DTAU
<Dtau>
The command sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Parameters:
<Dtau>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 to 149
*RST:
0
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSUP:​ERGC:​DTAU 5
sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
364
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
ETAU?
The command queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Return values:
<Etau>
float
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN12:​HSUP:​ERGC:​ETAU?
queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
RGPAttern <Rgpattern>
The command sets the bit pattern for the Relative Grant Pattern field.
Parameters:
<Rgpattern>
Example:
string
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​ERGC:​RGPA "-"
sets the bit pattern to "-" (Down).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
SSINdex <Ssindex>
The command sets the value that identifies the user equipment. The values are defined
in TS 25.211.
Parameters:
<Ssindex>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 39
*RST:
0
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN9:​HSUP:​ERGC:​SSIN 0
sets the value to identify the user equipment.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>[:​HSUPa]:​ERGCh:​
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN10:​HSUP:​ERGC:​TTIE 2ms
sets the processing duration to 2 ms.
365
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​DLFStructure <Dlfstructure>
The command selects the frame structure. The frame structure determines the transmission of TPC and pilot field in the transmission gaps.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Dlfstructure>
A|B
A
Type A, the pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission
gap.
B
Type B, the pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission
gap. The first TPC field of the transmission gap is sent in addition.
Example:
*RST:
A
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​DLFS A
selects frame structure of type A.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​METHod <Method>
The command selects compressed mode method.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Method>
PUNCturing|HLSCheduling|SF2
PUNCturing
The data is compressed by reducing error protection.
HLSCheduling
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
SF2
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
Example:
*RST:
PUNCturing
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​METH HLSC
selects compressed mode method High Layer Scheduling.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGD <Tgd>
The command sets the transmission gap distances.
The transmission gap distances of the user equipment with the same suffix as the
selected base station is set to the same value.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
366
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
<ch>
1|2
Parameters:
<Tgd>
float
Example:
Range:
3 slots to 100 slots
*RST:
15 slots
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGD 7
sets transmission gap distance of pattern 2 to 7 slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGL<di> <Tgl>
The command sets the transmission gap lengths.
The transmission gap lengths of the user equipment with the same suffix as the selected
base station are set to the same value.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
<ch>
1|2
<di>
1|2
Parameters:
<Tgl>
float
Example:
Range:
3 slots to 14 slots
*RST:
3 slots
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGL1 4
sets transmission gap length of gap 1 of pattern 2 to 4 slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGPL <Tgpl>
The command sets the transmission gap pattern lengths. Setting 0 is available only for
pattern 2.
The transmission gap pattern length of the user equipment with the same suffix as the
selected base station is set to the same value.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
<ch>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1|2
367
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Tgpl>
Example:
float
Range:
0 frames to 100 frames
*RST:
2 frames
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGPL 7
sets transmission gap pattern length of pattern 2 to 7 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGSN <Tgsn>
The command sets the transmission gap slot number of pattern 1.
The slot numbers of the user equipment with the same suffix as the selected base station
are set to the same value.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
<ch>
1|2
Parameters:
<Tgsn>
float
Example:
Range:
slot 0 to slot14
*RST:
slot 7
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​PATT:​TGSN 4
sets slot number of pattern 1 to slot 4.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POFFset
<Poffset>
The command sets the power offset for mode USER.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and 4
and for user equipment 2, 3 and 4.
Parameters:
<Poffset>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST2|UE2:​CMOD:​POFF 4
sets the power offset value to 4 dB.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2|UE2:​CMOD:​POM USER
selects power offset mode USER
368
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POMode
<Pomode>
The command selects the power offset mode.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and 4
and for user equipment 2, 3 and 4.
Parameters:
<Pomode>
AUTO|USER
AUTO
The power offset is obtained by pilot bit ratio as follows:
Number of pilots bits of non-compressed slots / Number of pilot
bits by compressed slots.
USER
The power offset is defined by command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​POFFset.
Example:
*RST:
AUTO
BB:​W3GP:​BST2|UE2:​CMOD:​POFF 4
sets the power offset value to 4 dB.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2|UE2:​CMOD:​POM USER
selects power offset mode USER.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the compressed mode.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for base stations 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​CMOD:​STAT ON
activates compressed mode for base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​DCONflict:​RESolve
The command resolves existing domain conflicts by modifying the Channelization Codes
of the affected channels.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
369
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​DCON:​STAT?
queries whether a code domain conflict exists for base station 2.
Response:​ 1
there is a conflict.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​DCON:​RES
resolves the code domain error by modifying the Channelization
codes of the affected channels.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​DCONflict[:​STATe]?
The command queries whether there is (response 1) or is not (response 0) a conflict
(overlap) in the hierarchically-structured channelization codes. The cause of a possible
domain conflict can be ascertained by manual operation in the "Code Domain" submenu
(main menu 3GPP FDD).
Return values:
<State>
0|1|OFF|ON
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​DCON:​STAT?
queries whether a code domain conflict exists for base station 2.
Response:​ 0
there is no conflict.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​OLTDiversity <Oltdiversity>
Activates/deactivates open loop transmit diversity.
The antenna whose signal is to be simulated is selected with the command [:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity.
Parameters:
<Oltdiversity>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​TDIV ANT2
calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 2 of one twoantenna system.
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​OLTD ON
enables open loop transmit diversity.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​PINDicator:​COUNt <Count>
The command sets the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page indicator
channel (PICH).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
370
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Count>
Example:
D18|D36|D72|D144
*RST:
D18
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​PIND:​COUN D36
sets the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page indicator channel (PICH) to 36.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCODe <Scode>
The command sets the identification for the base station. This value is simultaneously
the initial value of the scrambling code generator.
Parameters:
<Scode>
Example:
integer
Range:
#H0 to #H5FFF
*RST:
#H0
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​SCOD #H5FFF
sets scrambling code #HFFF.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCODe:​STATe <State>
The command makes it possible to deactivate base station scrambling for test purposes.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​SCOD:​STAT OFF
deactivates scrambling for base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SCPich:​PREFerence[:​STATe] <State>
The command activates or deactivates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​SCP:​PREF ON
activates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase for base station
2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​SSCG?
The command queries the secondary synchronization code group. This parameter is
specified in the table defined by the 3GPP standard "Allocation of SSCs for secondary
SCH". This table assigns a specific spreading code to the synchronization code symbol
for every slot in the frame. The value is calculated from the scrambling code.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
371
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Return values:
<Sscg>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​SSCG?
queries the 2nd search code group for base station 2.
Response:​ 24
the base station is part of second search group 24.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​STATe <State>
The command activates and deactivates the specified base station.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​STAT OFF
deactivates base station 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDELay <Tdelay>
The command sets the time shift of the selected base station compared to base station
1 in chips.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Parameters:
<Tdelay>
Example:
float
Range:
0 chips to 38400 chips
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​TDEL 256
shifts base station 2 by 256 chips compared to base station 1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​TDIVersity <Tdiversity>
Selects the antenna and the antenna configuration to be simulated.
The R&S Signal Generator supports two antenna configurations: a single-antenna system and a two-antenna system. Thus, an instrument equipped with two paths can simulate simultaneously the signals of both antennas of one two-antenna system. Moreover,
for this two-antenna system, transmit diversity can be additionally activated or deactivated.
To simulate transmit diversity, a two-antenna system has to be selected and Open Loop
Transmit Diversity has to be activated (command BB:​W3GP:​BST:​OLTD ON).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
372
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Tdiversity>
SANT|ANT1|ANT2|OFF
SANT
The signal of single-antenna system is calculated and applied. No
transmit diversity is possible.
ANT1
Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 1 of a twoantenna system.
ANT2
Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 2 of a twoantenna system.
Example:
*RST:
SANT
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​TDIV ANT2
the signal of antenna 2 of one two-antenna system is simulated.
6.8 Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced subsystem contains the commands for
setting the enhanced channels of base station 1. The commands of this system only take
effect when the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the uplink transmission direction is
selected, base station 1 is enabled and enhanced channels are activated:
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe ON
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK UP
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BST1:​STATe ON
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BST:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<11...13>:​DPCH:​STATe ON
or
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BST:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​STATe ON
BSTation<st>
The numeric suffix to BSTation determines the base station. Enhanced channels are
enabled for base station 1 only.
CHANnel<ch0>
The value range is CHANnel<11|12|13> for enhanced DPCHs and CHANnel<4> for
P-CCPCH.
TCHannel<di>
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:
DELete...............................................................................................................375
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
373
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
BPFRame...........................................................................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
SFORmat............................................................................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
SRATe................................................................................................................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
STATe................................................................................................................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
TYPE..................................................................................................................378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:CATalog....................................................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:LOAD.......................................................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:STORe.....................................................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CLTDiversity:
STATe................................................................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
LAYer.................................................................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
RATE.................................................................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
STATe................................................................................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE......................................................................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe.....................................................................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
DIRection............................................................................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
MODE................................................................................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
RANGe:DOWN....................................................................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
RANGe:UP.........................................................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STATe................................................................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STEP:MANual.....................................................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STEP[:EXTernal].................................................................................................384
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl[:
POWer]...............................................................................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:INTerleaver2.......385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:CRCSize.......................................................................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:DATA............................................................................................386
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
374
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:DATA:DSELect..............................................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:DATA:PATTern..............................................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:DTX..............................................................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:EPRotection..................................................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:INTerleaver...................................................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:RMATtribute..................................................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:STATe..........................................................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:TBCount.......................................................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:TBSize..........................................................................................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di>:TTINterval.....................................................................................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:INTerleaver<di>........391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe......................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE.......................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe....................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:LAYer...........................................................................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:RATE...........................................................................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:STATe..........................................................................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE......................................................................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe.....................................................................................................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern.............................394
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel:​DPCH:​CCODing:​
USER:​DELete <Delete>
The command deletes the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
The numerical suffix at CHANnel must not be used for this command.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
string
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
375
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​USER:​DEL
'user_cc1'
deletes the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​BPFRame?
The command queries the number of data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame at
the physical layer. The number of data bits depends on the slot format.
The value returned depends on the selected slot format (W3GPp:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN<n>:​
DPCH:​SFOR), and if the slot format changes, this changes automatically as well.
Return values:
<Bpframe>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​BPFR?
queries the number of data bits.
Response:​ 1
the number of data bits is 1.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​SFORmat <Sformat>
The command sets the slot format for the selected enhanced DPCH of base station 1.
The slot format is fixed for channel-coded measurement channels conforming to the
standard - "Reference Measurement Channel". Changing the slot format automatically
activates User coding (W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN<11...13>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​TYPE USER).
The slot format also fixes the symbol rate, bits per frame, pilot length and TFCI state
parameters.
When a channel coding type conforming to the standard is selected ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​TYPE) and channel coding is activated, the slot format is ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​STATe) automatically set to the associated value.
Changing the slot format automatically activates User coding (W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​
CHAN<11...13>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​TYPE USER).
The command sets the symbol rate (W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SRAT), the
bits per frame (W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​BPFR), the pilot length (W3GP:​
BST1:​CHAN:​DPCC:​PLEN), and the TFCI state (W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​DPCC:​TFCI
STAT) to the associated values.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
376
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Sformat>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 16
*RST:
8
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SFOR 4
sets slot format 4 for Enhanced DPCH13.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate.
The symbol rate depends on the selected slot format ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​CCODing:​SFORmat), and if the slot
format changes, this changes automatically as well.
Return values:
<Srate>
Example:
Usage:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SRAT?
queries the symbol rate.
Response:​ 'D30K'
the symbol rate of Enhanced DPCH 13 is 30 ksps.
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the selected enhanced DPCH.
When channel coding is activated and a channel coding type conforming to the standard
is selected, (BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​TYPE) the slot format, (BB:​
W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SFOR) and thus the symbol rate, (BB:​W3GP:​
BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SRAT) the bits per frame, (BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​
DPCH:​CCOD:​BPFR), the pilot length (BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​DPCC:​PLEN) and the TFCI
state (BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN:​DPCC:​TFCI STAT) are set to the associated values.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​TYPE M12K2
selects channel coding type RMC 12.2 kbps for Enhanced DPCH
13.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
377
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The additional
AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel.
When a channel coding type conforms to the standard and channel coding is activated,
(:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN<n>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​STAT) the slot format (:​BB:​W3GP:​
BST:​ENH:​CHAN<n>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SFOR) and thus the symbol rate (:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​
ENH:​CHAN<n>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​SRAT), the bits per frame, (:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​
CHAN<n>:​DPCH:​CCOD:​BPFR), the pilot length (:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN<n>:​DPCC:​
PLEN) and the TFCI state (:​BB:​W3GP:​BST1:​CHAN<n>:​DPCC:​TFCI:​STAT) are set to
the associated values.
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2|M64K|M144k|M384k|AMR|BTFD1|BTFD2|BTFD3
M12K2
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 12.2 ksps.
M64K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 64 ksps.
M144k
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 144 ksps.
M384k
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 384 ksps.
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel).
USER
This parameter cannot be set. USER is returned whenever a userdefined channel coding is active, that is to say, after a channel
coding parameter has been changed or a user coding file has been
loaded. The file is loaded by the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​
BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​LOAD.
BTFD1
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 1 (12.2 kbps).
BTFD2
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 2 (7.95 kbps).
BTFD3
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 3 (1.95 kbps).
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
M12K2
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​TYPE M144
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
378
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​CATalog?
The command queries existing files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR.
The numerical suffix at CHANnel must not be used for this command.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN:​DPCH:​CCOD:​USER:​CAT?
queries the existing files with user coding.
Response:​ user_cc1
there is one file with user coding.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​LOAD <Load>
The command loads the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Load>
<user_coding>
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​USER:​LOAD
'user_cc1'
loads the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CCODing:​USER:​STORe <Store>
The command saves the current settings for channel coding as user channel coding in
the specified file.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory in which the file is stored is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To store the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
379
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The numerical suffix at CHANnel has no significance for this command.
Setting parameters:
<Store>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​USER:​STOR
'user_cc1'
saves the current channel coding setting in file user_cc1 in directory <root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
CLTDiversity:​STATe <State>
Enables/disables Closed Loop Transmit Diversity.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​CCLTD:​STAT ON
enables Closed Loop Transmit Diversity for channel 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​
BIT:​LAYer <Layer>
The command selects the layer in the coding process in which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport|PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2). This layer is only available when
channel coding is active.
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1).
Example:
*RST:
PHYSical
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BIT:​LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​
BIT:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
380
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-7 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-3
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE 1E-4
sets a bit error rate of 0.0001.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​
BIT:​STATe <State>
The command activates bit error generation or deactivates it.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel coding
is active, it is possible to select the layer in which to insert the errors (the physical or the
transport layer, [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​
CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer). When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random points in the data bit stream at the specified
error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BIT:​STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-4 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-1
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. Block error generation is
only possible when channel coding is activated.
During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is
inverted at the specified error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
381
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 5E-1
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​DERR:​BLOC:​STAT ON
activates block error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​DIRection <Direction>
The command selects the Dynamic Power Control direction. The selected mode determines if the channel power is increased (UP) or decreased (DOWN) by a control signal with
high level.
Parameters:
<Direction>
Example:
UP|DOWN
*RST:
UP
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects mode up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power of DPCH 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​MODE <Mode>
The command selects the control signal source for Dynamic Power Control.
Note: R&S SMBV instruments do not support External Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
TPC|MANual | EXTernal
*RST:
EXTernal
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​MODE MAN
selects manual power control.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​RANGe:​DOWN <Down>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging down the channel power.
Parameters:
<Down>
float
Range:
0 dB to 30 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
10 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
382
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 20 dB
selects a dynamic range of 20 dB for ranging down the channel
power of DPCH 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​RANGe:​UP <Up>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging up the channel power.
Parameters:
<Up>
Example:
float
Range:
0 dB to 30 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
10 dB
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 20 dB
selects a dynamic range of 20 dB for ranging up the channel power
of DPCH 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for DPCH 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STEP:​MANual <Manual>
This command provides the control signal for manual mode of Dynamic Power Control.
Setting parameters:
<Manual>
MAN0|MAN1
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
MAN1
383
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects direction up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel power
of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging down the channel
power of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STEP 0.5 dB
selects a step width of 0.5 dB. A high level of the control signal
leads to an increase of 0.5 dB of the channel power, a low level to
a decrease of 0.5 dB. The overall increase and decrease of channel power is limited to 10 dB each.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​MODE MAN
selects manual power control.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STEP:​MAN MAN0
the power is decreased by 0.5 dB.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl:​STEP[:​EXTernal] <External>
This command sets step width by which – with Dynamic Power Control being switched
on - the channel power of the selected enhanced channel is increased or decreased.
Parameters:
<External>
float
Range:
0.5 dB to 6 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
1 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
384
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects direction up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel power
of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging down the channel
power of DPCH 11.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STEP 0.5 dB
selects a step width of 0.5 dB. A high level of the control signal
leads to an increase of 0.5 dB of the channel power, a low level to
a decrease of 0.5 dB. The overall increase and decrease of channel power is limited to 10 dB each.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​MODE EXT
selects external power control.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for DPCH 11.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
DPControl[:​POWer]?
The command queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power
start value of the corresponding enhanced channels.
Return values:
<Power>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN11:​DPCH:​DPC?
queries the deviation of the channel power of DPCH 11.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
INTerleaver2 <Interleaver2>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for the selected
channel.
Interleaver state 2 is activated or deactivated for all the transport channels together.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each transport channel individually (command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​
CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​TCHannel<di>:​INTerleaver).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Parameters:
<Interleaver2>
ON|OFF
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON
385
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​INT OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the TCHs of
DPCH13.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​STATe
<State>
The command switches the selected channel to the enhanced state.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​STAT ON
switches DPCH 13 to Enhanced State.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​CRCSize <Crcsize>
The command defines the CRC length for the selected transport channel. It is also possible to deactivate checksum determination.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Crcsize>
Example:
NONE|8|12|16|24
*RST:
16
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH0:​CRCS NONE
deactivates checksum determination for the DCCH of DPCH13.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the data fields of enhanced channels with
channel coding. If channel coding is not active, the DPCH data source is used (:​
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​BST:​CHANnel:​DATA).
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
386
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|DLISt|ZERO | ONE|
PATTern|
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​
CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined with the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​
ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​
PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DATA PATT
selects the Pattern data source for the data fields of DTCH1 of
DPCH13. The bit pattern is defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DATA:​PATT
#H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for enhanced channels for the DLISt selection.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
387
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source for DTCH1 of DPCH13.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DATA:​DSEL
'bts_tch'
selects the file bts_tch as the data source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum length
is 64 bits.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DATA:​PATT
#H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​DTX <Dtx>
The command sets the number of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits. These bits are
entered in the data stream between rate matching and interleaver 1 and used for the
BTFD reference measurement channels rate 2 and rate 3.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Dtx>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 to 1024
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​DTX 257
257 bits are entered in the data stream between rate matching and
interleaver 1.
388
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​EPRotection <Eprotection>
The command determines the error protection.
Note:
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Eprotection>
NONE|TURBo3|CON2 | CON3
NONE
No error protection
TURBo3
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP
specifications.
CON2 | CON3
Convolution Coder of rate ½ or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
Example:
*RST:
CON3
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​EPR NONE
error protection for transp⅓ort channel DTCH1 of DPCH13 is
deactivated.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​INTerleaver <Interleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the selected
channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each transport channel individually. The channel is selected via the suffix at TCHannel.
Interleaver state 2 can only be activated or deactivated for all the transport channels
together ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​
DPCH:​INTerleaver2).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Interleaver>
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
389
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​RMATtribute <Rmattribute>
The command sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Rmattribute>
Example:
float
Range:
16 to 1024
*RST:
256
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​RMAT 1024
sets the rate matching attribute for DTCH1 of DPCH13 to 1024.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the selected transport channel.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​STAT ON
activates DTCH1 of DPCH13.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TBCount <Tbcount>
The command defines the number of blocks used for the selected transport channel.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Tbcount>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1 to 16
4
390
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH:​TBC 4
sets 4 transport blocks for DTCH1 of DPCH13.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TBSize <Tbsize>
The command sets the size of the data blocks.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Tbsize>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 4096
*RST:
100
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH:​TBS 1024
sets the length of the transport blocks for DTCH1 of DPCH13 to
1024.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​CHANnel<ch0>:​DPCH:​
TCHannel<di>:​TTINterval <Ttinterval>
The command sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also
defines the interleaver depth.
Suffix:
<di>
0 .. 6
The transport channel designations for remote control are
TCHannel0 for DCCH, TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to
DTCH6.
Parameters:
<Ttinterval>
Example:
10MS|20MS|40MS|80MS
*RST:
40MS
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN13:​DPCH:​TCH1:​TTIN 20ms
sets that DTCH1 of DPCH13 is divided into 2 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​
INTerleaver<di> <Interleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 or 2 for the PCCPCH.
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
391
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Interleaver>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​PCCP:​CCOD:​INT1 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the P-CCPCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the enhanced P-CCPCH. The
coding scheme of the P-CCPCH (BCH) is defined in the standard.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​PCCP:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding for the enhanced P-CCPCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​CCODing:​TYPE?
The command queries the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification. The coding scheme of the P-CCPCH (BCH) is defined in the standard. The
channel is generated automatically with the counting system frame number (SFN). The
system information after the SFN field is completed from the selected data source.
Return values:
<Type>
BCHSfn
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​PCCP:​CCOD:​TYPE?
queries the channel coding scheme of the P-CCPCH.
Response:​ 'BCHS'
the channel coding scheme with SFN is used.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation:​ENHanced:​PCCPch:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates the enhanced state of the P-CCPCH (BCH).
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​PCCP:​STAT ON
switches the P-CCPCH to Enhanced State.
392
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer <Layer>
The command selects the layer in the coding process in which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport|PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2)
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1)
Example:
*RST:
PHYSical
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BIT:​LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-7 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-3
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE 1E-4
sets a bit error rate of 0.0001.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BIT:​STATe <State>
The command activates bit error generation or deactivates it.
Bit errors are inserted into the data stream of the coupled HS-PDSCHs. It is possible to
select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer). When the
data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random points in the
data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BIT:​STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the block error rate.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
393
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-4 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-1
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation[:​ENHanced]:​CHANnel<ch>:​HSDPa:​
DERRor:​BLOCk:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified
error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 5E-1
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:​W3GP:​BST:​ENH:​CHAN12:​HSDP:​DERR:​BLOC:​STAT ON
activates block error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​BSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PCPich:​PATTern <Pattern>
Sets the P-CPICh pattern (channel 0).
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
ANT1|ANT2
*RST:
ANT1
BB:​W3GP:​BST2:​ENH:​PCP:​PATT ANT2
sets the P-CPICH Pattern to Antenna 2.
6.9 User Equipment Settings
The SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation system contains commands for setting the user
equipment. The commands of this system only take effect when the 3GPP FDD standard
is activated, the UP transmission direction is selected and the particular user equipment
is enabled:
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe ON
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK UP
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation2:​STATe ON
MSTation<st>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
394
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The numeric suffix to MSTation determines the user equipment. The value range is 1 ..
4. If the suffix is ommited, MS1 is selected.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
General Settings...................................................................................................395
Compressed Mode Settings..................................................................................399
DPCCH Settings...................................................................................................402
DPDCH Settings...................................................................................................423
PCPCH Settings....................................................................................................426
PRACH Settings....................................................................................................436
HSUPA Settings....................................................................................................443
UL-DTX Settings...................................................................................................461
6.9.1 General Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:COUNt.................................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:POWer:OFFSet.....................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:SCODe:STEP.......................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:STATe.................................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:TDELay:STEP......................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:PRESet................................................................397
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:MODE............................................................397
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe..........................................................398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe:MODE................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:STATe...........................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:TDELay..........................................................399
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​COUNt <Count>
The command sets the number of additional user equipment.
The R&S Signal Generator gives you the opportunity to simulate up to 128 additional user
equipment - corresponding to a receive signal for a base station with high capacity utilization. The fourth user equipment (UE4) serves as a template for all other stations. The
only parameters of the additional user equipment to be modified are the scrambling code
and the power.
Parameters:
<Count>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
integer
Range:
1 to 128
*RST:
4
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​COUN 20
sets 20 additional user equipment.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​POW:​OFFS -3.0
sets the power offset to -3 dB.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​SCOD:​STEP 1
sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code to 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​STAT ON
connects the 20 user equipment to the 3GPP FDD signal.
395
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​POWer:​OFFSet <Offset>
The command sets the power offset of the active channels of the additional user equipment relative to the power of the active channels of the reference station UE4.
The offset applies to all the additional user equipment. The resultant overall power must
fall within the range 0 ... - 80 dB. If the value is above or below this range, it is limited
automatically.
Parameters:
<Offset>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​POW:​OFFS -3.0
sets the offset to -3 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​SCODe:​STEP <Step>
The command sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code of the additional
user equipment. The start value is the scrambling code of UE4.
Parameters:
<Step>
Example:
integer
Range:
#H1 to #HFFFFFF
*RST:
#H1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​SCOD:​STEP #H55
sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code to #H55.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​STATe <State>
The command activates additional user equipment.
The suffix at MSTation has no significance for this command and should not be specified.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​STAT ON
connects the additional user equipment to the 3GPP FDD signal.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ADDitional:​TDELay:​STEP <Step>
The command sets the step width for the time delay of the additional user equipment to
one another. The start value returns the time delay of UE4. Entry is made in chips and
can be a maximum of 1 frame.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
396
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Step>
Example:
float
Range:
0 chips to 38400 chips
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ADD:​TDEL:​STEP 256
shifts each of the user equipment 256 chips apart, starting from
the time delay of UE4.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for all the user equipment. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All user equipment settings are preset.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​PRES
resets all the user equipment settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​MODE <Mode>
The command selects the operating mode for the user equipment.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
397
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Mode>
PRACh|PPRach|PCPCh|PPCPch|DPCDch
PRACh
The user equipment only generates a signal with a physical
random access channel (PRACH). This channel is used to set up
the user equipment connection with the base station. The channelspecific parameters of the PRACH can be set with the
commands :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<n>:​PRACh:​....
PPRAch
The user equipment only generates a signal with the preamble
component of a physical random access channel (PRACH). The
parameters of the PRACH preamble can be set with the
commands :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<n>:​PRACh:​....
PCPCh
The user equipment only generates a signal with a physical
common packet channel (PCPCH). This channel is used to
transmit packet-oriented services (e.g. SMS). The channelspecific parameters of the PCPCH can be set with the
commands :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<n>:​PCPCh:​....
PPCPch
The user equipment only generates a signal with the preamble
component of a physical common packet channel (PCPCH). The
parameters of the PCPCH preamble can be set with the
commands :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<n>:​PCPCh:​....
DPCDch
The user equipment generates a signal with a dedicated physical
control channel (DPCCH) and up to 6 dedicated physical data
channels (DPDCH). This signal is used for voice and data
transmission. The channel-specific parameters can be set with the
commands :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<n>:​DPCCh:​...
as well as ..:​CHANnel<n>:​DPDCh<n>:​... and ..:​
DPDCh<n>:​....
Example:
*RST:
DPCDch
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​MODE DPCD
switches the user equipment to standard mode - transmission of
voice and data.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​SCODe <Scode>
The command sets the scrambling code. Long or short scrambling codes can be generated (command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​SCODe:​MODE).
Parameters:
<Scode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
#H0 to #HFFFFFF
#H0
398
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​SCOD #H12
sets scrambling code #12.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​SCODe:​MODE <Mode>
The command sets the type for the scrambling code. The scrambling code generator can
also be deactivated for test purposes.
SHORt is only standardized for the selection :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​MODE DPCDh and :​BB:​
W3GP:​MST:​MODE PCPCh. But it can also be generated for the PCPCH for test purposes.
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
LONG|SHORt|OFF
*RST:
LONG
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​SCOD:​MODE OFF
deactivates the scrambling code generator.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​STATe <State>
The command activates and deactivates the specified user equipment.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​STAT OFF
deactivates user equipment 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​TDELay <Tdelay>
The command sets the time shift of the selected user equipment compared to user
equipment 1 in chips.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
The command is only valid for user equipment 2, 3 and 4.
Parameters:
<Tdelay>
Example:
float
Range:
0 chips to 38400 chips
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​TDEL 256
shifts user equipment 2 by 256 chips compared to user equipment
1.
6.9.2 Compressed Mode Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod............................................400
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
399
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD.............................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>.......................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL...........................401
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN...........................401
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe...............................................402
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​METHod <Method>
The command selects compressed mode method.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Method>
HLSCheduling|SF2
SF2
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
HLSCheduling
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
Example:
*RST:
SF2
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​METH HLSC
selects compressed mode method High Layer Scheduling.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGD <Tgd>
The command sets the transmission gap distances.
The transmission gap distances of the base station with the same suffix as the selected
user equipment is set to the same value
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Tgd>
Example:
float
Range:
3 slots to 100 slots
*RST:
15 slots
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGD 7
sets transmission gap distance of pattern 2 to 7 slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGL<di> <Tgl>
The command sets the transmission gap lengths.
The transmission gap lengths of the base station with the same suffix as the selected
user equipment is set to the same value.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
400
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
<di>
[1]|2
Parameters:
<Tgl>
float
Example:
Range:
3 slots to 14 slots
*RST:
3 slots
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGL1 4
sets transmission gap length of gap 1 of pattern 2 to 4 slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGPL <Tgpl>
The command sets the transmission gap pattern lengths. Setting 0 is available only for
pattern 2.
The transmission gap pattern lengths of the base station with the same suffix as the
selected user equipment is set to the same value.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Tgpl>
Example:
float
Range:
0 frame to 100 frames
*RST:
2 frames
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​PATT2:​TGPL 7
sets transmission gap pattern length of pattern 2 to 7 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​PATTern<ch>:​TGSN <Tgsn>
The command sets the transmission gap slot number of pattern 1.
The transmission gap slot number of the base station with the same suffix as the selected
user equipment is set to the same value.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<Tgsn>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
slot 0 to slot 14
*RST:
slot 7
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​PATT:​TGSN 4
sets slot number of pattern 1 to slot 4.
401
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CMODe:​STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the compressed mode.
Suffix:
<st>
2|3|4
Compressed Mode can be configured for user equipment 2, 3 and
4.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​CMOD:​STAT ON
activates compressed mode for user equipment 2.
6.9.3 DPCCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:CCODe..............................................403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE..........................................403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:PATTern.......................................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CCODe.........................................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:COMPatibility.................................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI:PLENgth.................................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI<si>[:VALues]..........................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HAPattern.....................................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POAAck..............................406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POANack............................406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POCA.................................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONAck..............................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONNack............................408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQI<di>................408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQIType...............409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:HACK...................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:PCI......................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTICount.............................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO[:MODE]...............................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MMODe........................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POACk.........................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PONAck........................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer..........................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SCActive.......................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SDELay........................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth.......................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth:ADJust............................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:STATe..........................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:CQI<di>.........................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:CQIType........................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:HACK............................415
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
402
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:PCI................................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:POHAck.........................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTI<ch0>:POPCqi..........................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTICount.......................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTIDistance...................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:POWer...............................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:SFORmat...........................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI..................................................419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe.......................................419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TOFFset.............................................420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA..........................................420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect............................420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern............................421
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse.......................................421
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE........................................421
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep........................................422
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:READ.........................................422
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​CCODe?
The command queries the channelization code and the modulation branch of the specified channel. The value is fixed.
Return values:
<Ccode>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​CCOD?
queries the channelization code for DPCCH of user equipment 1.
Response:​ Q,​64
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​MODE <Mode>
The command sets the number of bits for the FBI field. With OFF, the FBI field is not
used.
Note: The former 2-bits long FBI Mode "D2B" according to 3GPP Release 4 specification
TS 25.211 is not supported any more.
The command sets the slot format ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​SFORmat) in conjunction with the set TFCI status ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe) and the TPC Mode ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MODE) to the associated
values.
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
OFF|D1B
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​FBI:​MODE OFF
an FBl field is not used.
403
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern when the PATTern data source is selected for
the FBI field.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
<32 bit pattern>
The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of
hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the
number of bits to use.
The maximum length is 32 bits.
Example:
*RST:
#H0,1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​FBI:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CCODe?
The command queries the channelization code and the modulation branch of the HSDPCCH.
Return values:
<Ccode>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CCOD?
queries the channelization code.
Response:​ Q,​32
the channelization code is 32 and the modulation branch is Q.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​COMPatibility
<Compatibility>
The concept of the graphical user interface for the configuration of HS-DPCCH has been
adapted to support simultaneous DC-HSDPA and MIMO operation, as required in 3GPP
Release 9 onwards.
This command enables the configuration of the HS-DPCCH settings provided for backwards compatibility ("Up to Release 7").
Parameters:
<Compatibility>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
REL7|REL8
*RST:
REL8
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​COMP REL8
sets the compatibility mode to Release 8 and Later.
404
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CQI:​PLENgth <Plength>
The command sets the length of the CQI sequence. The values of the CQI sequence are
defined with command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​
CQI<si>[:​VALues]. The pattern is generated cyclically.
Parameters:
<Plength>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 10
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI:​PLEN
the CQI sequence length is 2 values.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI1 -1
the first CQI value is -1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI2 2
the second CQI value is 2.
2
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CQI<si>[:​VALues]
<Values>
The command sets the values of the CQI sequence. Value 1 means that no CQI is sent
(DTX - Discontinuous Transmission). The length of the CQI sequence is defined with
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​CQI:​PLENgth.
The pattern is generated cyclically.
Suffix:
<si>
1|2
Sequence Index
Parameters:
<Values>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 10
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI:​PLEN 2
the CQI sequence length is 2 values.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI1 1
the first CQI value is -1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​CQI2 2
the second CQI value is 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​HAPattern <Hapattern>
The command enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement). One bit is used per HS-DPCCH packet.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
405
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Hapattern>
string
The pattern is entered as string, the maximum number of entries
is 32. Three different characters are permitted.
1
The HARQ ACK is sent (ACK). Transmission was successful and
correct.
0
The NACK is not sent (NACK). Transmission was not correct. With
an NACK, the UE requests retransmission of the incorrect data.
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous
Transmission, DTX).
Example:
*RST:
<empty>
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​HAP "110--110-0"
enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POAAck <Poaack>
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/ACK of an ACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer).
The power PACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/ACK
Parameters:
<Poaack>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK AACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to ACK/ACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​POAA -2.5dB
sets the power offset to -2.5 dB.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POANack
<Poanack>
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/NACK of an ACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer).
The power PACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
406
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
PACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/NACK
Parameters:
<Poanack>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK ANAC
sets the HARQ-ACK to ACK/NACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​POAN -1.5dB
sets the power offset to -1.5 dB.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​POCA <Poca>
Sets the power offset Poff_CQI Type A of the PCI/CQI slots in case a CQI Type A report is
sent relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​HS:​POWer).
The power PCQI Type A used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PCQI Type A = PCQI + Poff_CQI Type A
Since the CQI Type B reports are used in a single stream transmission, the power PCQI
Type B = PCQI.
Parameters:
<Poca>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE:​TT2:​CQIT TADT
selects CQI Type A Dual TB report for TTI2.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​POCA -4dB
sets the power offset to -4dB.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​PONAck <Ponack>
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/ACK of an NACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer).
The power PNACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/ACK
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
407
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Ponack>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-10.0 to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK NACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to NACK/ACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​PONA -1dB
sets the power offset to -1dB.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​PONNack
<Ponnack>
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/NACK of an NACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer).
The power PNACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/NACK
Parameters:
<Ponnack>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK NNAC
sets the HARQ-ACK to NACK/NACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​PONN -3dB
sets the power offset to -3dB.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​CQI<di>
<Cqi>
Selects the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
For single stream transmission (BB:​W3GP:​MST:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI:​CQI1), this
command set the CQI values of the following cases:
●
The CQI (the value for CQI Type B report)
●
The CQIS (the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when 1 transport block is
preferred)
●
The CQI1 (the first of the two CQI values of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks
are preferred)
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
408
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
For dual stream transmission (BB:​W3GP:​MST:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI:​CQI2), this command set the CQI2, the second of the two CQI values of CQI Type A report when 2
transport blocks are preferred. The CQI then is calculated as follow:
CQI = 15*CQI1+CQI2+31
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
The suffix CQI<1|2> distinquishes between single stream and
double stream transmission.
<ch0>
1 .. 10
Parameters:
<Cqi>
float
Example:
Range:
0 to 30
*RST:
0 .. 30 (for CQIs and CQI)
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQIT
selects CQI Type A dual TB report for TTI2.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQI1
sets CQI1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQI2
sets CQI2
SACK
TADT
1.5
2
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQIT TAST
selects CQI Type A single TB report for TTI2.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQI1 3
sets CQIS
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQIT TB
selects CQI Type B
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQI1 0
sets CQI
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​CQIType
<Cqitype>
Selects the type of the CQI report.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 10
Parameters:
<Cqitype>
TAST|TADT|TB
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
TADT (for TTI 1)
409
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​CQIT TADT
selects CQI Type A dual TB report for TTI2.
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​HACK
<Hack>
Selects the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 10
Parameters:
<Hack>
Example:
Options:
DTX|SACK|SNACk|AACK|ANACk|NACK|NNACk
*RST:
AACK (for TTI 1)
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI<ch0>:​PCI <Pci>
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 10
Parameters:
<Pci>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0 to 3
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTI2:​PCI 2
sets the PCI.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO:​TTICount <Tticount>
Selects the number of configurable TTI's.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
410
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Tticount>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
1 to 32
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​TTIC 4
sets the number of configurable TTI's to 4.
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MIMO[:​MODE] <Mode>
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<Mode>
ON|OFF
Example:
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MIMO:​MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MMODe <Mmode>
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<Mmode>
ON|OFF
Example:
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​MMOD ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POACk <Poack>
The command sets the channel power part of the ACK in dB.
Parameters:
<Poack>
Example:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​POAC -2.5dB
sets the channel power part of the ACK to 2.5 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​PONAck <Ponack>
The command sets the channel power part of the NACK in dB.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
411
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Ponack>
Example:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​PONA -2.5dB
sets the channel power part of the NACK to 2.5 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​POWer <Power>
The command sets the channel power in dB. The power entered is relative to the powers
of the other channels. If "Adjust Total Power to 0 dB" is executed ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​
BB:​W3GPp:​POWer:​ADJust), the power is normalized to a total power for all channels
of 0 dB. The power ratios of the individual channels remains unchanged.
Note: The uplink high speed channel is blanked (duty cycle 3/15).
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​POW -30
sets the channel power to -30 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SCActive <Scactive>
Enables/disables working in dual cell HSDPA mode for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<Scactive>
ON|OFF
Example:
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​SCA ON
enables cual cell HSDPA operation
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SDELay <Sdelay>
This command sets the delay between the uplink HS-DPCCH and the frame of uplink
DPCH. The delay is entered as a multiple m of 256 chips according to TS 25.211 7.7
Parameters:
<Sdelay>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 to 250
*RST:
101
Default unit: * 256 Chips
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​SDEL 101
sets a start delay of 101 x 256 chips.
412
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SLENgth?
Queries the suggested and current ARB sequence length.
The current ARB sequence length is adjusted with the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​
BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SLENgth:​ADJust on page 413.
Return values:
<Slength>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​SLEN?
queries the ARB sequence length
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​SLENgth:​ADJust
(for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59)
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​SLEN:​ADJ
adjusts the ARB sequence length
Usage:
Event
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​STATe <State>
This command activates or deactivates the HS-DPCCH.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​STAT ON
activates HS-DPCCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​CQI<di> <Cqi>
Sets the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<di>
1|2
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Parameters:
<Cqi>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0 to 30
0
413
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTIC 4
selects the number of TTIs
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​CQIT CCQI
selects Composed CQI
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​CQI2 15
sets the CQI report
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​CQIType
<Cqitype>
Sets the type of the CQI report. The available types depend on the state of the parameters
"MIMO Mode" ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​MMODe)
and "Secondary Cell Active" ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​
HS:​SCActive).
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Parameters:
<Cqitype>
DTX|CQI|TAST|TADT|TB|CCQI
DTX
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other
parameters in the feedback signaling table are disabled.
CQI
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active Off)
Selects CQI report for the normal operation.
TAST
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 1 transport block
is preferred
TADT
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 2 transport blocks
are preferred
TB
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type B report
CCQI
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects a Composite CQI, constructed from the two individual
reports CQI1 and CQI2 of the serving and secondary serving HSDSCH cell
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
414
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTIC 4
selects the number of TTIs.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​CQIT CCQI
selects Composed CQI
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​CQI2 15
sets the CQI report
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​HACK <Hack>
Sets the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
415
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Hack>
DTX|PRE|POST|A|N|M_A|M_N|M_AA|M_AN|M_NA|M_NN|
S_A_D|S_N_D|S_D_A|S_D_N|S_A_A|S_A_N|S_N_A|S_N_N|
MS_A_D|MS_N_D|MS_AA_D|MS_AN_D|MS_NA_D|MS_NN_D|
MS_D_A|MS_D_N|MS_D_AA|MS_D_AN|MS_D_NA|MS_D_NN|
MS_A_A|MS_A_N|MS_N_A|MS_N_N|MS_A_AA|MS_A_AN|
MS_A_NA|MS_A_NN|MS_N_AA|MS_N_AN|MS_N_NA|
MS_N_NN|MS_AA_A|MS_AA_N|MS_AN_A|MS_AN_N|
MS_NA_A|MS_NA_N|MS_NN_A|MS_NN_N|MS_AA_AA|
MS_AA_AN|MS_AA_NA|MS_AA_NN|MS_AN_AA|MS_AN_AN|
MS_AN_NA|MS_AN_NN|MS_NA_AA|MS_NA_AN|MS_NA_NA|
MS_NA_NN|MS_NN_AA|MS_NN_AN|MS_NN_NA|MS_NN_NN
DTX
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other
parameters in the feedback signaling table are disabled
PRE | POST
PRE or POST issent in the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding
TTI.
A|N
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active Off)
Selects an ACK or NACK response to a single scheduled transport
block.
M_A | M_N | ...
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Active Off)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks, i.e.
feedback on the primary and secondary stream in a dual stream
transmission
S_A_D | S_N_A | ...
(MIMO Mode Off, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects the response to a single scheduled transport block on
each of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
(The feedback related to the serving HS-DSCH cell is given before
the divider sign.)
D means no transmission (DRX), i.e. during that TTI no transport
block is sent for the corresponding HS-DSCH cell.
MS_AA_NN | ...
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks on each
of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
D means no transmission (DRX), i.e. during that TTI no transport
block is sent for the corresponding HS-DSCH cell.
Example:
DTX
*RST:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​CQI2 15
sets the CQI report
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
416
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​PCI <PCI>
Sets the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Parameters:
<PCI>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0.0 to 3.0
Increment: 1.0
*RST:
0.0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​PCI 1
sets the PCI value
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​POHAck
<Pohack>
Sets the power offset of a HARQ-ACK response relative to the Power.
The power used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as: PHARQ-ACK = Power +
Poff_HARQ-ACK
The parameter is enabled for HARQ-ACK different than DTX.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Parameters:
<Pohack>
Example:
float
Range:
-10.0 to 10.0 dB
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​POHA 1
sets the power offset of a HARQ-ACK response
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTI<ch0>:​POPCqi
<Popcqi>
Sets the power offset Poff_PCI/CQI of the PCI/CQI slots relative to the Power.
The power PPCI/CQI used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as: PPCI/CQI = Power +
Poff_PCI/CQI
The parameter is enabled for HARQ-ACK different than DTX.
Suffix:
<ch0>
1 .. 32
Parameters:
<Popcqi>
float
Range:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
-10.0 to 10.0
417
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTI4:​POPC 2
sets the power offset of a PCI/CQI slots
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTICount <Tticount>
Selects the number of configurable TTI's.
Parameters:
<Tticount>
float
Example:
Range:
1 to 32
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTIC 4
selects the number of TTIs.
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​HS:​TTIDistance <Ttidistance>
The command selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode. The
distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An Inter TTI Distance of 1 means
continuous generation.
Parameters:
<Ttidistance>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 16
*RST:
5
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​HS:​TTID 4
selects an Inter TTI Distance of 4 subframes.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​POWer <Power>
The command defines the channel power for the DPCCH.
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​POW -10 dB
sets the channel power to -10 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​SFORmat <Sformat>
The command sets the slot format for the DPCCH. The slot format defines the structure
of the DPCCH slots and the control fields.
Slot Format # 4 is available only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K59.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
418
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Slot formats 0 to 4 are available for the DPCCH channel as defined in the 3GPP Release
7 specification TS 25.211.
Note:
The former slot formats 4 and 5 according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS 25.211
are not supported any more.
The command sets the FBI mode ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​FBI:​MODE), the TFCI status ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe) and the TPC Mode ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MODE) to the associated values.
Parameters:
<Sformat>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 4
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​SFOR 3
selects slot format 3 for the DPCCH of user equipment 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI <Tfci>
The command sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
This value selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 1023
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe <State>
The command activates the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field for the
DPCCH.
The command sets the slot format ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​SFORmat) in conjunction with the set FBI mode ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​MODE) and the TPC Mode ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​
BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MODE) to the associated values.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TFCI:​STAT ON
activates the TFCI field.
419
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TOFFset?
The command queries the timing offset. The timing offset indicates the time difference
between the user equipment signal and the base station signal. This offset is fixed at
1024 chips, as defined in the standard.
Return values:
<Toffset>
float
Example:
*RST:
1024
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TOFF?
queries the timing offset.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the DPCCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
DLISt|ZERO | ONE|PATTern|
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern. The maximum length is 64 bits.
Example:
*RST:
PATTern
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of user equipment 2
the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT #H48D0,​16
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC
field of the DPCCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
420
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​DSEL 'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT #B11110000,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the TPC field.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MISuse <Misuse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) for controlling the channel power of the user equipment.
The bit pattern (see commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTa
tion:DPCCh:TPC:DATA... ) of the TPC field of the DPCCH is used to control the
channel power. A "1" leads to an increase of channel powers, a "0" to a reduction of
channel powers. Channel power is limited to the range 0 dB to -80 dB. The step width for
the change is defined by the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep.
Note: "Mis-"using the TPC field is available for UE2, UE3,UE4 only.
Parameters:
<Misuse>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​TPC:​MIS ON
activates regulation of the channel power via the bit pattern of the
TPC field.
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​TPC:​PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel power to 1 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​MODE <Mode>
Selects the TPC (Transmit Power Control) mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
421
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The command sets the slot format ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
DPCCh:​SFORmat) in conjunction with the set TFCI status ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TFCI:​STATe) and the FBI Mode ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​FBI:​MODE) to the associated
values.
Parameters:
<Mode>
D2B|D4B
D2B
A TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
D4B
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K59)
A TPC field with a length of 4 bits is used.
A 4 bits long TPC field ca nbe selected, only for Slot Format 4 and
disabled FBI and TFCI fields.
Example:
*RST:
D2B
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​MODE D2B
an TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​PSTep <Pstep>
The command sets the level of the power step in dB for controlling the transmit power
via the data of the TPC field.
Parameters:
<Pstep>
Example:
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​DPCC:​TPC:​MIS ON
activates regulation of the channel power via the bit pattern of the
TPC field.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​DPCC:​TPC:​PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel power to 1 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPCCh:​TPC:​READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field of the DPCCH.
The bit pattern is selected with the command SOUR:​BB:​W3GPp:​MST:​DPCC:​TPC:​
DATA:​PATT.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
422
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous|S0A|S1A|S01A|S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
Example:
*RST:
CONTinuous
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​DPCC:​TPC:​READ CONT
the selected bit pattern is repeated continuously for the TPC
sequence.
6.9.4 DPDCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:CCODe.........................423
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA...........................424
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:DSELect..............424
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:PATTern.............425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:SRATe.........................425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:FCIO..................................................425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:ORATe...............................................425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:POWer...............................................426
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:STATe...............................................426
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​CCODe?
The command queries the channelization code of the specified channel. The value is
fixed and depends on the overall symbol rate of the user equipment.
Return values:
<Ccode>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN:​DPDC:​CCOD?
queries the channelization code for DPDCH 1 of user equipment
1.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
423
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the selected DPDCH.
For the enhanced channels of user equipment 1 (UE1), this entry is valid when channel
coding is deactivated. When channel coding is active, data sources are selected for the
transport channels with the commands :​BB:​W3GPp:​MST:​CHANnel:​DPDCh:​DCCH:​
DATA and :​BB:​W3GPp:​MST:​ENHanced:​TCHannel:​DATA.
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|DLISt|ZERO | ONE|
PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN:​DPDC:​DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​DSELect
<Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
<data list name>
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​DATA:​DSEL 'dpdch_13'
selects the file dpdch_13 as the data source.
424
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​DATA:​PATTern
<Pattern>
The command enters the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The first
parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation),
the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
64 bit pattern
*RST:
#H0,1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​DATA PATT
selects the Pattern data source.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​DATA:​PATT
defines the bit pattern.
#H3F, 8
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate of the DPDCH. The symbol rate depends on the
overall symbol rate set and cannot be modified.
Return values:
<Srate>
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​CHAN2:​DPDC:​SRAT?
queries the symbol rate of DPDCH 2 of user equipment 4.
Response:​
960
the symbol rate is 960 ksps.
Note:
DPDCH 2 is only active once the overall symbol rate is 2 x 960
ksps or more. When overall symbol rates are less, the error message "???" is returned.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​FCIO <Fcio>
The command sets the channelization code to I/0. This mode can only be activated if the
overall symbol rate is < 2 x 960 kbps.
Parameters:
<Fcio>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPDC:​FCIO ON
sets the channelization code to I/O.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​ORATe <Orate>
The command sets the overall symbol rate. The overall symbol rate determines the number of DPDCHs as well as their symbol rate and channelization codes.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
425
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Orate>
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k|D1920k|D2880k|
D3840k|D4800k|D5760k
D15K ... D5760K
15 ksps ... 6 x 960 ksps
Example:
*RST:
D60K
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPDC:​ORAT D15K
sets the overall symbol rate to 15 ksps. Only DPDCH1 is active,
the symbol rate is 15 ksps and the channelization code is 64.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​POWer <Power>
The command defines the channel power of the DPDCHs. The power entered is relative
to the powers of the other channels. If "Adjust Total Power to 0 dB" is executed ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​POWer:​ADJust), the power is normalized to a total power
for all channels of 0 dB. The power ratios of the individual channels remains unchanged.
Note: The uplink channels are not blanked in this mode (duty cycle 100%).
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​DPDC:​POW -60dB
sets the channel power for DPDCH 2 of user equipment 4 to -60
dB. The channel power relates to the power of the other channels.
BB:​W3GP:​POW:​ADJ
the channel power relates to 0 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates DPDCHs. This always activates or deactivates
all the channels. The number of channels (1...6) is determined by the overall symbol rate.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPDC:​STAT ON
activates all the DPDCHs.
6.9.5 PCPCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPOWer.............................................427
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPSFormat.........................................427
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA.................................................428
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
426
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:DSELect...................................428
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:PATTern...................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DPOWer.............................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:MODE..........................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:PATTern.......................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:MLENgth............................................430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PLENgth.............................................430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer.............................................430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer:STEP....................................431
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PREPetition........................................431
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SIGNature..........................................431
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SRATe...............................................431
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TFCI...................................................432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt.......................432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble..................432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SOFFset..................................433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SPERiod..................................433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp...........................433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre...........................434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA..........................................434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect............................434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern............................435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:READ.........................................435
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​CPOWer <Cpower>
The command defines the power of the control component of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Cpower>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​CPOW
sets the power to -10 dB.
-10 dB
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​CPSFormat <Cpsformat>
The command defines the slot format of the control component of the PCPCH.
The slot format sets the associated FBI mode automatically:
●
Slot format 0 = FBI OFF
●
Slot format 1 = FBI 1 bit
●
Slot format 2 = FBI 2 bits
Parameters:
<Cpsformat>
0|1|2
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0
427
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​CPSF 2
sets slot format 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|
DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MST:​PCPCh:​DATA:​DSELect[:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​
DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
PCPCh:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
PN9
*RST:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​DATA:​DSEL 'pcpch_data'
selects the data list pcpch_data.
428
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern data
source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal,
octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​PCPC:​DATA:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​DPOWer <Dpower>
The command defines the power of the data component of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Dpower>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​DPOW
sets the power to -10 dB.
-10 dB
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​FBI:​MODE <Mode>
The command sets the number of bits (1 or 2) for the FBI field. With OFF, the field is not
used.
The FBI pattern automatically sets the associated slot format:
●
FBI OFF = Slot format 0
●
FBI 1 bit = Slot format 1
●
FBI 2 bits = Slot format 2
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
OFF|D1B|D2B
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​PCPC:​FBI:​MODE OFF
the FBl field is not used.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​FBI:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the FBI field when the PATTern data source
is selected. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits. The first parameter determines
the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the
number of bits to use.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
429
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<32 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​FBI:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​MLENgth <Mlength>
The command sets the length of the message component as a number of frames.
Parameters:
<Mlength>
Example:
1 | 2 Frames
*RST:
1 Frame
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​PCPC:​MLEN 2
the length of the message component is 2 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PLENgth <Plength>
The command defines the length of the power control preamble of the PCPCH as a
number of slots.
Parameters:
<Plength>
Example:
S0|S8
*RST:
S8
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PLEN S8
sets a length of 8 slots for the power control preamble.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PPOWer <Ppower>
The command defines the power of the preamble component of the PCPCH. If the preamble is repeated and the power increased with each repetition, this setting specifies the
power achieved during the last repetition.
Parameters:
<Ppower>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PPOW:​STEP 1 dB
sets an increase in power of 1 dB per preamble repetition.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PREP 2
sets a sequence of 2 preambles. The power of the first preamble
is - 9 dB, the power of the second, -1 dB.
430
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PPOWer:​STEP <Step>
The command defines the step width of the power increase, by which the preamble component of the PCPCH is increased from repetition to repetition. The power during the last
repetition corresponds to the power defined by the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PPOWer.
Parameters:
<Step>
Example:
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PPOW:​STEP 2dB
the power of the PCPCH preamble is increased by 2 dB with every
repetition.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​PREPetition <Prepetition>
The command defines the number of PCPCH preamble components.
Parameters:
<Prepetition>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 10
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​PREP 3
sets three preamble components.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​SIGNature <Signature>
The command selects the signature of the PCPCH (see Table 3 in 3GPP TS 25.213
Version 3.4.0 Release 1999).
Parameters:
<Signature>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 15
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​SIGN 5
selects signature 5.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​SRATe <Srate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH.
User Equipment 1: When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is limited to the range
between 15 and 120 ksps. Values above this limit are automatically set to 120 ksps.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
431
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Srate>
Example:
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k
*RST:
D30K
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​SRAT D15K
sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH of user equipment 1 to 15 ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TFCI <Tfci>
The command sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
This value selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 1023
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt?
This command queries the level correction value for the message part. In case of one
UE active, the power of the message part can be calculated by adding the set RF level.
Return values:
<Mpart>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​DPOW:​MPAR?
queries the level correction value for the message part.
Response:​ 1.2
the correction value is 1.2 dB.
POW?
queries the RF level.
Response:​ 2
the RF output level is 2 dBm. The message part power is 3.2 dBm
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​PREamble?
This command queries level correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message part. This value is identical to the correction value for the CD preamble. The level
of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set Preamble Power Step.
Return values:
<Preamble>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
432
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​DPOW:​PRE?
queries the level correction value for the last AICH preamble
before the message part.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​SOFFset <Soffset>
This command defines the start offset of the PCPCH in access slots. The starting time
delay in timeslots is calculated according to: 2 x Start Offset.
Parameters:
<Soffset>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 14
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​SOFF 1
the start offset of the PCPCH of UE 3 is 2 access slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​SPERiod?
This command queries the sequence period.
Return values:
<Speriod>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​SPER?
queries the sequence period.
Response:​ 14
the sequence period is 14 slots.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREMp <Premp>
This command defines the AICH Transmission Timing. This parameter defines the time
difference between the preamble and the message part. Two modes are defined in the
standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode
1 it is 4 access slots.
Parameters:
<Premp>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
1 to 14
*RST:
3
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​TIME:​PREM 3
the difference between the preamble and the message part is 3
access slots.
433
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREPre <Prepre>
This command defines the time difference between two successive preambles in access
slots.
Parameters:
<Prepre>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 14
*RST:
3
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PCPC:​TIM:​TIME:​PREP 3
the time difference between two successive preambles is 3 access
slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|DLISt
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​
DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern. The maximum length is 64 bits.
Example:
*RST:
PATTern
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​PCPC:​TPC:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of user equipment 2
the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​PCPC:​TPC:​DATA:​PATT #H48D0,​16
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC
field of the PCPCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
434
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​TPC:​DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​TPC:​DATA:​DSEL 'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PCPC:​DATA:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field of the PCPCH.
The bit pattern is selected with the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​PCPCh:​TPC:​DATA.
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous|S0A|S1A|S01A|S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is
continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
CONTinuous
BB:​W3GP:​MST2:​PCPC:​TPC:​READ CONT
the selected bit pattern is repeated continuously for the TPC
sequence.
435
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
6.9.6 PRACH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:ATTiming............................................436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:CPOWer.............................................436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA.................................................437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:DSELect...................................437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:PATTern...................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DPOWer.............................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:MLENgth............................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer.............................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer:STEP....................................439
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PREPetition........................................439
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SFORmat...........................................439
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SIGNature..........................................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SRATe...............................................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TFCI...................................................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt.......................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:CONTrol.........441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:DATA.............441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble..................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SOFFset..................................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod..................................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp...........................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre...........................443
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​ATTiming <Attiming>
This command defines which AICH Transmission Timing, time difference between the
preamble and the message part or the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots, will be definded.
Parameters:
<Attiming>
Example:
ATT0|ATT1
*RST:
ATT0
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​ATT ATT1
selects the AICH Transmission Timing as the difference between
the preamble and the message part.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​CPOWer <Cpower>
The command defines the power of the control component of the PRACH.
Parameters:
<Cpower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
436
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​CPOW
sets the power to -10 dB.
-10 dB
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the PRACH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|
DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​
DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​
PRACh:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​DATA:​DSEL 'pcpch_data'
selects the data list pcpch_data.
437
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern data
source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal,
octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​DATA:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​DPOWer <Dpower>
The command defines the power of the data component of the PRACH.
Parameters:
<Dpower>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​DPOW
sets the power to -10 dB.
-10 dB
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​MLENgth <Mlength>
The command sets the length of the message component as a number of frames.
Parameters:
<Mlength>
Example:
1 | 2 Frames
*RST:
1 Frame
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​PRAC:​MLEN 2
the length of the message component is 2 frames.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PPOWer <Ppower>
The command defines the power of the preamble component of the PRACH. If the preamble is repeated and the power increased with each repetition, this setting specifies the
power achieved during the last repetition.
Parameters:
<Ppower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
438
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​PPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​PPOW:​STEP 1 dB
sets an increase in power of 1 dB per preamble repetition.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​PREP 2
sets a sequence of 2 preambles. The power of the first preamble
is - 9 dB, the power of the second, -1 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PPOWer:​STEP <Step>
The command defines the step width of the power increase, by which the preamble component of the PRACH is increased from repetition to repetition. The power defined during
the last repetition corresponds to the power defined by the command [:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PPOWer.
Parameters:
<Step>
Example:
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​PPOW:​STEP 2 dB
the power of the PRACH preamble is increased by 2 dB with every
repetition.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​PREPetition <Prepetition>
The command defines the number of PRACH preamble components.
Parameters:
<Prepetition>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 10
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​PREP 3
sets three preamble components.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SFORmat <Sformat>
The command defines the slot format of the PRACH.
A change of slot format leads to an automatic change of symbol rate [:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SRATe
User Equipment 1: When channel coding is active, the slot format is predetermined. So
in this case, the command has no effect.
Parameters:
<Sformat>
0|1|2|3
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0
439
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​PRAC:​SFOR 2
sets slot format 2.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SIGNature <Signature>
The command selects the signature of the PRACH (see Table 3 in 3GPP TS 25.213
Version 3.4.0 Release 1999).
Parameters:
<Signature>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 15
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​SIGN 5
selects signature 5.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SRATe <Srate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the PRACH.
A change of symbol rate leads to an automatic change of slot format [:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​SFORmat.
Parameters:
<Srate>
Example:
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k
*RST:
D30K
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​SRAT D15K
sets the symbol rate of the PRACH of user equipment 1 to 15 ksps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TFCI <Tfci>
The command sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
This value selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 1023
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​PRAC:​TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt?
This command queries the level correction value for the message part. In case of one
UE active, the power of the message part can be calculated by adding the set RF level.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
440
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<Mpart>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​DPOW:​MPAR?
queries the level correction value for the message part.
Response:​ 1.2
the correction value is 1.2 dB.
POW?
queries the RF level.
Response:​ 2
the RF output level is 2 dBm. The message part power is 3.2 dBm.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt:​
CONTrol?
This command queries the level correction value for the message control part.
Return values:
<Control>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​DPOW:​MPAR:​CONT?
queries the level correction value for the message control part.
Response:​ -3.24
the correction value is -3.24 dB.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​MPARt:​
DATA?
This command queries the level correction value for the message data part.
Return values:
<Data>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​DPOW:​MPAR:​DATA?
queries the level correction value for the message data part.
Response:​ -3.24
the correction value is -3.24 dB.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​DPOWer:​PREamble?
This command queries level correction value for the preamble before the message part.
The level of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set "Preamble
Power Step".
Return values:
<Preamble>
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
441
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​DPOW:​PRE?
queries the level correction value for the last preamble before the
message part.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​SOFFset <Soffset>
This command defines the start offset of the PRACH in access slots. The starting time
delay in timeslots is calculated according to: 2 x Start Offset.
Parameters:
<Soffset>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 50
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​SOFF 1
the start offset of the PRACH of UE 3 is 2 access slots.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​SPERiod?
This command queries the sequence period.
Return values:
<Speriod>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM:​SPER?
queries the sequence period.
Response:​ 14
the sequence period is 14 slots.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREMp <Premp>
This command defines the AICH Transmission Timing. This parameter defines the time
difference between the preamble and the message part. Two modes are defined in the
standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode
1 it is 4 access slots.
Parameters:
<Premp>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
1 to 14
*RST:
3
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM.TIME:​PREM 3
the difference between the preamble and the message part is 3
access slots.
442
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​PRACh:​TIMing:​TIME:​PREPre <Prepre>
This command defines the time difference between two successive preambles in access
slots.
Parameters:
<Prepre>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 14
*RST:
3
BB:​W3GP:​MST3:​PRAC:​TIM.TIME:​PREP 3
the time difference between two successive preambles is 3 access
slots.
6.9.7 HSUPA Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:CCODe........444
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA...........445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:
DSELect.............................................................................................................445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:
PATTern.............................................................................................................446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:POWer.........446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:SRATe.........446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:DTX:PATTern.....................446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:DTX:STATe........................447
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CHANnel....................447
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CRATe.......................447
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA.........................448
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:DSELect...........448
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:PATTern...........449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:LAYer......449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:RATE......449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:
STATe................................................................................................................449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BLOCk:
RATE.................................................................................................................450
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BLOCk:
STATe................................................................................................................450
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:PATTern.............450
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:STATe................450
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
ADEFinition.........................................................................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
DELay:AUSer......................................................................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
DELay:FEEDback................................................................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
MODE................................................................................................................452
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
443
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
MRETransmissions..............................................................................................452
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
RVZero...............................................................................................................452
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation[:
STATe]...............................................................................................................453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ[:
SIMulation]:PATTern<ch>.....................................................................................453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HPROcesses..............453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MIBRate.....................453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MODulation................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:ORATe.......................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:PAYBits......................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:STATe.......................455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:INDex.................455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:TABLe................455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIBits.......................456
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIEdch.....................456
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:UECategory................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:HBIT..................................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:POWer..............................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:POWer..............................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:RSNumber.........................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:STATe...............................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:TFCI..................................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:TTIEdch.............................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:DTX:PATTern.....................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:DTX:STATe........................459
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:FCIO.................................459
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:MODulation........................459
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:ORATe..............................460
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:POWer..............................460
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:STATe...............................460
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:TTIEdch.............................460
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
CCODe?
The command queries the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the
DPDCH channel.
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
Return values:
<CCODe>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​HSUP:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​CCOD?
queries the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or
Q)of E-DPDCH 1 of user equipment 4.
Response:​
Q,​32
444
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA <Data>
The command selects the data source for the E-DPDCH channel.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|
DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
SOURce:[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​
HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​
HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​DATA:​DSEL 'dp1'
selects the data list dp1.
445
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
DATA:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern data
source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal,
octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​PATT #H3F,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
POWer <Power>
The command sets the power of the selected E-DPDCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​POW -2.5dB
sets the power of E-DPDCH channel 1 (and all the other currently
active channels) to 2.5 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​CHANnel<ch>:​DPDCh:​E:​
SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate and the state of the E-DCDCH channel.
The symbol rate and the state of channel 2 to 6 are dependent on the overall symbol rate
set and cannot be modified.
Return values:
<Srate>
Example:
Usage:
BB:​W3GP:​MST4:​HSUP:​CHAN1:​DPDC:​E:​SRAT?
queries the symbol rate of E-DPDCH 1 of user equipment 4.
Response:​
960
the symbol rate is 960 ksps.
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​DTX:​PATTern
<Pattern>
The command sets the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximim length is 64 bits.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
446
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​DTX:​PATT "11-1-"
sets the bit pattern for the DTX.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​DTX:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​DTX:​STAT ON
activates the DTX mode.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​CHANnel
<Channel>
The command sets the FRC according to TS 25.141 Annex A.10.
Selection of FRC#8 is enabled only for instruments equipped with option SMx/AMU-K59.
Parameters:
<Channel>
Example:
USER|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8
*RST:
4
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​CHAN 4
sets the FRC to channel 4.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​CRATe?
The command queries the relation between the information bits to binary channel bits.
Return values:
<Crate>
float
Example:
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​CRAT?
queries the coding rate.
Response:​
0.705
the coding rate is 0.705.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
447
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA <Data>
Selects the data source for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this paramter affects the corresponding paramter of the E-DPDCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|DLISt|ZERO | ONE|
PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​
DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​
HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​PATTern. The maximum length
is 64 bits.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​PATT #H48D0,​16
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​
DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for E-DCH
channels.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
string
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​DSEL 'frc_1'
selects the data list frc_1.
448
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<64 bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DATA:​PATT
#B11110000,​8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the E-DCH channels.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​BIT:​
LAYer <Layer>
The command sets the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
Example:
TRANsport|PHYSical
*RST:
PHYSical
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DERR:​BIT:​LAY
TRAN
sets the bit error insertion to the transport layer.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​BIT:​
RATE <Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-1 to 1E-7
*RST:
5E-3
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE
1e-3
sets the bit error rate to 1E-3.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​BIT:​
STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Parameters:
<State>
ON|OFF
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
OFF
449
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DERR:​BIT:​STAT
ON
activates the bit error state.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-1 to 1E-4
*RST:
5E-3
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DERR:​BLOC:​
RATE 1E-3
sets the block error rate.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DERRor:​
BLOCk:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DERR:​BLOC:​
STAT ON
activates the block error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​PATTern
<Pattern>
The command sets the user-definable bit pattern for the DTX.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
string
*RST:
"1"
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​PATT
"11-1-"
sets the bit pattern for the DTX.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
450
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​DTX:​STAT ON
activates the DTX.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​ADEFinition <Adefinition>
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
Selects whether a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK or a low level.
Parameters:
<Adefinition>
Example:
HIGH|LOW
*RST:
HIGH
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
ADEF HIGH
a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​DELay:​AUSer <Auser>
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
Selects an additional delay to adjust the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
Parameters:
<Auser>
Example:
float
Range:
-50 to 50
*RST:
0
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
DEL:​AUS 20
sets the additional user delay to 20.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​DELay:​FEEDback?
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
Queries the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
Return values:
<Feedback>
float
Example:
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
DEL:​FEED?
queries the delay between HARQ and feedback.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
451
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​MODE <Mode>
Selects the HARQ simulation mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
VHARq | HFEedback
VHARq
This mode simulates basestation feedback. For every HARQ
process (either 4 or 8), a bit pattern can be defined to simulate
ACKs and NACKs.
HFEedback
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
This mode allows the user to dynamically control the transmission
of the HSUPA fixed reference channels (FRC 1-7). An "ACK" from
the base station leads to the transmission of a new packet while
a "NACK" forces the instrument to retransmit the packet with a new
channel coding configuration (i.e. new "redundancy version") of
the concerned HARQ process.
Example:
*RST:
HFE
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
MODE VHAR
sets simulation mode Virtual HARQ.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​MRETransmissions <Mretransmissions>
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
Sets the maximum number of retransmissions. After the expiration of this value, the next
packet is send, regardless of the received feedback.
Parameters:
<Mretransmissions> float
Example:
Range:
0 to 20
*RST:
4
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
MRET 10
sets the maximum number of retransmissions to 10.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation:​RVZero <Rvzero>
(not for R&S SMBV instruments)
If activated, the same redundancy version is sent, that is, the redundancy version is not
adjusted for the next retransmission in case of a received NACK.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
452
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Rvzero>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​RVZ
ON
the same redundancy version is sent for the next retransmission.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​
SIMulation[:​STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the HARQ simulation mode.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
STAT ON
activates the HARQ simulation mode.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​HARQ[:​
SIMulation]:​PATTern<ch> <Pattern>
Sets the HARQ Pattern. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
string
SOUR1:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HARQ:​SIM:​
HARQ:​PATT 1010
sets the HARQ simulation pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​
HPROcesses?
The command queries the number of HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowlegement) process.
Return values:
<Hprocesses>
float
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HPRO?
queries the number of HARQ processes.
Response:​ 5
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​MIBRate?
The command queries the maximum information bit rate.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
453
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<Mibrate>
float
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​HPRO?
queries the maximum ninformation bit rate.
Response:​ 1353.0
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​MODulation
<Modulation>
Sets the modulation used for the selected FRC.
Two modulation schemes are defined: BPSK for FRC 1 - 7 and 4PAM (4 Pulse-Amplitude
Modulation) for FRC 8.
Parameters:
<Modulation>
Example:
BPSK|PAM4
*RST:
BPSK
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​CHAN 8
sets the FRC to channel 8.
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​MOD 4PAM
sets the modulation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​ORATe
<Orate>
Sets the overall symbol rate for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this parameter affects the corresponding parameter of the E-DPDCH.
Parameters:
<Orate>
Example:
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k|D1920k|
D2X1920K|D2X960K2X1920K
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​ORAT D2X1920K
sets the overall symbol rate.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​PAYBits?
The command queries the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number ob tranport layer bits sent in each HARQ process.
Return values:
<Paybits>
float
Example:
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​PAYB?
queries the payload of the information bit.
Response:​ 2706
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
454
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the FRC state for the E-DPCCH channels.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​STAT ON
activates the FRC state for the E-DPCCH channels.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​INDex
<Index>
Selects the Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI) for the corresponding table, as described
in in 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B.
The value range of this parameter depends on the selected Transport Block Size Table
([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​
TABLe).
Parameters:
<Index>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to max
*RST:
41
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​TABL TAB0TTI10
sets the transport block size table
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​INX 127
sets the transport bleock size index.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​TABLe
<Table>
Selects the Transport Block Size Table from 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B according to that
the transport block size is configured.
The transport block size is determined also by the Transport Block Size Index ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​INDex).
The maximum values for this command depend on the selected E-DCH TTI ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TTIEdch)
and modulation scheme ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​
DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​MODulation).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
455
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
E-DCH TTI
Modulation
Transport Block
Size Table
SCPI Paramater
Transport Block
Size Index (ETFCI)
2ms
BPSK
Table 0
TAB0TTI2
0 .. 127
Table 1
TAB1TTI2
0 .. 125
Table 2
TAB2TTI2
0 .. 127
Table 3
TAB3TTI2
0 .. 124
Table 0
TAB0TTI10
0 .. 127
Table 1
TAB1TTI10
0 .. 120
4PAM
10ms
-
Parameters:
<Table>
Example:
TAB0TTI2|TAB1TTI2|TAB2TTI2|TAB3TTI2|TAB0TTI10|
TAB1TTI10
*RST:
TAB0TTI10
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​ORAT D1920
sets the overall symbol rate
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​MOD BPSK
sets the modulation
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TTIE 2
sets the E-DCH TTI
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​TABL TAB0TTI2
sets the transport block size table
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TBS:​IND 25
sets the transport block size index
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TTIBits?
The command queries the number of physical bits sent in each HARQ process.
Return values:
<Ttibits>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TTIB?
queries the number of physical bits sent in each HARQ process.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​TTIEdch
<Ttiedch>
Sets the the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​TTIE 2ms
sets the TTI.
456
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​FRC:​UECategory?
Queries the UE category that is minimum required for the selected FRC.
Return values:
<Uecategory>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​FRC:​UEC?
queries the UE category.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​HBIT <Hbit>
The command activates the happy bit.
Parameters:
<Hbit>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​HBIT ON
sets the happy bit.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​POWer <Power>
Sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Example:
Range:
-80 to 0
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​POW -10
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​POWer <Power>
The command sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
*RST:
0 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​POW -2.5dB
sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​RSNumber
<Rsnumber>
The command sets the retransmission sequence number.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
457
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Rsnumber>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 3
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​RSN 0
sets the retransmission sequence number.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates E-DPCCHs. This always activates or deactivates
all the channels.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​STAT ON
activates all the E-DPCCHs.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​TFCI <Tfci>
The command sets the value for the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 127
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​TFCI 0
sets the value for the TFCI.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPCCh:​E:​TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​TTIE 2ms
sets the value for the TTI to 2 ms.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​DTX:​PATTern
<Pattern>
The command sets the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximim length is 64 bits.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
458
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
64 bit pattern
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​DTX:​PATT "11-1-"
sets the bit pattern for the DTX.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​DTX:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPCC:​E:​DTX:​STAT ON
activates the DTX mode.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​FCIO <Fcio>
The command sets the channelization code to I/0.
Parameters:
<Fcio>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​FCIO ON
sets the channelization code to I/0.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​MODulation
<Modulation>
Sets the modulation of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified for this channel, BPSK and 4PAM
(4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for the following Overall
Symbol Rates ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​
ORATe):
●
2x960 ksps
●
2x1920 ksps
●
2x960 + 2x1920 ksps.
Note: Modulation scheme 4PAM is available only for instruments equipped with the
HSPA+ option SMx-K59.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
459
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Modulation>
Example:
BPSK|PAM4
*RST:
BPSK
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​ORAT D2x960K2x1920K
sets the overall symbol rate
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​MOD 4PAM
sets the modulation to 4PAM
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​ORATe <Orate>
The command sets the overall symbol rate of all the E-DPDCH channels.
Parameters:
<Orate>
Example:
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k|D1920k|
D2X1920K|D2X960K2X1920K
*RST:
D60K
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​ORAT D60K
sets the overall symbol rate
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​POWer <Power>
Sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Example:
Range:
-80 to 0
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​POW -10
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates the E-DPDCHs. This always activates or deactivates all the channels.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​STAT ON
activates all the E-DPDCHs.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>[:​HSUPa]:​DPDCh:​E:​TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
460
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
Example:
2ms|10ms
*RST:
2ms
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​HSUP:​DPDC:​E:​TTIE 2ms
sets the value for the TTI to 2 ms.
6.9.8 UL-DTX Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:DPCC:BURSt........................................461
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:DPCC:CYCLe.......................................461
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:DPCC:OFFSet......................................462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:DPCC:POSTamble................................462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:DPCC:PREamble..................................462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:UDTX:STATe..................................................463
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​BURSt <Burst>
Sets the DPCCH length in subframes.
Parameters:
<Burst>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
1 subframe to 5 subframes
*RST:
1 subframe
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​DPCC:​BURS 2
sets the DPCCH length
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​CYCLe <Cycle>
Sets the offset in subframe between two consecutive DPCCH bursts, i.e. determines how
offen the DPCCH birsts are transmitted.
The minimum allowed value of the DTX cycle is calculated so that there is no overlap
between two DPCCH bursts.
This parameter can be used to set different UE DTX cycles.
Parameters:
<Cycle>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
2 subframes to 160 subframes
*RST:
5 subframes
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​DPCC:​CYCL 4
sets the UL-DTX cycle
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
461
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​OFFSet <Offset>
(for instruments equipped with option R&S SMx/AMU-K59 only)
Sets start offset of first DPCCH bursts.
Parameters:
<Offset>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0 to 9 subframes
*RST:
0 subframes
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​DPCC:​OFFS 2
sets the UL-DTX offset
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​POSTamble?
Sets the postamble length in slots.
The postamble is added to the DPCCH burst for synchronisation reasons. The postamble
length determines how many slots longer the UE will continue with the DPCCH transmission after uplink data or HS-DPCCH transmission have neen terminated.
The postable legnth is fixed to 1 slot.
Return values:
<Postamble>
Example:
float
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​DPCC:​POST?
queries the postamble length
Response:​ 1
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​DPCC:​PREamble <Preamble>
Sets the preamble length in slots.
A pramble can be added to the DPCCH burst for synchronisation reasons. The preamble
length determines how many slots in advance the UE will start with the DPCCH transmission before uplink data or HS-DPCCH transmission are allocated. Hence, a longer
preamble should be configured to simulate an absence of uplink data or HS-DPCCH
transmission for a longer time.
Parameters:
<Preamble>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 to 15 slots
*RST:
2 slots
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​DPCC:​PRE 5
sets the DPCCH preamble length
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
462
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​UDTX:​STATe <State>
Enables/disables uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX), i.e. uplink DPCCH gating.
Since uplink gating is only active if there is no uplink data transmission on E-DCH or HSDPCCH transmission ongoing, enabling the UL-DTX deactivates the channels DPDCH,
HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH.
Parameters:
<State>
0|1|OFF|ON
Example:
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​UDTX:​STAT ON
enables UL-DTX
Options:
R&S SMx/AMU-K59
6.10 Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced subsystem contains the commands for
setting the enhanced channels of user equipment 1 (UE1). The channels of UE1 are
always generated in enhanced mode. The commands of this system only take effect
when the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the uplink transmission direction is selected
and user equipment 1 is enabled:
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​STATe ON
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​LINK UP
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation1:​STATe ON
TCHannel<di>
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:BPFRame................................464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:STATe......................464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE........................465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:CATalog..........465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:DELete............466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:LOAD..............466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:STORe............467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:LAYer...................467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE....................467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:STATe..................468
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE..............468
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:STATe.............468
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:DIRection.................469
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:MODE......................469
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN.........470
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
463
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:RANGe:UP...............470
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:STATe.....................470
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:STEP:MANual...........470
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:STEP[:EXTernal].......471
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl[:POWer]...................472
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:INTerleaver2.............................472
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe....................................473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:STATe.....................................473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<ch>:RMATtribute......473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<ch>:STATe...............473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<ch>:TBCount............474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<ch>:TBSize..............474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<ch>:TTINterval.........474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:CRCSize............475
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:DATA.................475
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:DATA:
DSELect.............................................................................................................475
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:DATA:
PATTern.............................................................................................................476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:EPRotection.......476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di>:INTerleaver.........477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:STATe.......................477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE........................477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:STATe................478
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE..................478
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​BPFRame?
The command queries the number of data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame at
the physical layer. The number of data bits depends on the overall symbol rate.
Return values:
<Bpframe>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​BPFR?
queries the number of data bits.
Response:​ 300
the number of data bits is 300.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the enhanced channels.
When channel coding is activated, the overall symbol rate ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​ORATe) is set to the value predetermined by the
selected channel coding type ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​
DPDCh:​CCODing:​TYPE).
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
464
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​TYPE M12K2
selects channel coding type RMC 12.2 kbps.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification. The channel coding scheme selected predetermines the overall symbol rate.
When channel coding is activated ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​
ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​STATe) the overall symbol rate ([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​
W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​ORATe) is set to the value predetermined by the
selected channel coding type.
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2|M64K|M144k|M384k|AMR
M12K2
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 12.2 ksps.
M64K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 64 ksps.
M144K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 144 ksps.
M384K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 384 ksps.
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel).
USER
This parameter cannot be set. USER is returned whenever a userdefined channel coding is active, that is to say, after a channel
coding parameter has been changed or a user coding file has been
loaded. The file is loaded by the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​
BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
LOAD.
Example:
*RST:
M12K2
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​TYPE M144K
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
CATalog?
The command queries existing files with stored user channel codings.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
465
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​USER:​CAT?
queries the existing files with user coding.
Response:​ 'user_cc1'
there is one file with user coding.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
DELete <Delete>
The command deletes the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no *RST value.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​USER:​DEL 'user_cc1'
deletes the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​LOAD
<Load>
The command loads the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Load>
string
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
466
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​USER:​LOAD 'user_cc1'
loads the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​USER:​
STORe <Store>
The command saves the current settings for channel coding as user channel coding in
the specified file.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory in which the file is stored is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To store the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Store>
string
Example:
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​USER:​STOR 'user_cc1'
saves the current channel coding setting in file user_cc1 in directory <root>\Lists\Wcdma\CcodDpchUser.
Usage:
Setting only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​LAYer
<Layer>
The command selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport|PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2). This layer is only available when
channel coding is active.
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1)
Example:
*RST:
PHYSical
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​RATE
<Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
467
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-7 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-3
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel coding
is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or
transport layer). When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted
at random points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an
invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE
<Rate>
The command sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
float
Range:
1E-4 to 5E-1
*RST:
5E-1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​
STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. Block error generation is
only possible when channel coding is activated.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
468
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is
inverted at the specified error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 10E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DERR:​BLOC:​STAT ON
activates block error generation.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​DIRection
<Direction>
The command selects the Dynamic Power Control direction. The selected direction
determines if the channel power is increased (UP) or decreased (DOWN) by control signal
with high level.
Parameters:
<Direction>
Example:
UP|DOWN
*RST:
UP
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects direction up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​MODE
<Mode>
The command selects the Dynamic Power Control mode. The mode determines the
source of the control signal.
Note: R&S SMBV instruments do not support External Power Control.
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
TPC|MANual | EXTernal
*RST:
EXTernal
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​MODE EXT
selects external power control. The control signal is supplied via
the LEV ATT input of the AUX I/O connector.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​MODE TPC
selects manual power control.
469
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​RANGe:​
DOWN <Down>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging down the channel power.
Parameters:
<Down>
Example:
float
Range:
0 dB to 30 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
10 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 20dB
selects a dynamic range of 20 dB for ranging down the channel
power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​RANGe:​UP
<Up>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging up the channel power.
Parameters:
<Up>
Example:
float
Range:
0 dB to 30 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
10 dB
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 20dB
selects a dynamic range of 20 dB for ranging up the channel
power.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STATe
<State>
The command activates/deactivates Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for the enhanced channels of
UE1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STEP:​
MANual <Manual>
This command provides the control signal for manual mode of Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<Manual>
MAN0|MAN1
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
MAN1
470
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects direction up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel
power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging down the channel
power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​STEP 0.5 dB
selects a step width of 0.5 dB. A high level of the control signal
leads to an increase of 0.5 dB of the channel power, a low level to
a decrease of 0.5 dB. The overall increase and decrease of channel power is limited to 10 dB each.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​MODE MAN
selects manual power control.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for the enhanced channels of
UE1.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​STEP:​MAN MAN0
decreases the level by 0.5 dB.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl:​STEP[:​
EXTernal] <External>
This command sets step width by which – with Dynamic Power Control being switched
on - the channel power of the enhanced channels is increased or decreased.
Parameters:
<External>
float
Range:
0.25 dB to 6 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
1 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
471
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​DPC:​DIR UP
selects direction up, a high level of the control signals leads to an
increase of the channel power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​RANG:​UP 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel
power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​RANG:​DOWN 10 dB
selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging down the channel
power.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPC:​STEP 0.5 dB
selects a step width of 0.5 dB. A high level of the control signal
leads to an increase of 0.5 dB of the channel power, a low level to
a decrease of 0.5 dB. The overall increase and decrease of channel power is limited to 10 dB each.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​MODE EXT
selects external power control.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC:​STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for the enhanced channels of
UE1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​DPControl[:​POWer]?
The command queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power
start value of the DPDCH.
Return values:
<Power>
float
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​DPC?
queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the
set power start value of the DPDCH
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​INTerleaver2
<Interleaver2>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the
transport channels.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each channel individually ([:​
SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
INTerleaver).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change
Parameters:
<Interleaver2>
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON
472
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​INT2 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the transport
channels.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​ORATe?
The command queries the overall symbol rate (Overall Symbol Rate) of the enhanced
channels. The value is set with the command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​
MSTation<st>:​DPDCh:​ORATe. This setting also defines the number of active channels, their symbol rates and channelization codes.
Return values:
<Orate>
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k|D1920k|D2880k|
D3840k|D4800k|D5760k
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​ORAT?
queries the overall symbol rate of the DPDCH of user equipment
1.
Usage:
Query only
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates DPDCH.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​ENH:​DPDC:​STAT ON
activates the DPDCH.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
RMATtribute <Rmattribute>
The command sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
Parameters:
<Rmattribute>
Example:
float
Range:
16 to 1024
*RST:
256
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH:​RMAT 1024
sets rate matching to 1024 for DTCH1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​STATe
<State>
The command activates/deactivates the selected transport channel.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
473
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH1:​STAT
activates DTCH1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
TBCount <Tbcount>
The command sets the transport block count.
Parameters:
<Tbcount>
Example:
float
Range:
1 to 16
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH2:​TBC 4
activates 4 transport blocks for DTCH1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​TBSize
<Tbsize>
The command sets the size of the data blocks.
Parameters:
<Tbsize>
Example:
float
Range:
0 to 4096
*RST:
100
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH2:​TBS 1024
sets the length of the transport blocks for DTCH2 to 1024.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<ch>:​
TTINterval <Ttinterval>
The command sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also
defines the interleaver depth.
Parameters:
<Ttinterval>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
10MS | 20MS | 40MS | 80MS
*RST:
10MS
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH2:​TTIN 20ms
sets that the transport channel is divided into 2 frames.
474
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
CRCSize <Crcsize>
The command defines the CRC length for the selected transport channel. It is also possible to deactivate checksum determination.
Parameters:
<Crcsize>
Example:
NONE|8|12|16|24
*RST:
12
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH:​CRCS NONE
deactivates checksum determination for DTCH1.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA
<Data>
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO|ONE|PATTern|PN9|PN11|PN15|PN16|PN20|PN21|PN23|
DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​
TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​
ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​PATTern.
Example:
*RST:
PN9
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH2:​DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the data fields of DTCH2 of user
equipment 1, the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH2:​DATA:​PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​
DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list for the enhanced channels for the DLISt selection.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
475
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
string
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH1:​DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:​CDIR '<root>\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH1:​DATA:​DSEL 'TCH1'
selects the file tch1 as the data source.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​DATA:​
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection for
transport channels.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
<bit pattern>
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH0:​DATA:​PATT
defines the bit pattern for DCCH.
#H3F, 8
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
EPRotection <Eprotection>
The command determines the error protection.
Parameters:
<Eprotection>
NONE|TURBo3|CON2|CON3
NONE
No error protection.
TURBo3
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP
specifications.
CON2 | CON3
Convolution Coder of rate ½ or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
CON1/3
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH1:​EPR NONE
error protection is deactivated.
476
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​TCHannel<di>:​
INTerleaver <INTerleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the selected
channel. Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each channel individually. The channel is selected via the suffix at TCHannel.
Interleaver state 2 can only be activated or deactivated for all the channels together
([:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​DPDCh:​INTerleaver2).
Parameters:
<INTerleaver>
Example:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​TCH5:​INT1 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for TCH 5.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the PCPCH.
When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is limited to the range between 15 and
120 ksps. Values above this limit are automatically set to 120 ksps.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PCPC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects channel coding type CPCH RMC (TB size 168 bits).
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PCPC:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation:​ENHanced:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168|TB360
TB168
CPCH RMC (TB size 168 bits)
TB360
CPCH RMC (TB size 360 bits)
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
TB168
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PCPC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects channel coding scheme RMC 168 bits.
477
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PRACh:​CCODing:​STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the PRACH.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON|OFF
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PRAC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects channel coding type RACH RMC (TB size 168 bits).
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PRAC:​CCOD:​STAT ON
activates channel coding.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​BB:​W3GPp:​MSTation<st>:​ENHanced:​PRACh:​CCODing:​TYPE
<Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168|TB360
TB168
RACH RMC (TB size 168 bits)
TB360
RACH RMC (TB size 360 bits)
Example:
*RST:
TB168
BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PRAC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects channel coding scheme RMC 168 bits.
6.11 SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
The signal generator gives you the opportunity to generate predefined settings which
enable tests on base stations in conformance with the 3G Standard 3GPP-FDD. It offers
a selection of predefined settings according to Test Cases in TS 25.141. The settings
take effect only after execution of command [SOURce:​]BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​
TCASe:​EXECute.
The test setups and equipment requirements for each Test Case are described in chapter 5.1, "Introduction", on page 230.
Unlike most of the other commands of the SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp Subsystem, key word
SOURce is without Suffix. Signal routing is possible only for Test Cases that do not use
diversity and is performed via command :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​ROUTe.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
478
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​CNRatio <Cnratio>
This command sets the carrier/noise ratio in mode "User definable" (:​SOURce:​BB:​
W3GPp:​ TS25141:​EMODe USER). It is query only in mode "According to Standard"
(:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard).
Sets command :​SOURce1|2:​AWGN:​CNR after execution of :SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Cnratio>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-40 dB to 40 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-16.8 dB
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC73
selects test case 7.3.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​CNR?
queries the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal.
Response:​ -16.80
the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal is -16.8 dB.
Test Cases 7.3, 8.x (not 8.6); minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required options see
selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​ENRatio <Enratio>
This command sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density in mode "User definable" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​ TS25141:​EMODe USER). It is query only in mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard).
Sets command :​SOURce1|2:​AWGN:​ENR after execution of :SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Enratio>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
8.7 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
479
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC821
selects test case 8.2.1.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​ENR?
queries the ratio of bit energy to noise power density of the interfering signal.
Response:​ 8.70
the E/N ratio of the interfering signal is 8.7 dB.
Options:
Test Cases 8.x (not 8.6); minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required options see
selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe?
This command sets the noise level in mode "User definable "(:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​
TS25141:​ EMODe USER). It is query only in mode "According to Standard" (:​
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​ TS25141:​EMODe STANdard).
Sets command :​SOURce1|2:​AWGN:​POW:​NOISe after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​
W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Return values:
<Noise>
Example:
float
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
Depending on the selected test case
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC73
selects test case 7.3.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​POW:​NOIS?
queries the noise level of the interfering signal.
Response:​ -73
the noise level of the interfering signal is -73 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
Test Cases 7.3, 8.x (not 8.6); minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required options see
selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RBLock:​RATE <Rate>
This command sets the required block error rate in edit mode "According to Standard"
(:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard). The possible selection depends
on the set fading configuration.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
480
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
Options:
B0|B01|B001|B0001
*RST:
B001
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC893
selects test case 8.9.3.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RBL:​RATE B01
sets the required block error rate to< 0.01.
Test Cases 8.x (not 8.6, 8.8.1, 8.8.2, 8.9.1, 8.9.2); minimum
requirement: Options B13, B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required options see selected test case
Test Cases 8.x (not 8.6, 8.8.1, 8.9.1); minimum requirement:
Options B13, B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required
options see selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RPDetection:​RATE <Rate>
This command sets the required probability of detection of preamble (Pd) in edit mode
"According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard). The
selection determines the ratio Eb/N0.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
Options:
PD099|PD0999
*RST:
PD099
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​RPD:​RATE PD099
sets the required probability of detection of preamble to > 0.99.
The E/N ratio of the interfering signal is -8.8 dB.
Test Cases 8.8.1, 8.8.2, 8.9.1, 8.9.2; minimum requirement:
Options B13, B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required
options see selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​AWGN:​STATe <State>
This command enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal in mode "User
Definable". In mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "ON".
Sets command :​SOURce1|2:​AWGN:​STATe after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
481
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Options:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD USER
selects mode "User definable". Also settings that are not in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​AWGN:​STAT OFF
disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
Test Cases 7.3, 8.x (not 8.6); minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11, K42 and K62; For additionally required options see
selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSPClass <Bspclass>
This command enters the base station power class in mode A"ccording to Standard" (:​
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard). The selected power class determines the output level of the signal generator. For edit mode "User Definable "(:​
SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe USER), the output level can be set with command :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​POWer.
Sets the power commands associated with the selected test case (e.g. :​SOURce1|2:​
POWer) after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Bspclass>
Example:
Options:
WIDE|MEDium|LOCal
*RST:
WIDE
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​BSPC WIDE
the base station under test is a wide area base station.
All test cases except for 6.6; minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11 and K42; For additionally required options see selected
test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSSignal:​FREQuency <Frequency>
This command enters the RF frequency of the base station.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
100 kHz to 6 GHz
*RST:
1.0 GHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​BSS:​FREQ 1GHz
the frequency of the base station under test is 1 GHz.
Test case 6.6; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
482
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​BSSignal:​POWer <Power>
This command enters the RF power of the base station.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Example:
Range:
-145 dBm to 20 dBm
Increment: 0.1 dBm
*RST:
-30.0 dBm
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC66
selects test case 6.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​BSS:​POW -30
the power of the base station under test is -30 dBm.
Options:
Test case 6.6; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe <Emode>
This command selects the edit mode for the configuration of the test cases.
Parameters:
<Emode>
STANdard|USER
STANdard
Edit mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance
with TS 25.141 are possible. All other parameters are preset.
USER
Edit mode "User definable". A wider range of settings is possible
Example:
Options:
*RST:
STAN
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD USER
selects edit mode "User definable".
All test cases; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and
K42; For additionally required options see selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​FSIMulator:​STATe?
This command queries the state of the Fading Simulator. For test cases using static
propagation conditions this parameter is set to OFF.
For test cases using multipath fading, moving propagation or birth/death propagation
conditions, this parameter is set to ON.
Return values:
<State>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
0|1|OFF|ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​FSIM:​STAT?
queries the state of the fading simulator.
Response:​ 0
the fading simulator is disabled.
483
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
Options:
Test Cases 8.x (not 8.6); minimum requirement Options B13, B10/
B11, B14, B15, K42, K62 and K71; For additionally required
options see selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​BWIDth <Bwidth>
This command selects the interferer scenario.
Parameters:
<Bwidth>
WIDE|NARRow
WIDE
A 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal is generated for path B. In
"According to Standard" mode, the 3GPP FDD uplink interfering
signal is superimposed by a CW interfering signal with a frequency
of 10 MHz and a level of -48 dB.
NARROW
A GMSK interfering signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter
0.22, PRBS9 data source) is generated for path B. In "According
to Standard" mode, the GMSK interfering signal is superimposed
by a CW interfering signal with a frequency of 3.5 MHz and a level
of -47 dB
Example:
Options:
*RST:
WIDE
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID WIDE
selects a 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal 1
Test Case 7.6; Option K62 and B20x, two options B13, B10/B11,
and K42 each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CNRatio <Cnratio>
This command sets the power ratio of wanted signal to interfering signal for test case 7.4
in mode "User definable" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​ TS25141:​EMODe USER). It is query
only in mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe
STANdard).
This command sets the power ratio of interfering signal to wanted signal for test case 6.6
in mode "User definable "(:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​ TS25141:​EMODe USER). It is query
only in mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe
STANdard).
Sets command :​SOURce2:​POWer after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCASe:​EXECute.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
484
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Cnratio>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-63 dB
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC74
selects test case 7.4.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​CNR?
queries the power ratio.
Response:​-63.0
the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal is -63 dB.
Test case 6.6; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42 Test case 7.4;
Options B13, B10/B11, B20x , and two options K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​FOFFset <Foffset>
This command sets frequency offset of the CW interfering signal versus the wanted signal
RF frequency. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​
EMODe STANdard) the frequency offset value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWIDth).
Sets commands :​SOURce2:​FREQ, :​SOURce2:​BB:​FOFF and :​SOURce2:​AWGN:​
FREQ:​TARGet after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Foffset>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
-40 MHz to 40 MHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
10 MHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​IFS:​BWID WIDE
selects interferer scenario wideband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​CW:​FOFF?
queries the frequency offset of the CW interferer.
Response:​ 10000000
the frequency offset is 10 MHz.
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, second option B10/B11
and B13 each, two options K42.
485
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​POWer <Power>
This command sets the RF level of the CW interfering signal. In mode "According to
Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the RF level value is
fixed to a value determined by the selected "Interferer Bandwidth" "(:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFS:BWIDth").
Sets commands :​SOURce2:​AWGN:​CNRatio and :​SOURce2:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe
after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-145 dBm to 20 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBm
*RST:
-48 dBm
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​CW:​POW?
queries the RF level of the CW interferer.
Response:​ -47
the RF level is -47.00 dBm.
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, two options B10/B11, B13,
two options and K42 each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​CW:​STATe <State>
This command enable/disables the CW interfering signal. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the value is fixed to ON.
Sets commands :​SOURce2:​AWGN:​CNRatio and :​SOURce2:​AWGN:​POWer:​NOISe
after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<State>
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
ON
486
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode According to Standard. Only settings in compliance
with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​CW:​STAT?
queries the state of the CW interferer.
Response:​ 1
the CW interferer is enabled.
Options:
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, second option B10/B11
and B13 each, two options K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​FOFFset <Foffset>
This command sets frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal RF
frequency. For test case 7.4, the choice is limited to +/- 5 MHz in mode "According to
Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard).
Sets commands :​SOURce2:​FREQ after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Foffset>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-40 MHz to 40 MHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
1 MHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC74
selects test case 7.4.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​FOFF 0.5 MHz
sets the frequency offset of the interferer to 5 MHz.
Test cases 7.4 / 7.5; Option B20x, two options B10/B11, B13 and
K42 each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​FOFFset <Foffset>
This command sets frequency offset of the modulated interfering signal versus the wanted signal RF frequency. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​
TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the frequency offset value is fixed to a value determined
by the selected "Interferer Bandwidth" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWIDth).
Sets commands :​SOURce2:​FREQ and :​SOURce2:​BB:​FOFF after execution of :​
SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​ TCAS:​EXEC
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
487
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Foffset>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-40 MHz to 40 MHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
20 MHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode According to Standard. Only settings in compliance
with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID WIDE
selects interferer scenario wideband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​MOD:​FOFF?
queries the frequency offset of the modulated interferer.
Response:​ 20000000
the frequency offset is 20 MHz.
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, second option B10/B11
and B13 each, two options K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​POWer <Power>
This command sets the RF level of the modulated interfering signal. In mode "According
to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the RF level value
is fixed to a value determined by the selected "Interferer Bandwidth" (:​SOURce:​BB:​
W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFS:​ BWIDth).
Sets command :​SOURce2:​POWer after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
-145 dBm to 20 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBm
*RST:
-48 dBm
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​MOD:​POW?
queries the RF level of the modulated interferer.
Response:​ -47
the RF level is 47.00 dBm.
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, second option B10/B11
and B13 each, two options K42.
488
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​STATe <State>
This command enable/disables the modulated interfering signal. In mode "According to
Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the value is fixed to
ON.
Sets command :​SOURce2:​W3GP:​STAT (Bandwidth Type Wideband) or :​SOURce2:​
DM:​STATe (Bandwidth Type Narrowband) after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXEC
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Options:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​MOD:​STAT?
queries the state of the modulated interferer.
Response:​ 1
the modulated interferer is enabled.
Test Case 7.6; Options B20x and K62, second option B10/B11
and B13 each, two options K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​MODulated:​TYPE <Type>
This command selects the type of modulation for the interfering uplink signal in the second
path. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe
STANdard) the modulation type is fixed to "WCDMA" for interferer scenario wideband
and to "GMSK" for interferer scenario narrowband (:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​
IFSignal:​BWIDth WIDE|NARRow).
Sets commands of subsystem :​SOURce2:​W3GPp:​... (WCDMa) or :​SOURce2:​DM:​
... (QPSK and GMSK) after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​
EXEC
Parameters:
<Type>
WCDMa|CW|GMSK|QPSK
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
WCDMa
489
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​MOD:​TYPE?
queries the type of the modulated interferer.
Response:​ GMSK
the modulation type is GMSK.
Options:
Test case 7.6 Options; B20x and K62, second option B10/B11 and
B13 each, two options K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​POWer <Power>
This command sets the RF level of the interfering signal. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the RF level value is fixed to
a value determined by the selected "Blocking Scenario "(:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​
TS25141:​WSIGnal:​ BTYPe).
Sets command :​SOURce2:​POWer after execution of :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCASe:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
-145 dBm to 20 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBm
*RST:
-15 dBm
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​BTYP NARR
selects blocking scenario narrowband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​POW?
queries the RF level of the CW interferer.
Response:​ -47
the RF level is -47.00 dBm.
Test case 7.5; Option B20x, second option B10/B11 and B13
each, two options K42.
490
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​SETTing:​TMODel:​BSTation <Bstation>
This command selects the interfering signal from a list of test models in accordance with
TS 25.141. All test models refer to the predefined downlink configurations. In edit mode
"According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) Test
Model 1, 64 DPCHs is fixed.
Sets commands of subsystem :​SOURce1:​W3GPp:​... after execution of :​SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Bstation>
Example:
Options:
TM164|TM116|TM132|TM2|TM316|TM332|TM4|TM538|TM528|
TM58
*RST:
TM164
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC66
selects test case 6.6.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD USER
selects mode "User Definable".
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​SETT:​TMOD:​BST TM116
the interfering signal is generated according to test model Test
Model 1; 16 Channels.
Test case 6.6; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​STATe <State>
This command enable/disables the modulated interfering signal. In mode "According to
Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the value is fixed to
ON.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Options:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.5.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​STAT?
queries the state of the interferer.
Response:​ 1
the interferer is enabled.
Test cases 7.4 / 7.5; Options B13, B10/B11, B20x , and two K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​IFSignal:​TYPE <Type>
This command selects the type of modulation for the interfering signal. In mode "According to Standard" (:​SOURce:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​EMODe STANdard) the modulation
type is fixed to "WCDMA" for test case 7.4 and to "GMSK" for test case 7.5.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
491
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Type>
Example:
Options:
WCDMa|CW|GMSK|QPSK
*RST:
WCDMa
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.5.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode According to Standard. Only settings in compliance
with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​TYPE?
queries the type of the interferer.
Response:​ CW
the modulation type is CW interferer.
Test cases 7.4 / 7.5; Options B13, B10/B11, B20x , and two K42.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​ROUTe <Route>
The command selects the signal routing for baseband A signal which in most test cases
represents the wanted signal (exception test case 6.6). The command is only available
for two-path-instruments and only for test cases that do not use both paths anyway.
Parameters:
<Route>
A|B
A
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output A.
B
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output B.
Example:
Options:
*RST:
A
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​ROUT B
the baseband signal of path A is introduced into path B.
All test cases; minimum requirement: Option B20x, B10/B11, K42
and two options B13.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​RXDiversity <Rxdiversity>
The command sets the signal generator according to the base station diversity processing
capability. The command is only available for two-path-instruments and only for test
cases that do not use both paths anyway.
Sets the power commands associated with the selected test case (e.g. :​SOURce1|2:​
POWer) after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
492
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Rxdiversity>
0|1|OFF|ON
OFF
The baseband signal A is routed to either to RF output A or B.
ON
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output A and B.
Example:
Options:
*RST:
OFF
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​RXD ON
the baseband signal of path A is introduced into both paths.
Test cases 8.x; Options B20x, B14, B15, K71, and K62, two
options B10/B11 and B13 each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​SCODe <Scode>
The command sets the scrambling code. The value range depends on whether the generator is used in uplink or downlink direction (test case 6.6) according to the selected test
case.
Sets command :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​SCODe (test case 6.6) or :​SOURce:​BB:​
W3GP:​MST:​SCODe after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Sets command :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​SCODe (test case 6.6) or :​SOURce:​BB:​
W3GP:​MST:​SCODe after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Scode>
Example:
Options:
integer
*RST:
#H0
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​SCOD #H5FFF
sets scrambling code #H5FFF.
All test cases; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and
K42. For additionally required options see selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​SCODe:​MODE <Mode>
The command sets the type for the scrambling code for the uplink direction. The scrambling code generator can also be deactivated. In downlink direction (test case 6.6), the
scrambling generator can be switched on and off.
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​BST:​SCOD:​STAT (test case 6.6) or :​SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​MST:​SCOD:​MODE after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​
EXECute
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
OFF|ON|LONG|SHORt
*RST:
LONG | ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​SCOD:​MODE OFF
deactivates the scrambling code generator.
493
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Options:
All test cases; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and
K42. For additionally required options see selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TCASe <Tcase>
The command selects a test case defined by the standard. The signal generator is preset
according to the selected standard. The selected edit mode (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​EMODe) determines the range of parameters that can be adjusted.
Depending on the selected test case the parameters of the TS25141 commands are
preset. For most test cases also the parameters of one or more of the subsystems
SOURce:​AWGN, SOURce:​W3GPp, SOURce:​DM and SOURce:​FSIM are preset. The preset parameters are activated with command :​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Tcase>
TC642|TC66|TC72|TC73|TC74|TC75|TC76|TC78|TC821|
TC831|TC832|TC833|TC834|TC84|TC85|TC86|TC881|TC882|
TC883|TC884|TC891|TC892|TC893|TC894
Example:
*RST:
TC642
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC73
selects the test case 7.3, Dynamic Range.
Options:
Minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and K42 .
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
The command activates the current settings of the test case wizard. Signal generation is
started at the first trigger received by the generator. The RF output is not activated /
deactivated by this command, so care has to be taken that "RF State" is "On"
(OUTPut:​STATe ON) at the beginning of the measurement.
The command activates the preset parameters of the TS25141 commands and - for most
test cases - also the parameters of one or more of the subsystems SOURce:​AWGN,
SOURce:​W3GPp, SOURce:​DM and SOURce:​FSIM.
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC73
selects the settings for test case 7.3, Dynamic Range.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​BSPC MED
sets the base station power class Medium Range BS.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​SCOD #H000FFF
sets the uplink scrambling code 'H000FFF.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​FREQ 1710MHz
sets the wanted signal frequency.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
activates the settings for test case 7.3, Dynamic Range. For all
other parameters the preset values are used.
OUTP ON
activates RF output A.
Options:
Minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and K42. For additionally required options see selected test case.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
494
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TRIGger <Trigger>
The command selects the trigger mode. The trigger is used to synchronize the signal
generator to the other equipment.
When AUTO is selected, all commands concerning the baseband trigger settings are
adjusted to the requirements of the selected test case after execution of SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute.
Parameters:
<Trigger>
AUTO|PRESet|SINGle
AUTO
The trigger settings are customized for the selected test case. In
most cases trigger setting "Armed Auto" with external trigger
source "External Trigger 1" is used. Unless otherwise noted the
trigger delay is set equal to zero.
PRESet
The current trigger settings of the signal generator are kept.
Example:
Options:
*RST:
AUTO
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TRIG AUTO
selects customization of trigger mode for the selected test case
All test cases; Minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and
K42. For additionally required options see selected test case.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​TRIGger:​OUTPut <Output>
The command defines the signal for the selected marker output.
When "AUTO" is selected, all commands of the W3GPp Subsystem concerning the marker
settings are adjusted to the selected test case after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Output>
AUTO|PRESet
AUTO
The marker settings are customized for the selected test case.
PRESet
The current marker settings of the signal generator are kept.
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
AUTO
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TRIG:​OUTP PRES
selects that the current marker setting are kept independently of
the selected test case.
All test cases; Minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11 and
K42. For additionally required options see selected test case.
495
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​BTYPe <Btype>
The command selects the type of blocking scenario in edit mode "According to Standard" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN). The selected blocking scenario
determines the type of interfering signal and its level.
Determines the settings of subsystems :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​... (WIDE), :​SOUR:​BB:​
DM:​... (NARRow) or :​SOUR:​FREQ:​... and OUTPut:​... (COLocated and
WIDE) after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Btype>
WIDE|COLocated|NARRow
WIDE
The interferer signal for wide band blocking depends on the set
"Operating Band" and "RF Frequency":
As long as the interferer "RF frequency" lies within the selected
"Operating Band", a 3GPP FDD uplink signal with a power level
of -40 dB is generated for path B.
When the interferer "RF Frequency" lies outside the selected
"Operating Band", a CW carrier interfering signal with a power
level of -15 dB is generated for path B.
COLocated
A CW carrier interfering signal with a power level of -15 dB is
generated for path B.
NARRow
A GMSK (270.833 kHz) interfering signal with a power level of -47
dB is generated for path B.
Example:
Options:
*RST:
WIDE
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC75
selects the settings for test case 7.5, Blocking Characteristics.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​BTYP NARR
selects the GMSK (270.833 kHz) interfering signal
Test case 7.5; Option B20x, two options B10/B11, B13 and K42
each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DCRatio <Dcratio>
The command sets channel power ratio of DPCCH to DPDCH.
Sets commands :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​POW and :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​
DPDC:​POW after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Dcratio>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
496
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DCR -3 dB
sets a ratio of -3 dB for DPCCH power/DPDCH power
Options:
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​SFORmat <Sformat>
The command sets the slot format for the DPCCH. The slot format defines the FBI mode
and the TFCI status.
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​SFOR after execution of SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Sformat>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0 to 5
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​SFOR 3
selects slot format 3 for the DPCCH
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa <Rdata>
The command sets the TPC repeat pattern for verification of the base stations power
control steps.
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA to DLISt and activates a
predefined data list for TPC pattern (command:​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​
DATA:​DSEL) The commands are set only after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
497
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Rdata>
SINGle|AGGRegated|ONE|ZERO|PATTern|DLISt
AGGRegated
A 00000000001111111111 pattern is sent periodically for
measurement of the transmitter aggregated power control step
range after 10 consecutive equal commands.
DLISt
The TPC repeat pattern is taken from a data list. The data list is
selected with the command SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
DPDCh:​TPC:​RDAT:​DSELect.
ONE
A all 1 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to
maximum power. This selection is only available in edit mode
‘User Definable’ (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe USER).
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​DPDCh:​TPC:​RDAT:​PATTern.
The maximum length is 64 bits. This selection is only available in
edit mode "User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
EMODe USER).
SINGle
A 01 pattern is sent periodically for measurement of the transmitter
power control step tolerance.
ZERO
A all 0 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to
minimum power. This selection is only available in edit mode "User
Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe USER).
Example:
Options:
SINGle
*RST:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​RDAT SING
selects the 01 pattern
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list when the "DLISt" data source is selected for the
"TPC" repeat pattern of the "DPCCH".
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be given,
without the path and the file extension.
Determines contents of the predefined data list used with command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DTA:​DSEL after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​
EXEC
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
498
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Dselect>
<data_list_name>
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​RDAT DLIS
selects the data source DLISt
MMEM:​CDIR 'D:​\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​RDAT:​DSEL
'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
Options:
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​RDATa:​PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the "PATTern" data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits. This command is only available in edit mode
"User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe USER).
Determines the contents of the predefined data list used with command :​SOUR:​BB:​
W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DTA:​DSEL after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCAS:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
Options:
integer
*RST:
#H0, 1
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​RDAT PATT
selects the data source pattern
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​RDAT:​PATT
#HF0C20,​19
defines the TPC pattern
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa <Sdata>
The command sets the TPC pattern for initialization of the base stations power level in
edit mode "User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe USER). In edit mode
"According to Standard" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN) the pattern is
fixed to "Maximum Power Less n Steps" (PMAXlessnsteps). The TPC start pattern is
sent before the TPC repeat pattern to set the base station to a defined initial state for the
measurement.
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DATA to DLISt and activates a
predefined data list
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
499
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Sdata>
PMAX|DLISt
PMAXlessnsteps
A sequence of power up steps (TPC bits "1") is followed by a
number of power down steps (TPC bits "0"). The TPC bits "1"
('power up' commands) force the base station to maximum
transmit power. By the n ‘power down’ commands the base station
is set to a defined number of n power steps (e.g. 1 dB or 0.5 dB)
below its maximum transmit power at the beginning of the
measurement.
DLISt
The TPC start pattern is taken from a data list. The data list is
selected with the command SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
DPDCh:​TPC:​SDAT:​DSELect. This selection is only available in
edit mode "User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
EMODe USER).
Example:
Options:
*RST:
PMAX
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT PMAX
selects the 01 pattern
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​DSELect <Dselect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the
"TPC" start pattern of the "DPCCH".
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:​CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be given,
without the path and the file extension.
Determines contents of the predefined data list used with command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DTA:​DSEL after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​
EXEC
Parameters:
<Dselect>
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
<data_list_name>
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT DLIS
selects the data source DLISt for TPC start pattern.
MMEM:​CDIR 'D:​\Lists\Dm\IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT:​DSEL
'dpcch_tpc_s'
selects the data list dpcch_tpcs.
500
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Options:
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​PDSTeps
<Pdsteps>
The command sets the number of power down bits in the "TPC" start pattern. The total
TPC start pattern length is the number of ‘power up’ ('1') bits plus the number of n ‘power
down’ (‘0’) bits. This parameter is only available for TPC Start Pattern = Max. Pow. Less
N Steps (:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT PMAXlessnsteps).
Determines contents of the predefined data list used with command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DTA:​DSEL after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​
EXEC
Parameters:
<Pdsteps>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
1 to 1000
*RST:
1
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT PMAX
selects the pattern Max. Pow. Less N Steps
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT:​PUST 100
defines 100 power up steps. Presumably the base station is set to
to maximum transmit power.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT:​PDST 10
defines 10 power down steps. The base station is set to two power
steps below its maximum transmit power.
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPCCh:​TPC:​SDATa:​PUSTeps
<Pusteps>
The command sets the number of power up bits in the TPC start pattern. The total TPC
start pattern length is the number of ‘power up’ ('1') bits plus the number of n ‘power down’
(‘0’) bits. This parameter is only available for TPC Start Pattern = "Max. Pow. Less N
Steps" (:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT PMAXlessnsteps).
Determines contents of the predefined data list used with command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
MST1:​DPCC:​TPC:​DTA:​DSEL after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS:​
EXEC
Parameters:
<Pusteps>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
1 to 1000
1
501
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Example:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT PMAX
selects the pattern "Max. Pow. Less N Steps"
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT:​PUST 100
defines 100 power up bits. The base station is (presumably) set to
maximum transmit power.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPCC:​TPC:​SDAT:​PDST 10
defines 10 power down bits. The base station is set to two power
steps below its maximum transmit power. The TPC start patter is
110 bits long.
Options:
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11 and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification. The channel coding scheme selected predetermines the overall symbol rate. In
mode "According to Standard" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN), RMC 12.2
kbps (M12K2) is selected.
Sets command :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​DPDC:​ CCOD:​TYPE and :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​
DPDC:​ORAT after execution of :​SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2|M64K|M144k|M384k|AMR
M12K2
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 12.2 ksps
M64K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 64 ksps
M144K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 144 ksps
M384K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 384 ksps
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel)
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
M12K2
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPDC:​CCOD:​TYPE M144K
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
Test cases 7.3, 8.x; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11,
K42 and K62; For additionally required options see selected test
case
502
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BIT:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate. For test case 7.8 in mode "According to Standard" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN), only values 0.00 (no bit errors are
inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent bit errors are inserted) are available. For test case 8.6 this
command is only available for mode "User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
EMODe USER).
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPDC:​ENH:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE after execution
of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute.
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0 to 0.1
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPDC:​DERR:​BIT:​RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
Test cases 7.8, 8.6; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11,
K42 and K62. For additionally required options see selected test
case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​DERRor:​BLOCk:​RATE <Rate>
The command sets the block error rate. For test case 8.6 in mode "According to Standard" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN), only values 0.00 (no block errors are
inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent block errors are inserted) are available. For test case 7.8
this command is only available for mode "User Definable" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​EMODe USER).
Sets command :​SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​MST1:​DPDC:​ENH:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Rate>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
0 to 0.1
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPDC:​DERR:​BLOC:​RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
Test cases 7.8, 8.6; minimum requirement: Options B13, B10/B11
and K42. For additionally required options see selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​DPDCh:​ORATe <Orate>
The command sets the overall symbol rate. The structure of the "DPDCH" channel table
depends on this parameter. The overall symbol rate determines which "DPDCHs" are
active, which symbol rate they have and which channelization codes they use.
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
503
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Sets commands :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​DPDCh:​ORATe after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​
TS25141:​TCAS:​EXECute
Parameters:
<Orate>
D15K|D30K|D60K|D120k|D240k|D480k|D960k|D1920k|D2880k|
D3840k|D4800k|D5760k
D15K ... D5760K
15 ksps ... 6 x 960 ksps
Example:
Options:
D60K
*RST:
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​DPDC:​ORAT D15K
sets the overall symbol rate to 15 ksps. Only "DPDCH1" is active,
the symbol rate is 15 ksps and the channelization code is 64.
Test case 6.4.2; Options B13, B10/B11, and K42
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​FREQuency <Frequency>
The command sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
Sets command :​SOUR:​FREQ after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​
EXECute
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Example:
Options:
float
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
1 GHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​FREQ 2.5GHz
sets a frequency of 2.5 GHz for the wanted signal.
All test cases except for 6.6; minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11 and K42. For additionally required options see selected
test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​OBANd <Oband>
The command selects the operating band of the base station for "Wideband Blocking".
The operating band is required for calculation of power levels and interferer modulation.
Sets command :​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​IFS:​TYPE
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
504
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Parameters:
<Oband>
I | II | III | IV | V | VI
I
Operating band I: (1920 – 1980 MHz)
II
Operating band II: (1850 – 1910 MHz)
III
Operating band III: (1710 – 1785 MHz)
IV
Operating band IV: (1710 – 1755 MHz)
V
Operating band V: (824 – 849 MHz)
VI
Operating band VI: (830 – 840 MHz)
Example:
Options:
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
1 GHz
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC75
selects the settings for test case 7.5, Blocking Characteristics.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​BTYP WIDE
selects blocking scenario wideband.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​OBAN III
selects operating band III.
Test case 7.5; Option B20x, two options B10/B11, B13 and K42
each.
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​PCPCh:​CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the Transport Block Size.
Sets commands :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PCPC:​CCOD:​TYPE
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168|TB360
TB168
transport block size 168 bits
TB360
transport block size 360 bits
Example:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
TB168
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC893
selects the settings for test case 8.9.3, Demodulation of CPCH
Message in Static Propagation Conditions.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​PCPC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects transport block size 168 bits.
505
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
Options:
Test case 8.9.3; Option B20xs, and two option B13, B10/B11, and
K42 each
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​POWer <Power>
The command sets the RF level of the wanted signal in mode "User Definable"
(SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe USER). In edit mode "According to Standard"
(SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMODe STAN) the RF level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" (SOURce:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​BSPC).
Sets command :​SOURce:​POWer
Parameters:
<Power>
Example:
Options:
float
Range:
-145 dBm to 20 dBm
Increment: 0.01 dBM
*RST:
-120.3 dBm
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​POW?
queries the RF level of the wanted signal.
Response:​103.1
the RF level is -103.1 dBm
Test cases 7.x, 8.x, 6.4.2; minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11 and K42. For additionally required options see selected
test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​PRACh:​CCODing:​TYPE <Type>
The command selects the Transport Block Size.
Sets commands :​BB:​W3GP:​MST:​ENH:​PRAC:​CCOD:​TYPE
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168|TB360
TB168
transport block size 168 bits
TB360
transport block size 360 bits
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
*RST:
TB168
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC883
selects the settings for test case 8.8.3, Demodulation of RACH
Message in Static Propagation Conditions.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​PRAC:​CCOD:​TYPE TB168
selects transport block size 168 bits.
Test case 8.8.3; Option B20x, and two options B13, B10/B11, and
K42 each
506
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
Remote-Control Commands
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141 Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​STATe <State>
This command enables/disables the generation of the wanted signal in mode "User
Definable". In mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "ON."
Sets command :​BB:​W3GP:​STATe after execution of SOUR:​BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​
TCASe:​EXECute.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Options:
0|1|OFF|ON
*RST:
ON
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2, CPCH Access Preamble and Collision
Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​EMOD USER
selects mode "User definable". Also settings that are not in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​STAT OFF
disables the generation of the wanted signal.
Test cases 6.4.2, 7.3, 8.x; minimum requirement: Options B13,
B10/B11, K62 and K42. For additionally required options see
selected test case
[:​SOURce]:​BB:​W3GPp:​TS25141:​WSIGnal:​TRIGger[:​EXTernal<ch>]:​DELay
<Delay>
The command sets an additional propagation delay besides the fixed DL-UL timing offset
of 1024 chip periods.
The additional propagation delay is obtained by charging the start trigger impulse with
the respective delay.
Sets command :​BB:​W3GP:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​DELay after execution of SOUR:​
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCASe:​EXEC
Parameters:
<Delay>
Example:
Options:
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
float
Range:
0 chips to 65535 chips
*RST:
0 chips
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:​W3GP:​TS25141:​WSIG:​TRIG:​EXT:​DEL 14
sets a additional propagation delay of 14 chips.
Test case 6.4.2. Options B13, B10/B11, and K42
507
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
List of Commands
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion........................................................................................................305
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio........................................................................................479
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio........................................................................................479
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe..............................................................................480
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE..............................................................................480
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RPDetection:RATE.......................................................................481
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe..........................................................................................481
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSPClass..................................................................................................482
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:FREQuency..............................................................................482
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:POWer......................................................................................483
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe.....................................................................................................483
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe....................................................................................483
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:BWIDth.......................................................................................484
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio......................................................................................484
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:FOFFset..............................................................................485
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:POWer.................................................................................486
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe.................................................................................486
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset.....................................................................................487
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:FOFFset..................................................................487
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:POWer.....................................................................488
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:STATe.....................................................................489
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:TYPE.......................................................................489
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:POWer........................................................................................490
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation.......................................................491
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe........................................................................................491
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE..........................................................................................491
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe......................................................................................................492
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:RXDiversity...............................................................................................492
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe.....................................................................................................493
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe:MODE..........................................................................................493
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe......................................................................................................494
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe:EXECute......................................................................................494
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger....................................................................................................495
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger:OUTPut......................................................................................495
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:BTYPe.......................................................................................496
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DCRatio.....................................................................................496
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:SFORmat.....................................................................497
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa.................................................................497
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:DSELect..................................................498
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:PATTern..................................................499
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa.................................................................499
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:DSELect..................................................500
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PDSTeps.................................................501
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PUSTeps.................................................501
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE...........................................................502
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE.......................................................503
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.................................................503
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
508
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:ORATe.........................................................................503
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency...............................................................................504
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:OBANd......................................................................................504
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE............................................................505
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer.......................................................................................506
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE............................................................506
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe.......................................................................................507
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay...............................................507
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:DELete....................375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:BPFRame................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:SFORmat.................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:SRATe.....................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:STATe......................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:TYPE.......................378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:CATalog........379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:LOAD............379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:STORe..........379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CLTDiversity:STATe................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:LAYer..................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:RATE...................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:STATe.................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.............381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BLOCk:STATe...........381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:DIRection................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:MODE.....................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN.......382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:UP.............383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STATe....................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STEP:MANual........383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STEP[:
EXTernal].................................................................................................................................................384
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl[:POWer]..................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:INTerleaver2............................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe......................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:CRCSize..........386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:DATA...............386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:DATA:
DSELect..................................................................................................................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:DATA:
PATTern..................................................................................................................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:DTX..................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:EPRotection.....389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:INTerleaver......389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:
RMATtribute............................................................................................................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:STATe..............390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:TBCount...........390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:TBSize.............391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di>:TTINterval........391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:INTerleaver<di>.............................391
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
509
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe............................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE..............................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe............................................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:MODE...................................................................................329
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:STATe..................................................................................330
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet............................................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet............................................................................................330
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:LAYer................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:RATE.................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:STATe...............393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE...........393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:DERRor:BLOCk:STATe.........394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:HSDPa:HSET:PRESet.............................................330
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:PRESet.....................................................................330
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:AICH:ASLOt......................................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:AICH:SAPattern................................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:APAIch:ASLOt..................................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:APAIch:SAPattern............................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:CCODe.............................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DATA................................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DATA:DSELect.................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DATA:PATTern.................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:MCODe................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:PLENgth..............................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:POFFset:PILot.....................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:POFFset:TFCI.....................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:POFFset:TPC......................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TFCI.....................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe........................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA...........................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect............................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern...........................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse........................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep.........................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPCCh:TPC:READ..........................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA..............................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect...............340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern...............341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse...........................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep.............................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:READ..............................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:BMODe[:STATe]..................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:CVPB...................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:AMODe.....................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:BCBTti<di>................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:BPAYload<di>...........................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:CLENgth....................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:CRATe<di>...............................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA.........................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:DSELect.........................346
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
510
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:PATTern.........................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:LENgth...........................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:MODE............................347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:HSCCode..................................347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:MODulation<di>........................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:NAIBitrate..................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:PREDefined..............................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:PWPattern.................................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:RVParameter<di>.....................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:RVPSequence<di>....................350
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:S64Qam....................................351
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:SCCode.....................................351
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:SLENgth....................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:SLENgth:ADJust.......................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:SPATtern<di>............................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:STAPattern................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:INDex<di>.........................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:REFerence........................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:TABLe<di>........................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:TYPE.........................................355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:UECategory...............................355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:UEID..........................................356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:HSET:VIBSize<di>..............................356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:MIMO:CVPB<di>.................................356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:MIMO:MODulation<di>........................357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:MIMO:PWPattern.................................357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:MIMO:STAPattern...............................357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:MODE..................................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:HSDPa:TTIDistance.........................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:POWer..............................................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:SFORmat..........................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:SRATe..............................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:STATe...............................................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:TOFFset............................................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:TYPE................................................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding...............................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:AGSCope..............361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:AGVIndex..............361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:UEID......................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTICount...............................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTIEdch................................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe....................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:DTAU.....................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:ETAU......................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:RGPAttern..............................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:SSINdex.................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:TTIEdch..................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:CTYPe..................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:DTAU....................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:ETAU....................................365
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
511
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:RGPAttern............................365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:SSINdex...............................365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:TTIEdch................................365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:DLFStructure..............................................................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod......................................................................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD.....................................................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>..............................................367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL...................................................367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN..................................................368
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe.........................................................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict:RESolve...................................................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict[:STATe]....................................................................370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern....................................................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:OLTDiversity.............................................................................370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:PINDicator:COUNt....................................................................370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe.....................................................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe:STATe.........................................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCPich:PREFerence[:STATe]..................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SSCG........................................................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:STATe.......................................................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDELay.....................................................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDIVersity.................................................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POFFset..............................................368
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POMode..............................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel...............................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE..............................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:STATe..............................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE.................................................................................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MULTiplier..........................................................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce..............................................................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SYNChronization:EXECute................................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE....................................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset...............................................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination.........................................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute...............................................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce...............................................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe.............................................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation............................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:ILENgth................................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:ILENgth:AUTO.....................................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:OSAMpling...........................................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO................................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25...........................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:COSine.............................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs.............................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs..............................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM......................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine..........................................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase............................................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPe....................................................................................................310
Operating Manual 1171.5219.12 ─ 11
512
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS tests, HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LINK.................................................................................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:COUNt...........................................................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:POWer:OFFSet..........................................................